Comments for Shawon Davis

How to Ignite Your Brand & Grow Your Business in 2021

Tue, 21 Apr 2026 21:21:14 GMT

How to Ignite Your Brand & Grow Your Business in 2021

2021 Ignite Your Brand Mastermind Applications Are OPEN Now!

The New Year has arrived—which means NOW is the best time to build your brand and grow the business of your dreams!

That said, a lot of business owners feel overwhelmed right now. We just wrapped up one of the most challenging, unpredictable years many of us have ever experienced, and a lot of entrepreneurs aren’t sure where to go from here.

But there IS a way forward, my friend.

No matter where you are with your business right now, you CAN grow a more profitable, sustainable, and aligned business in 2021.

The secret to making THIS the year you finally start to see results? Guidance, strategy, and accountability.

Applications For My Ignite Your Brand Mastermind Just Opened. If You’re Ready to Finally Get Serious About Growing Your Business, This Might Just Be the Opportunity You’ve Been Waiting For.

The Ignite Your Brand Mastermind is your opportunity to get the strategies, tools, and expert support you need to grow a profitable, sustainable, and aligned service-based business in 2021.

Strictly limited to just 10 business owners, this Mastermind is an intimate group of experts who are ready to:

Build OR reinvent their brand so that they can show up confidently
Implement long-term strategy to reach their biggest goals
Live their best business owner life, without all the stress and overwhelm
Elevate their marketing and communications
Get crystal clear on their messaging
Enhance their productivity, so they can get more done in less time
…and much more!

How Can You Know Whether the Ignite Your Brand Mastermind Is Right For You?

Simple: You’re DONE trying to navigate your business growth journey by yourself.

In my own business, I struggled for years and encountered a LOT of heartache before I FINALLY realized that growing a successful business had *very* little to do with …

Pretty websites
Fancy logos
Unique fonts
Interesting color palettes
… Or any of that other fun stuff that usually pops into our heads when we think of “branding.”

…And EVERYTHING to do with creating a solid strategy, clarifying our messaging, setting clear goals, and knowing when to seek support.

Even though I wasted a lot of time, I’m glad I learned all those what-not-to-dos the hard way!

Because those obstacles are exactly what helped me learn the strategies, tools, and frameworks women entrepreneurs ACTUALLY need to get in place if they want to create sustainable, profitable businesses.

My New Year’s Wish For You Is That You’d Start This New Season With a Truly Transformational Opportunity

As a member of the Ignite Your Brand Mastermind, you and I will spend SIX full months working together to help you:

Clarify your business and brand goals.
Nail down your target client.
Create your brand’s one-liner.
Build your brandscript using Storybrand’s Brandscript.
Develop your Visual Brand Strategy + use photo/video to attract your ideal clients.
Take advantage of social media by using your network to increase your Know, Like, Trust Factor.
Plan and create more intentional content.
Elevate your customer journey/experience so you can amplify your brand and create a more premium experience.

Applications Are Open Now

And this opportunity is strictly limited to 10 business owners.

So don’t wait! The Mastermind kicks off Monday, February 1st. Will I see you there?

Get all the details right here , or click here to submit your application now.

Brand Marketing Strategy: How to Grow Your Small Business

Mon, 06 Apr 2026 15:02:02 GMT

Brand Marketing Strategy: How to Grow Your Small Business

BUSINESS AND BRANDING

Does marketing your business feel overwhelming?

You know you need to be marketing, but between social media, email lists, SEO, and everything else, it’s hard to know where to start. Maybe you’ve tried different strategies, but nothing feels consistent—or worse, you’re spinning your wheels with little to show for it.

I’ve been there.

When I first started marketing my business, I thought success was all about finding that one perfect strategy—the golden ticket that would finally bring in clients effortlessly.

Boy was I wrong! And after a few expensive lessons, I learned the real secret: success isn’t about one strategy; it’s about building a system where all your efforts work together.

This year, I’m focusing on filling my marketing buckets —making sure every part of my brand marketing strategy is aligned, intentional, and designed to attract my dream clients. And the best part? Many of these strategies are free and easy to implement—even if you’re short on time.

Strategy 1: Pinterest – A Long-Term Traffic Driver

If you’ve been thinking Pinterest is just for recipes and home decor ideas, think again. Unlike Instagram or Facebook, Pinterest is a search engine , which means your content can drive traffic to your business for months—or even years—after you post.

Here’s how I’m using Pinterest this year as part of my brand marketing strategy for small business growth:

✅ Driving traffic to my website, blog, and lead magnets

✅ Using SEO-rich keywords in my Pin descriptions so my content is discoverable

✅ Scheduling Pins in advance using Tailwind, so it runs on autopilot

If you’re thinking, “I don’t have time for one more platform,” here’s my tip: delegate or create a system . In the past, I worked with a VA who handled this for me. If that’s not in your budget, Tailwind can help you batch and schedule content efficiently.

Strategy 2: Lead Magnets – Turning Visitors into Subscribers

Think of a lead magnet as the welcome mat that invites clients into your world. The key? It must solve a real problem your audience faces.

One of my most successful lead magnets is a guide on avoiding branding mistakes— because I know that’s a challenge many business owners struggle with.

But a lead magnet isn’t just about the initial opt-in. It’s about building a relationship. When someone joins your email list, it’s not just a number—it’s a person looking for guidance. That’s why I focus on delivering consistent value through emails, tips, and insights.

This year, my goal is to create one new lead magnet each quarter to continue growing my list and serving my audience.

So, what’s one small problem you could help your audience solve today? Start there.

Strategy 3: Blogging – The SEO Goldmine

If you’ve been wondering how to get more eyes on your content and build stronger connections with your audience, blogging might be the answer.

A blog can:

✨ Boost your SEO so more people find your business

✨ Provide a space for in-depth, valuable content

✨ Help you repurpose and extend your social media and video content

This year, I’m committed to bringing my blog back to life! One of my favorite strategies? Repurposing content —turning my YouTube videos into blog posts that offer even more value. It saves time and gives my audience multiple ways to engage.

Blogging is an essential piece of any brand marketing strategy for small business owners looking to boost visibility and establish expertise.

Strategy 4: Instagram – Connection & Visibility

Instagram remains my go-to platform for building relationships. Here’s how I’m showing up this year:

�� Reels – Behind-the-scenes peeks and branding tips

�� Stories – Easy, everyday moments that spark engagement

�� Carousels – Value-packed tips and storytelling posts

And a quick reminder: don’t get discouraged by vanity metrics. Just because people aren’t liking or commenting doesn’t mean they’re not paying attention. Many of my clients have reached out after silently following for months!

Strategy 5: Facebook – Expanding My Reach

For me, Facebook is in this year. Between organic content and paid ads, it’s a powerful tool for connecting with my audience.

�� Organic content – Continuing to share from my brand pillars

�� Facebook ads – Even a small budget can be effective when paired with strong organic marketing

If you’re running ads, remember: ads work best when they’re part of a larger strategy, not a quick fix.

Strategy 6: YouTube – Content That Works 24/7

Imagine creating content that builds visibility, strengthens your brand, and connects with your audience—while you’re off doing what you love.

That’s the power of YouTube.

Unlike social media posts that fade in hours or days, video content has longevity. A single video can continue reaching new people, building trust, and positioning you as a thought leader in your industry for years.

That’s why I’m getting back to bi-weekly uploads this year, bringing you more branding and business content designed to help you show up with confidence and grow with clarity.

On my channel, I share branding and business insights for service-based entrepreneurs, covering everything from goal setting to essential tools that help you step into visibility with ease.

YouTube has been part of my journey for the past three years, and it’s been one of the best ways to build trust with my audience.

Video creates an immediate connection—your people see your face, hear your voice, and experience your energy. And that matters. Because when it comes to attracting your dream clients, trust isn’t built overnight, but the right content can accelerate it.

Have a topic you’d love to see? Drop it in the comments! I’d love to create content that meets you where you are.

Strategy 7: Networking – The Power of Real Connections

Last year, I unintentionally stepped away from networking—and I missed it. So this year, I’m making it a priority again.

For me, networking isn’t just about meeting people. It’s about building relationships. It’s about showing up in rooms filled with brilliant, magnetic women who are doing incredible things.

I’m also looking forward to hosting networking events and workshops at my studio, creating spaces for meaningful connections.

If networking is on your radar this year, here’s a simple challenge:

➡ Write down one local event or workshop to attend

➡ Commit to following up with three people you meet

You never know where one conversation can lead.

Final Thoughts: A Sustainable Brand Marketing Strategy for Small Business Owners

Marketing isn’t about finding one perfect strategy. It’s about creating a mix of strategies that work together to support your business.

A successful brand marketing strategy for small business growth isn’t built overnight—but with small, consistent steps, you’ll see progress.

If you’re looking for even more ways to market your business effectively, grab my free guide with 20 budget-friendly marketing ideas —perfect for solopreneurs like you.

Let’s make this year the one where your marketing finally feels aligned, strategic, and sustainable.

“Prefer to watch instead? Check out the video version of this blog below.

A Warm Welcome to My Brand Photography Studio in Medway, MA

Wed, 18 Feb 2026 01:56:47 GMT

A Warm Welcome to My Brand Photography Studio in Medway, MA

Lately, I’ve been decorating a few spaces in our home. Multiple trips to HomeSense, Ballard Designs, and Pottery Barn have easily become my favorite way to spend an afternoon. In the summer, you’ll usually find me in the garden, and on snowy winter days, I’m rearranging furniture or earmarking pages in design books and magazines.

I’ve always loved interior design — the way a room can completely shift depending on the paint you choose, the accessories layered in thoughtfully, and the intention behind how everything is arranged. There’s something meaningful about walking into a space that feels like it was designed with you in mind — almost like it’s giving you a quiet hug at the end of a long day. You immediately relax. You feel welcomed. You want to stay awhile.

That feeling is exactly what I want you to experience when you walk into my brand photography studio in Medway, MA.

This post — and the studio tour — is my way of opening the door before you ever step inside.

Why I Built the Studio This Way

When I first started my business over 13 years ago, I made a quiet promise to myself. I never wanted a client to feel like number 150 walking through the door. I didn’t want sessions to feel transactional or rushed. I wanted them to feel personal. Relational.

Brand photography is deeply personal work. You’re not simply hiring someone to take pictures. You’re choosing to show up and be visible for your brand. You’re allowing yourself to be seen as the leader you already are — and sometimes that step carries a layer of vulnerability.

Because of that, the environment cannot be an afterthought.

When I moved into this space, it already had beautiful bones and incredible natural light. But light alone isn’t what makes a studio feel welcoming. It had to feel warm. It had to feel intentional. It had to feel like a place where women founders and small business owners in Medway, throughout MetroWest Boston, and across the Greater Boston area could walk in, settle their shoulders, and trust the process.

What Is a Brand Photography Studio?

A brand photography studio is a space designed specifically for strategic personal brand imagery. While I offer headshots through the Brand Refresh Experience , it goes beyond traditional headshots and supports visual storytelling that reflects your leadership, expertise, and essence of who you are.

Unlike a standard portrait studio, a brand photography studio includes styled sets and thoughtfully designed environments that mirror how you actually work. The purpose is not simply to capture a flattering image, but to create visuals that align with your positioning in the market.

In my Medway studio, everything is curated to support that alignment.

The Intention Behind the Set Designs

One of the things you may notice in the studio tour is that the sets evolve. They change over time. That’s very intentional.

Your business is not static. Your positioning shifts. The way you serve expands. And the visual assets that communicate your brand also evolve.

When I design or redesign a set inside my brand photography studio in Medway, MA, I’m thinking carefully about the types of women I serve and the level they are stepping into.

A consultant often needs clean, structured imagery that communicates clarity and strategy. A speaker or book author may need open, confident standing space that suggests stage presence. A luxury realtor or interior designer may need elevated textures and polished tones that reflect refinement. A coach or therapist may benefit from softer, conversational seating that conveys approachability and trust.

The design is not decorative for decoration’s sake. It is strategic. It is built to support what you actually do, to show how you work, and what it feels like to work with you.

And because my clients are founders and small business owners within the MetroWest Boston and Greater Boston business communities, the sets are designed with that professional landscape in mind.

What You Can Expect Before and During Your Session

If you are considering personal brand photography in MetroWest Boston, I want you to know that your session begins long before you arrive.

We discuss your goals in advance. We talk through your positioning. We clarify how you want to be perceived — not just now, but in the next season of your business.

By the time you walk into the studio, the sets have been thoughtfully selected. You know exactly what you’re wearing and what brand props to bring. There is a plan, but there is also space to adjust naturally as we move. The answer is always yes to bring a last minute outfit that you think might be a good addition. If you feel like you’re bringing too much, you’re bringing enough.

The experience itself is calm and guided. I direct you in movement rather than rigid poses so that your images feel natural and aligned. I interact with you the entire time and we refine as we go, making micro adjustments and subtle details that elevate the final result.

My goal is that during your session, you’re thinking about the clients you want to attract and the level you’re preparing to step into. I want you to picture these images living on your website, supporting your offers, introducing you before you ever enter the room — and to feel fully confident using them in your business.

Why Environment Shapes Confidence

The environment of a brand photography studio absolutely influences how you feel, and how you feel influences how you show up. When a space is warm and intentional, your posture naturally steadies. Your expression softens. You feel more at ease in your own presence.

But the environment alone is not what creates confident images.

The person guiding you through the experience matters just as much.

Over the years, I’ve learned that my role isn’t simply to adjust lighting or frame a shot. It’s to set the tone. To bring a calm, steady presence into the room. To reflect back to you the leader you already are — especially in moments when you’re still settling into that next level yourself.

The studio in Medway was designed to feel welcoming, yes. The light, the sets, and the pacing of our time together are all intentional. But what truly shapes the experience is the relationship built within those walls.

I guide you. I adjust gently. I notice the small shifts in posture and energy. I create space for you to grow comfortable. And in that steadiness, something powerful happens.

You don’t just look confident.

You begin to embody it.

And when confidence is embodied, your leadership becomes visible in a way that feels natural and aligned.

Local Presence, Real Positioning

There is something powerful about working with a brand photographer who understands your local market. Serving women founders and small business owners throughout Medway, MetroWest Boston, and the Greater Boston area means I understand the rooms you’re walking into — networking events, leadership panels, community gatherings, speaking opportunities.

Your women founder brand photos in Medway are not just for social media. They are assets that support your visibility in your actual community.

And they should reflect the level you are already operating at.

This Is Your Invitation

As you watch the studio tour, I hope you don’t just see furniture and backdrops. I hope you imagine yourself here — feeling confident, prepared, and aligned with your next chapter.

This studio was built with care because I care deeply about the women who walk through the door. It exists to support your visibility in a way that feels like you.

You deserve a space that reflects who you are before you even begin.

If you’re a woman founder or small business owner in Medway or the MetroWest Boston area and ready for your brand presence to reflect your level, let’s start there.

If you’re hosting an event or leadership gathering and want to talk about brand visibility for women founders, I’d love to connect.

Watch the Studio Tour on YouTube:

Frequently Asked Questions

What is a brand photography studio?

A brand photography studio is a space designed specifically for strategic personal brand images. It includes styled sets and professional lighting that help communicate leadership, authority, and personality beyond traditional headshots.

Why does environment matter in brand photography?

Environment impacts comfort and confidence, which directly affect posture, expression, and overall presence. A welcoming studio allows women founders to relax, resulting in images that feel natural and aligned.

How do you prepare for a brand photography session in Medway, MA?

Preparation includes clarifying your brand positioning, selecting wardrobe pieces that reflect your level, and discussing your goals in advance so the studio sets support your next stage of visibility.

A Retreat for Women in Business

Thu, 09 Oct 2025 01:45:46 GMT

A Retreat for Women in Business

I still remember the first time I gave myself permission to step away.

It was a quiet week in December, years ago. I had booked a last-minute room at a cozy inn in Newport, Rhode Island—not for a family trip, not for a client meeting, but just for me.

I told myself it was a time to “get ahead” on business planning. My to-do list was long, and I planned to power through it.

And yes, I was productive.

I wrote 12 blog posts. I mapped out the next year. I checked boxes like a pro.

But in between the doing… something unexpected happened.

The Quiet That Changes Everything

Stillness crept in.

With no one else to tend to, and no noise to manage, I finally heard my own thoughts again. That time away didn’t just give me a plan—it gave me back my perspective.

That simple pause planted the seed for what would become a foundational routine in my business. Quarterly solo, business retreats.

How Retreats Became My Reset

Since that first time away, retreats have become a regular part of my business—not a luxury, but a lifeline.

Every time I step away, I return more focused, more grounded, and more connected to the kind of business—and life—I truly want to build.

That’s why I created Gather & Ground: A Retreat for Women in Business .

The Site Visit That Brought It Full Circle

Just yesterday, I visited the venue where we’ll gather this fall.

The beautiful Stage Neck Inn in York, Maine, sits right at the edge of the ocean—and I haven’t stopped thinking about it since.

As I walked the grounds, stood in the rooms we’ll use, and looked out at the sea, I imagined you there.

I thought about what it would feel like to finally pause.

To step outside of the pressure.

To reconnect with your voice.

To reset with intention.

Who This Retreat Is For

This experience is designed for women entrepreneurs who are doing so much for everyone else—and ready to take a moment for themselves.

It’s not about escaping your life.

It’s about returning to it with renewed energy, fresh clarity, and a clear vision for what’s next.

Whether you’re a coach, designer, therapist, photographer, or creative business owner—

Whether you’re growing or pivoting—

Whether you feel clear or quietly scattered—

Gather & Ground was made with you in mind.

What to Expect at Gather & Ground

Here’s a glimpse of how our time together will unfold:

Two and a half days of reflection, clarity, and connection
Retreat sessions designed for grounded visioning and focused strategy
Time for journaling, walking the beach, or simply thinking
Evenings spent in real conversation with women who understand your world
Space to map out your next chapter—without noise, pressure, or distraction
A plan that feels spacious, not rushed

Each part of the retreat is intentional.

Everything is designed to give you space to breathe, reflect, and lead again—from a place of alignment.

What You’ll Walk Away With

You’ll leave this retreat with:

✔ A clear plan for your business

✔ Deep clarity around what’s next—and how to move forward

✔ Real rest that turns into renewed energy

✔ Connection with other women who lead with heart

✔ An experience that lingers long after you return home

This isn’t another workshop.

It’s a reset.

Retreat Details

�� Location : Stage Neck Inn, York, Maine

�� Early Bird reopened: $697

�� Regular Price : $879

�� Lodging booked separately. Group rates available.

✨ [Reserve Your Spot Now]

Your Invitation to Step Away

This is your invitation.

To pause.

To reflect.

To return stronger than ever.

Because you don’t need to push harder to lead well.

You simply need space to breathe—and someone to walk beside you as you step into what’s next.

�� I’d love for you to be there.

Why Storytelling Might Be the Missing Piece in Your Brand Strategy

Sat, 13 Sep 2025 15:11:22 GMT

What if the stories you tell are the part of your brand people remember— even when they forget everything else?

When I first started my business, I believed that getting the “right” logo, brand colors, and website would bring in the right clients. But even with all of those pieces in place, something felt… off. I wasn’t attracting the kind of clients I truly wanted to work with.

Then everything changed.

I started sharing stories.

Not to go viral.

Not to impress the algorithm.

But to connect.

Because when you share the right kinds of stories, something powerful happens. Your content stops just being seen—it starts being felt. You begin building trust. Resonance. And you stop sounding like everyone else.

That one shift transformed my business—and how I show up in it.

When I First Learne d the Power of Story

Back when I was a wedding photographer, I focused on sharing beautiful photos with kind captions. And while people liked the images, they didn’t connect. Something was missing.

One day, I tried something new. I told the couple’s story alongside the photos. Their journey, the quiet moments they shared, the way her dad looked at her just before she walked down the aisle.

That post? It didn’t just get likes. It got heartfelt responses.

The couple reached out with gratitude. Their family and friends commented about how it moved them to tears. They felt seen.

And I realized—it wasn’t about the photos. It was about the meaning behind them.

That was the moment I understood the power of storytelling. And I’ve been writing and sharing stories ever since.

3 Stories Every Brand Needs to Tell

After years of working with women entrepreneurs, especially through my On Brand, On Purpose sessions, I’ve found that three types of stories make the biggest impact on your brand:

1. Your Why Story

Why you started. What drives you. Why you care about the people you serve.

This isn’t about having a dramatic backstory. It’s about sharing your truth. Your why helps your audience feel something. It reveals your values, your heart, and your deeper mission. And when you share it—not just once, but often—it reminds people why you are the one they want to work with.

Because even if there are a million people who do what you do, no one else carries your exact story. That’s your edge. That’s your magnet.

2. Your Experience Story

These are the everyday, seemingly small moments that shape how you see the world—and the work you do.

One of my favorite experience stories is about planting zinnias. I wasn’t sure they’d grow. Days went by with no sign of life, and I started to doubt. Then, one morning, tiny green shoots appeared.

That moment reminded me: growth often happens beneath the surface. Just because we can’t see it doesn’t mean it’s not working.

That’s the kind of story that helps your audience feel less alone in their journey—and more connected to yours.

I always encourage clients to write down moments from their day that spark a feeling or lesson. Whether it’s from gardening, client calls, or something your child says—there’s a story there. Your job is to find it, shape it, and share it.

3. Your Transformation Story

This is the story of how your work helped someone create change.

It’s my favorite kind of story to share—because seeing transformation in my clients is why I do what I do. Whether it’s a new level of confidence, a business breakthrough, or a deeper sense of alignment, these stories show what’s possible.

When you tell transformation stories, your audience sees themselves in them. And that’s the moment where connection becomes conversion.

What to Do Next

I want to leave you with a gentle challenge:

�� Think back to a recent moment that made you pause, reflect, or learn something new.

�� Write it down.

�� Ask yourself: “How could this help someone else?”

�� Then share it—on social, in an email, or even a conversation.

Because your story could be exactly what someone else needs to hear right now.

And remember—your brand isn’t just about what you offer. It’s about how you make people feel. That’s the real magic of storytelling.

Why Storytelling Might Be the Missing Piece in Your Brand Strategy

Ready to be Seen? Join the Visibility Workshop for Women Entrepreneurs This Fall

Sat, 30 Aug 2025 01:32:04 GMT

Ready to Be Seen? Join the Visibility Workshop for Women Entrepreneurs This Fall

You’ve built a business you care deeply about—

but showing up, being visible, and putting yourself out there? Still feels uncomfortable.

You’ve built a business you care deeply about—

but showing up, being visible, and putting yourself out there? Still feels uncomfortable.

A few months ago, I got a notice from Meta (aka Facebook ��) letting me know they were making some updates and would be taking down old Live videos.

And suddenly, I was taken back to January 3, 2020—the very first time I ever went live after pivoting my brand.

Let me tell you… I was SO nervous.

My hands were shaking, I wasn’t sure what to say, and when I look back at that video now?

✨ My shirt collar was all messed up

✨ I kept repeating how nervous I was

✨ I could’ve picked a better outfit (sigh…)

But you know what? I showed up anyway.

Because I knew that if I waited for the “perfect” moment, I’d never do it.

�� Confidence doesn’t come first—action does.

I know so many women entrepreneurs who want to be more visible, but fear, overthinking, and perfectionism keep them stuck.

They tell themselves:

❌ “I’ll start showing up when I feel more confident.”

❌ “I need to have it all figured out first.”

❌ “What if people judge me?”

But the truth is—

The only way to feel confident showing up… is to start.

That’s exactly why I created this branding workshop for women entrepreneurs —to help you show up before you feel “ready,” and build a brand that aligns with who you really are.

When I opened my studio, I wanted a space not only for brand photos but a space where women in business could gather, step outside their comfort zone, grow and finally feel seen.

And every time I’ve hosted a workshop here, it makes me smile seeing that vision come to life.

This September, it’s happening again.

✨ On Wednesday, September 24 , the “Becoming the Face of Your Brand” Visibility Workshop is back—and you’re invited.

This Workshop Is for You If…

You built your business with heart.

You serve your clients with care.

But showing up as the face of your brand?

Feels awkward. Draining. Maybe even scary.

You procrastinate on content.

Overthink every caption.

Wonder if you’re doing it “right.”

You’re not behind—

you’re just missing the clarity and support that make visibility easier.

What You’ll Walk Away With

✔ A clear, sustainable plan for being visible—without burning out

✔ Breakthroughs that finally remove what’s been holding you back

✔ Strategies tailored to your brand and voice

✔ The confidence to show up—and be recognized

✔ Your personalized Visibility Blueprint to guide your boldest steps

If you’re a heart-led business owner who’s ready to show up more fully as the face of your brand, this branding workshop for women entrepreneurs was designed with you in mind.

Real Women. Real Results.

Here’s what past attendees have said:

“This workshop helped me realize how important visibility is and gave me the tools I need to show up for my business with more confidence.”

“I left with tools, strategies, and resources I could implement right away.”

“Her workshops, coaching, and content helped me find clarity, confidence, and the courage to share my voice.”

Want a peek at what it’s like?

�� [ Watch a behind-the-scenes peek at the last Visibility Workshop]

Details + Registration

�� When : Wednesday, September 24, 2025

�� Where : Shawon Davis Studio, Medway, MA

�� Spots : 10 total — 1 already claimed

�� Investment : $199

�� Bonus 1:1 Strategy Call when you register by September 10

�� [Grab Your Seat Now for this Branding Workshop for Women Entrepreneurs]

Already know you’re in? Click here to register now and claim your bonus before September 10.

You don’t need to be someone different.

You just need support that helps you show up as you—with more ease, more clarity, and more confidence.

You’re ready to be seen—

let’s make that happen.

I’ll see you at the studio,

Shawon

Bonus When You Register by September 10:

Get a private 20-minute 1:1 Strategy Call with me to map out your visibility goals and create a content focus you can feel confident in.

Already know you’re in? Click here to register now and claim your bonus before September 10.

Brand Marketing Strategy: How to Grow Your Small Business

Tue, 11 Feb 2025 01:25:40 GMT

Brand Marketing Strategy: How to Grow Your Small Business

Does marketing your business feel overwhelming?

I’ve been there.

When I first started marketing my business, I thought success was all about finding that one perfect strategy—the golden ticket that would finally bring in clients effortlessly.

Boy was I wrong! And after a few expensive lessons, I learned the real secret: success isn’t about one strategy; it’s about building a system where all your efforts work together.

This year, I’m focusing on filling my marketing buckets —making sure every part of my brand marketing strategy is aligned, intentional, and designed to attract my dream clients. And the best part? Many of these strategies are free and easy to implement—even if you’re short on time.

Strategy 1: Pinterest – A Long-Term Traffic Driver

If you’ve been thinking Pinterest is just for recipes and home decor ideas, think again. Unlike Instagram or Facebook, Pinterest is a search engine , which means your content can drive traffic to your business for months—or even years—after you post.

Here’s how I’m using Pinterest this year as part of my brand marketing strategy for small business growth:

✅ Driving traffic to my website, blog, and lead magnets

✅ Using SEO-rich keywords in my Pin descriptions so my content is discoverable

✅ Scheduling Pins in advance using Tailwind , so it runs on autopilot

If you’re thinking, “I don’t have time for one more platform,” here’s my tip: delegate or create a system. In the past, I worked with a VA who handled this for me. If that’s not in your budget, Tailwind can help you batch and schedule content efficiently.

Strategy 2: Lead Magnets – Turning Visitors into Subscribers

Think of a lead magnet as the welcome mat that invites clients into your world. The key? It must solve a real problem your audience faces.

One of my most successful lead magnets is a guide on avoiding branding mistakes —because I know that’s a challenge many business owners struggle with.

This year, my goal is to create one new lead magnet each quarter to continue growing my list and serving my audience.

So, what’s one small problem you could help your audience solve today? Start there.

Strategy 3: Blogging – The SEO Goldmine

If you’ve been wondering how to get more eyes on your content and build stronger connections with your audience, blogging might be the answer.

A blog can:

✨ Boost your SEO so more people find your business

✨ Provide a space for in-depth, valuable content

✨ Help you repurpose and extend your social media and video content

Blogging is an essential piece of any brand marketing strategy for small business owners looking to boost visibility and establish expertise.

Strategy 4: Instagram – Connection & Visibility

Instagram remains my go-to platform for building relationships. Here’s how I’m showing up this year:

�� Reels – Behind-the-scenes peeks and branding tips

�� Stories – Easy, everyday moments that spark engagement

�� Carousels – Value-packed tips and storytelling posts

Strategy 5: Facebook – Expanding My Reach

For me, Facebook is in this year. Between organic content and paid ads, it’s a powerful tool for connecting with my audience.

�� Organic content – Continuing to share from my brand pillars

�� Facebook ads – Even a small budget can be effective when paired with strong organic marketing

If you’re running ads, remember: ads work best when they’re part of a larger strategy, not a quick fix.

Strategy 6: YouTube – Content That Works 24/7

Imagine creating content that builds visibility, strengthens your brand, and connects with your audience—while you’re off doing what you love.

That’s the power of YouTube.

That’s why I’m getting back to bi-weekly uploads this year, bringing you more branding and business content designed to help you show up with confidence and grow with clarity.

On my channel, I share branding and business insights for service-based entrepreneurs, covering everything from goal setting to essential tools that help you step into visibility with ease.

YouTube has been part of my journey for the past three years, and it’s been one of the best ways to build trust with my audience.

Have a topic you’d love to see? Drop it in the comments! I’d love to create content that meets you where you are.

Strategy 7: Networking – The Power of Real Connections

Last year, I unintentionally stepped away from networking —and I missed it. So this year, I’m making it a priority again.

For me, networking isn’t just about meeting people. It’s about building relationships. It’s about showing up in rooms filled with brilliant, magnetic women who are doing incredible things.

I’m also looking forward to hosting networking events and workshops at my studio, creating spaces for meaningful connections.

If networking is on your radar this year, here’s a simple challenge:

➡ Write down one local event or workshop to attend

➡ Commit to following up with three people you meet

You never know where one conversation can lead.

Final Thoughts: A Sustainable Brand Marketing Strategy for Small Business Owners

Marketing isn’t about finding one perfect strategy. It’s about creating a mix of strategies that work together to support your business.

A successful brand marketing strategy for small business growth isn’t built overnight—but with small, consistent steps, you’ll see progress.

If you’re looking for even more ways to market your business effectively, grab my free guide with 20 budget-friendly marketing ideas —perfect for solopreneurs like you.

Let’s make this year the one where your marketing finally feels aligned, strategic, and sustainable.

“Prefer to watch instead? Check out the video version of this blog below.

How to Make 2025 Your Best Year Yet

Sat, 25 Jan 2025 01:14:20 GMT

How to Make 2025 Your Best Year Yet

Imagine looking back at 2025 and feeling a sense of joy and great accomplishment, knowing it was your best year yet. What if that became your reality? In this post, I’m sharing seven steps to help you dream big, take action, and make 2025 the year you’ve always envisioned.

My Journey to Intentional Goal Setting

I can remember a time when I’d jot down a list of New Year’s resolutions on a random piece of paper or Post-it note and literally forget about them. One year, while cleaning out the drawer of my desk, I discovered one of those lists of resolutions—completely untouched.

A lot has changed since then.

I’ve realized that change can happen anytime; you don’t have to wait until a new year rolls around to create intentions and goals.

The other thing that has changed is how intentional I’ve become about my goals. I use the Powersheets Goal Planner , a system that works, and I love sharing that system with others.

Step 1: Set Clear Goals and Write Them Down

This step is all about gaining clarity and focus. Writing your goals down isn’t just a formality; there’s science behind it. Studies show that people who write down their goals are significantly more likely to achieve them.

But don’t stop at vague goals like “travel” or “grow my business.” Be specific. Where do you want to travel? What aspect of your business do you want to grow? For example, “Visit Greece in May and stay for two weeks” or “Launch a new product line and gain 50 new customers by Q2.”

I also want to encourage you to think beyond business. When it comes to setting goals, this has been one of the best decisions that I’ve made. Consider all areas of your life. Here’s a list of ideas to get you started:

Spiritual Growth : Deepen your faith or start a daily gratitude journal to improve your mindset.
Personal Development : Focus on skills, education, or leadership growth.
Relationships : Strengthen family connections or friendships.
Health : Prioritize physical well-being and self-care.
Community : Volunteer or give back.
Hobbies : Revisit old passions or explore new ones. Make space for fun!
Business and Finances : Define specific growth milestones.

Take a moment to reflect: Where are you now in each of these areas? What do you want to improve and grow in 2025? Whether you use a journal, planner, or simple notebook, what matters most is taking that first step.

Step 2: Create a Vision Activator

You’ve written your goals. Now, let’s make them visual so they stay top of mind. This is where a “vision activator” comes in. It’s more than a vision board; it’s a motivator—a daily reminder of what you’re working towards.

Some ideas include:

A traditional vision board with magazine clippings.
A digital board created on Canva.
A private Pinterest board.

On my vision board, I focus on zones created from my goals that matter most: mindset, health, relationships, business, and time to pause. One quote I’ve included this year is from Jim Rohn: “Success is nothing more than a few simple disciplines practiced every day.” Seeing it daily reminds me to stay consistent.

Step 3: Step Outside Your Com fort Zone

Growth happens when we stretch ourselves. Let me share a personal story: I once attended a workshop by Parker Pfister called Not the Same Old Stuff. (it was another “s” word, but let’s go with stuff��)

It was designed to challenge everything I thought I knew as a photographer. We faced exercises that pushed us to the brink of tears, but those failures taught me invaluable lessons. It was one of the most transformative photography workshops that I ever attended. The lessons learned in that weekend have been transferrable to many areas of my life.

Stepping outside your comfort zone isn’t easy, but it’s where the magic happens. Is there something you’ve been dreaming about—starting a YouTube channel, launching a new offer, or speaking at an event? This is your time.

Step 4: Build Accountability and Support Systems

Don’t go it alone. Find someone to encourage and hold you accountable. Sometimes, the difference between finishing a project and giving up is having someone to check in with.

Ask yourself:

Do you need weekly or monthly check-ins?
Could a friend join you for workouts or brainstorming sessions?
Would a coach or mentor help you stay focused?

Last year, partnering with someone for accountability made all the difference in achieving one of my goals. Think about what kind of support you need and don’t hesitate to ask for it.

Step 5: Create Boundaries and Make Space for Joy

This step is all about balance. Burnout doesn’t help anyone, so creating boundaries and making time for joy is essential. For me, that means scheduling downtime for gardening, reading, and solo business retreats.

On my vision board, I’ve included a zone that says, “Permission to Pause.” It’s a reminder to say yes to what fills my cup and no to what doesn’t. What brings you joy? Make space for it in 2025.

Step 6: Stay Consistent, Not Perfect

My word for 2025 is consistency . It’s not about doing everything perfectly; it’s about showing up regularly. Small, consistent actions lead to big results.

Here’s how to start:

Break your goals into small, manageable steps.
Plan your actions weekly or monthly.
Focus on progress, not perfection.

If you’re feeling overwhelmed, start with one thing. Build the habit, then move to the next.

Step 7: Reflect and Celebrate Your Wins

Finally, reflection and celebration are key. Take time at the end of each day, week, or month to reflect on your progress. Ask yourself:

What did I learn?
What did I accomplish?
What can I improve?

Celebrating even the small wins helps build momentum and keeps you motivated. Remember, this journey is not just about reaching goals but about the process of becoming your best self.

Let’s Make 2025 Amazing

Which step resonates most with you? Share your goals for 2025 in the comments—I’d love to cheer you on. Here’s to dreaming big, taking action, and making this year one to remember!

“Prefer to watch instead? Check out the video version of this blog below.

How to Create a Client Onboarding Process That Wows

Thu, 14 Sep 2023 01:05:10 GMT

How to Create a Client Onboarding Process That Wows

I had just finished recording my latest YouTube video, and guess what?

Siri must have been eavesdropping!

As soon as I hopped on Instagram, the first thing I saw was a post someone shared about a dissatisfied client’s onboarding experience. YIKES!!

Now, I know what you might be thinking – “Why should you care about onboarding? It’s just a small part of your business.”

But here’s the thing – your client onboarding experience is the very first impression you make on your clients after they’ve said YES to working with you.

It sets the tone for your entire working relationship.

In phase four of my Brand and Visibility Accelerator, I guide my clients through creating systems in their business for a remarkable client experience that builds brand loyalty and trust which leads to repeat business and referrals.

Here are 3 reasons why your client onboarding process is important:

Establish Clear Expectations

Setting clear expectations is essential for ensuring a great client experience. Your onboarding can help set realistic expectations, how you’ll communicate with them, any next steps, and the important details your client needs to know.

Builds Trust

A client onboarding process that wows your clients will also help to build trust between you and your clients. After a client has said yes to working with you, an efficient onboarding process will let them know they are in good hands, valued, and appreciated. This is especially important if you are working with a new client or someone who may not have previously worked with you.

Enhances Your Brand Image

Finally, having a great client onboarding process can enhance your brand image by showing potential customers that you care about them and their experience working with you from start to finish. A great onboarding experience and, ultimately your client experience can leave a lasting impression, making your clients more likely to become loyal customers.

f you’re ready to take the first step in boosting your client experience to a whole new level, today’s video is for you.

I’m sharing insights on:

Streamlining your client onboarding process.
How to save time by utilizing a CRM
Creating the perfect client experience for your brand with ease

And, I’m sharing a quick tutorial of my client onboarding process.

Watch it here: https://youtu.be/6QObCHWv1cs

Nancy's Garden and Five Lessons it Taught Me About Building a Brand

Mon, 07 Aug 2023 01:01:11 GMT

Nancy’s Garden and Five Lessons it Taught Me About Building a Brand

Take a stroll through Nancy’s Garden with me and discover the valuable lessons it teaches about building a remarkable brand and business.

Have you ever strolled through a beautiful garden and felt an overwhelming sense of tranquility and beauty?

This is exactly what I experienced last week when I visited my sweet friend Nancy for lunch.

Not only were we having lunch, BUT I would finally get to see her beautiful gardens in person❤️

Let me tell you, the pictures I’d seen simply didn’t do it justice. The moment I arrived, I was overwhelmed with awe.

At every turn, there was something new and exciting to explore.

It was as if each corner of her garden had its own story��

Little did I know, I’d come away from this visit not only having spent time with my friend in her beautiful gardens but also with some valuable lessons.

And, I’m sharing a few of them with you��

Nancy’s Garden and the Valuable Lessons it Taught Me About Building a Brand

Lesson #1: Good things take time and patience.

Nancy’s garden didn’t magically appear overnight. It took time and dedication to carve out each beautiful space. Just like your brand, creating something truly remarkable requires patience and a willingness to put in the necessary effort.

Lesson #2: Be intentional.

Every flower was thoughtfully planted in specific locations to ensure it received the right amount of light and nourishment. Being greeted by the sounds of beautiful wind chimes and clusters of flowers all made me smile. Her Wowie Zowie Zinnias were showstoppers in the sun!

When we put thought and intention into every element of our brand—it leaves our clients feeling special, the way I did at Nancy’s.

Lesson #3: Know who you want to attract.

Nancy’s garden was teeming with hummingbirds, drawn to the vibrant flowers she strategically planted to attract them. If you’re wondering, one of those flowers is a Lantana. This reminded me of the power of knowing the clients you want to attract. By knowing who you want to attract, you can tailor your messaging, marketing, and experiences for them.

Lesson #4: You need a roadmap.

To achieve the stunning array of colors throughout the summer, Nancy had a strategy that included a plan with over 50 potted plants. From sentimental cascading hydrangeas to some of the tallest purple phlox that I’ve seen, every space was stunning. Similarly, in business, having a well-thought-out strategy is vital for success. It acts as a roadmap, guiding our daily actions to ensure we reach our goals.

Lesson #5: Your big-picture vision is EVERYTHING.

Although I didn’t ask her, I imagine Nancy had a big-picture vision for her garden. A vision of lunches with friends surrounded by flowers, welcoming clients to her cottage, visits from sweet hummingbirds, and relaxing evenings sipping cocktails with her husband. This overarching vision guided her decisions and gave her purpose.

Having a clear vision for your brand is a guide to map out your goals, informs the things you say yes to, and compels you to stay focused on your true north.

My visit to Nancy’s gardens was a beautiful reminder that creating something remarkable takes time, intentionality, and vision.��

With the right strategy in place, the possibilities are endless for your brand.

Don’t just dream of a thriving brand; make it a reality!

If you’re a woman business owner who is ready to strengthen your brand, show up with more confidence, and create a business that connects with the people you’re meant to serve, I’d love for you to explore my current workshops, events, and brand experiences.

Click here to view current workshops and upcoming events.

Your brand deserves to shine, just like the breathtaking blooms in Nancy’s garden!

How to Make the Most of Summer as a Busy Mom and Small Business Owner

Fri, 09 Jun 2023 00:57:47 GMT

How to Make the Most of Summer as a Busy Mom and Small Business Owner

As a small business owner, summer can feel like a balancing act between work and family.

And as a mompreneur and wedding photographer for ten years, I know firsthand how challenging it can be to juggle the responsibilities of running a business and enjoying your summer.

My business and my weekends are different now, but I remember navigating the summer months during my wedding photography career vividly.

There were many vacations spent with my laptop in tow and working early in the morning hours before our vacation day would start. Oh, the places my laptop has been.

If you’ve ever felt overwhelmed by this balancing act, today’s video is for you!

I’m sharing the strategies I’ve developed over the years.

From setting boundaries and prioritizing tasks to planning ahead and reviewing your systems, I hope these tips will help you thrive in both your personal and professional life this summer.

So, if you’re ready to make this summer SUNsational, watch the video here: https://youtu.be/bLyHCXNRyEQ

Don’t forget to subscribe for more tips, insights and resources designed to support you on your journey as a small business owner.

5 Simple Steps to Elevate Your Brand Overnight with Brand Photography

Tue, 25 Apr 2023 21:54:56 GMT

5 Simple Steps to Elevate Your Brand Overnight with Brand Photography

As I opened up the email, I couldn’t help but break out into a huge smile. Allison, one of my recent branding clients, sent me an incredible testimonial about how our work together helped elevate her brand overnight!

I was absolutely ecstatic knowing that all of our hard work planning the concept for her shoot, styling her wardrobe, and adding her brand elements through props had paid off .

She was so pleased with the results.

And as a brand photographer , seeing her results felt amazing!

It also made me realize even more just how powerful brand photography can be in helping entrepreneurs get their businesses off the ground quickly and effectively—even overnight!

Great visuals and consistent images that communicate your brand messaging could give anyone the opportunity to stand out, attract the right clients, and take their business to the next level faster.

And let’s face it, standing out from the crowd can be tough. But, with the right images, you can set your business apart and reach your target audience. I believe brand photography can be a powerful tool in building your brand.

In this blog post, I’m sharing five simple steps that will help you elevate your brand overnight with brand photography. Whether you’re a new business owner or you’ve been in business for years, these tips will help you to create on-brand images that truly represent your brand, capture your essence and connect with your audience.

Step 1: Define Your Brand’s Message

What do you want your photos to say? The first step in elevating your brand through brand photography is to define your brand’s message. Before you schedule your branding session, consider what your brand stands for, what makes it unique, and what message you want to convey to your ideal client or avatar. Share your brand messaging with your photographer. This will help you plan your photoshoot accordingly and ensure that your images align with your brand’s message and the potential clients you want to reach.

Step 2: Plan Your Photoshoot

Once you have an understanding of your brand message and how you want to show up, it’s time to plan your photoshoot. Start by creating a mood board that includes images that reflect your brand identity. Next, decide on the location, props, and outfits you want to use. Make sure that everything is consistent with your brand. Just because you see a photo you love on Pinterest doesn’t make it right for your brand.

Step 3: Work with a Professional Photographer

If you want your brand to stand out, you need to work with a professional photographer who can capture your brand essence in stunning images. Working with an experienced photographer who specializes in branding photography can be just what your business needs to really stand out from the crowd and emphasize its unique essence!

Step 4: Use Your Images

Sharing your brand photos for the first time can feel vulnerable, but using them is a great way to connect with potential clients and grow your visibility. Don’t be afraid to share who you are beyond a logo.

Use your images across your website, social media channels, and marketing materials, such as business cards, proposals, presentations, and more. Make sure that the images you use are consistent with your brand identity.

Step 5: Leverage Social Media

Social media is a great tool for getting your brand out there and connecting with potential clients. When planning out your photo shoot, keep your social media content plan in mind.

What kinds of brand images might you need for the content you’re planning — this could be anything from portrait-styled shots that showcase you and what you do to lifestyle images; it all depends on what makes sense for your business.

Social media is a great way to share different aspects of your brand personality through images—this will help give people an idea of who you are, what you offer, and why they should choose YOU.

Your images can be used for social media graphics, ads, Instagram and Facebook posts, covers for IG reels, IG stories, social media profiles, and so much more!

Alright, there you have it, five simple steps to elevate your brand overnight with brand photography. By defining your brand message, planning your photoshoot, working with a pro, using your images, and leveraging social media, you can create a powerful brand that stands out overnight.

Whether you’re a new entrepreneur or an established business, brand photography is a powerful tool that can help you connect with your audience and grow your business.

So, what are you waiting for? Start planning your brand photography session today and take your brand to the next level overnight!

If you’re looking for a Brand Photographer in Metrowest Boston, I’d love to chat!

Click here to schedule a consultation.

5 Reasons Why Brand Photos Can Help Your Small Business Stand Out

Wed, 05 Apr 2023 00:50:03 GMT

5 Reasons Why Brand Photos Can Help Your Small Business Stand Out

If you’re a small business owner or entrepreneur, you know that standing out and cutting through the noise of today’s online space is no easy task.

So, how can you make sure your business stands out?

One powerful way to do just that is with the help of brand photography.

Your brand photos are SO much more than pretty pictures.

They are an essential tool for connecting with your ideal clients, telling your brand’s story, and differentiating your business.

In this blog, I’m sharing five reasons why brand photos can help your small business stand out so your unique voice isn’t lost in a sea of noise.

Alright, let’s dive in!

1. I’m sure you’ve heard the saying “A picture is worth a thousand words.” And we could say your brand photos are worth a thousand words. Studies show that people are more likely to remember and engage with visual content rather than text alone. Which makes brand photos a must-have for any small business.

Your brand photography should tell your brand’s story in a creative way – showing off the unique personality of your business.

The key here is to use your photos along with your copy, the content, and the words that you share to connect to the story.

When I’m working with brand photography clients, I think about what story can they tell with the photos that we create.

2. Connect with your target audience. Your photos should reflect the person behind your brand, as well as your values and mission. You can show potential customers how you help them, who you are, what makes you unique, and why they should say yes to working with you.

Take them on a journey, and show them how they’ll feel when they work with you.

You can do this by using photos that show off what makes you different – like behind-the-scenes glimpses of the work you do, the way you serve your clients, special touchpoints, or a look at how you do what you do.

3. Let your photos speak to the aspirational identity of your dream clients. What does your ideal client want? By aligning your brand photos with what they want, you can create a connection with them. You’re telling a story that leaves an impression about what they aspire to.

Realtors often advise clients who are selling their homes to depersonalize them to help them sell faster.

Why?

Because when a potential buyer walks through the home, you want them to envision themselves living there.

But that can be hard to do if they’re distracted by the seller’s personal items.

The buyer wants to be able to see themselves living there, cooking dinner in the kitchen, playing games in the family room, or sitting in front of the fireplace reading a book.

You might not be selling a home, but if you’re a small business owner knowing your client’s aspirational identity also helps you to connect with want they want.

Do they want better health, more time to spend with their family and friends, or more spaciousness in their business?

Your brand photos are a great way to speak to what your ideal clients want.

If you’re an interior designer, for example, a photo of you adding final touches to a space, fluffing a pillow, or in a beautifully designed room can help potential clients see the space they want.

If you have a health and wellness brand, a photo of you outside on a walk or run or standing on the top of a hill with your hands in the air, or making a healthy breakfast or lunch can help your target audience see themselves and what they aspire to.

4. Set yourself apart. Brand images that truly tell the story of YOUR business so it can’t be missed or confused with anyone else’s – now THAT’S power and how you set yourself apart! You don’t just have to blend in, but instead stand out from everyone else when you share what makes YOU completely unique through visuals.

And by using consistent brand photos on your website, social media channels, and other marketing materials, you can increase your brand awareness, and create a strong online presence that builds your know, like, trust factor.

In order to have consistent images, I believe it’s important to work with a brand photographer who can create images that are on-brand. This way, you’ll ensure that all of your photos have the same look and feel, so they work together to create a cohesive brand identity that stops the scroll.

5. Your brand photos can be used in all of your marketing. Social media, speaking events, graphics, lead generators, sales pages, covers for IG Reels, videos, YouTube, email signature, online profiles, ads, your website, printed brochures and business cards are all areas in your marketing that you can use brand imagery.

Take a quick inventory of the ways you market your business, and make note of where you can immediately start using brand photos to amplify your marketing and your messaging.

Two brand photoshoots a year could keep you stocked up on your own personal brand photos, giving you a never-ending supply of ways to stand out and show up, authentically and professionally, online.

Whether you run your small business online or off, showing up powerfully online is a non-negotiable for business growth. Build a relationship with a local branding photographer, and set up a minimum of one-two shoots per year. In doing so, you will keep your online presence powerfully stocked with images that stand out and connect.

If you are in the surrounding Metrowest Boston area and need a brand photographer who understands how to perfectly capture the essence of your brand in photos, I’d love to chat. Fill out this form to schedule a consultation to get started .

Branding Tips for Networking: How to Become Unforgettable

Tue, 07 Mar 2023 00:44:08 GMT

Branding Tips for Networking: How to Become Unforgettable

The power of a strong brand image is paramount when it comes to networking in person.

From the clothes you wear to the way you carry yourself, your brand image affects how others perceive you and potentially their willingness to do business with you.

Your brand is everything.

And first impressions matter.

Whether it’s your website, handing someone your business card, engaging with your brand online via social media, or attending a networking event, every interaction clients or business referrals have with your brand affects your brand’s image.

Why?

Your brand has meaning.

And managing the meaning or the perception of your brand, especially when networking in person, is important.

Last week, I had the pleasure of hosting a networking event at the studio. We enjoyed chocolates from Vivilicious Chocolate s, margaritas from Rustic Spirits , and I gave a quick presentation on branding – my favorite topic!

B ecause it was a networking event with small business owners, I shared some key branding tips about how to stand out and be unforgettable.

Branding Tips for Networking: How to Become Unforgettable

Tip #1 Choose Your Clothes Wisely

The clothes you wear all make up a part of your brand identity. Make sure that each wardrobe choice aligns with the message you want to communicate about yourself and your business.

Tip #2 Have Your Elevator Pitch Ready

Having an elevator pitch or one-liner prepared allows you quickly explain who you are, the problem you solve, and how you help your clients. Practice beforehand so that it sounds natural and makes an impression.

Tip #3 Be YOU

You don’t have to be someone else in order to make an impression – just be your authentic self. You want to be YOU and represent your brand in the same way that it feels when someone experiences your website and engages with you online. Meeting you in person should connect with that same experience.

Tip #4 Lean In and Listen

Networking isn’t about talking, it’s about listening. Make sure you not only tell people who you are and what you do, but also ask questions and show genuine interest in the people you meet.

Tip #5 Relationships are Built Through Follow up

Once the event is over, be sure to follow-up with at least one person! Send an email, set up a time for coffee, or connect with them on social media. This will keep the conversation going and help you build relationships.

Want to become more confident when talking about your business, building relationships, and showing up in the right rooms?

Explore current workshops and events created for women business owners who are ready to grow their visibility and personal brand.

Establishing a Strong Brand: The Do's and Dont's of Branding

Mon, 20 Feb 2023 00:38:27 GMT

Establishing a Strong Brand: The Do’s and Don’ts of Branding

Do you ever feel like something is missing from your brand, but you can never figure out exactly what it is?

Maybe you feel…

Completely overwhelmed with crafting a signature brand that magnetizes your dream clients.
Your messaging is disconnected from the actual value you provide.
You’ve had a graphic designer create 50 different logo mockups, and none of them feels right.
You can never settle on your website and you’re constantly making changes.

I’ve been there!

Early in my business, it seemed as though I spent every wedding off-season rebranding.

I was constantly doing things like…looking for a better website template, changing my logo, and trying desperately to create a cohesive brand.

The problem was I hadn’t spent nearly enough time thinking about my overall brand strategy. And it showed!

The biggest lesson I had to learn to start building my brand was a shift in my thinking about what branding was, and what elements mattered the most.

A strong brand strategy magnetizes your dream clients, sets you apart from your competition, and will inform all decisions for your brand, from how your brand feels to who you hire on your team.

To start building a strong brand for your small business, here are some of the do’s and don’ts to keep in mind.

The Do’s and Don’ts of Small Business Branding

Don’t start with your brand aesthetics. DO Define your business goals and mission.

Before you start any branding process, you need to establish your business goals and core values. Who are you? What do you stand for? When establishing these cornerstones of your brand, make sure they reflect the unique mission of your business–not what other people are doing in your industry. Stay in your lane and ensure your foundation is rooted in your true values.

Don’t think short-term. DO Consider the bigger picture.

Focus on what you’re building and keep your target audience in mind. You don’t just want to create a visually beautiful online presence; you want to craft an experience that resonates with people on a deeper level, and that is reflected both online and offline. Creating your brand isn’t something that happens overnight; it is a process. You want your brand strategy to stand the test of time. Pro tip: perform audits as your business grows and evolves to ensure your brand flows with it.

Don’t send mixed messages. Be consistent.

Once you’ve created the core elements of your brand that will define your business, make sure are consistent in all of your communication and across all platforms. From social media to website design.

Don’t speak to everyone. DO Clarify your message.

Clarity is key! It’s not always easy, but spending time clarifying your message makes every other aspect of growing your business that much easier. A clear message helps you speak to your ideal client. This message should be consistent across all of your marketing. And be sure to use the same language your target audience uses. From your website to social media, you want your dream clients to listen when you speak. They will listen because when you use their language, they KNOW you are speaking to them.

Don’t get distracted. DO Resist shiny object syndrome.

It’s easy for business owners to get distracted by shiny objects or trends without considering how it fits into their brand’s core values. Make sure your decisions are consistent with the core of who you are, not just because it looks good on paper or because everyone else is doing it. You never want to force your brand to be something that it’s not.

And here’s the thing, It all starts with an intentional focus on your brand strategy!

The critical pieces that are ACTUALLY responsible for magnetizing clients to you.

I’m talking about things like your brand messaging and marketing, your mission, how to position yourself, and the elements which elicit a connection with your dream clients.

Figuring out where to start, what to focus on, and how to connect the pieces of your brand can be challenging.

That’s why I created the Magnetic Brand Blueprint Masterclass!

Whether you’re just starting out, making a big shift, or somewhere in the middle, you’ll navigate important and avoidable branding mistakes.

I’m sharing the EXACT steps and paradigm shifts needed to create an impactful brand, take your business to the next level and not waste precious time and money on the wrong things!

This is the ‘save-you years/decades’ approach to dial in your brand for growth and longevity.

This workshop registration is currently closed, but you can explore my current workshops, events, and brand experiences created for women business owners who are ready to show up with confidence and visibility.

You can view current offerings and upcoming experiences here.

How to Market Your Small Business On a Tight Budget

Mon, 13 Feb 2023 00:26:36 GMT

How to Market Your Small Business On a Tight Budget

If you’ve been in business for more than a year or so, I’m sure you know the importance of marketing. Getting your name out there is critical if you have a brick-and-mortar location or an online business.

But if you’re like many small business owners, you may be asking yourself a few questions.

Where to start without breaking the bank?

What’s the best way to reach your target clients?

How can you ensure you get the biggest bang for your time and resources?

These are all important questions, and I want to share why organic marketing might be a great solution.

When I took the leap to take my part-time photography business full-time, I was excited and scared at the same time.

I had a few clients but no strategy to market my business and generate leads.

So, I decided to do what I saw other photographers in my industry do – invest in an ad.

I thought this would be my golden ticket. Clients would just come pouring in.

However, after one month of running the ad and no leads coming through, I started getting worried. My small business couldn’t afford such a large expense with no return on investment!

That’s when I remembered something that stuck with me from the conversation with my sales rep: “Don’t forget that you’ll need to fill all of your marketing buckets.”

It was then that I realized that if I wanted to generate leads and grow my business, I would need more than one ad.

Traditional advertising can be expensive. Thankfully, there are ways to market your business organically—for free—and grow your business.

What Is Organic Marketing?

Organic marketing involves unpaid strategies to reach your target audience, increase brand awareness, build relationships with potential customers, generate high-quality leads, and convert those leads into sales.

Organic marketing is one of the most effective ways for small businesses to market their business without breaking the bank. It also helps to build your brand’s trust by creating meaningful connections that last over time instead of focusing on short-term sales goals as most paid ads do.

What Does Organic Marketing Mean For Your Business?

When it comes to organic marketing, there are several key strategies to keep in mind. Let’s take a look at some of the best marketing strategies for small business owners I recommend to clients inside my Brand and Visibility Accelerator and have used them in my own business.

Social Media

Social media platforms such as Facebook, Instagram, and Pinterest offer an amazing opportunity to reach your target audience without spending any money. Posting content regularly and consistently , engaging with your audience, and responding to comments will help you build relationships with existing and potential customers and increase brand visibility. What kind of content should you create? Keep reading below…

Content Creation

Content creation is another way to market your business organically. The key is to focus on high-quality content that will provide value to your target audience. Creating content such as blog posts and videos helps you establish yourself as an expert in your industry while driving traffic back to your website and building relationships with potential customers. Content creation takes time, but it has been proven effective in helping businesses grow their online presence over time.

Pro-tip – Set aside at least one-two hours per week to generate one piece of long-form content that can be repurposed for social media posts, Instagram Reels, YouTube videos, and more!

SEO

Search engine optimization (SEO) is a great way for small business owners to reach their target audience because it helps your website or blog show up in search results when people look for keywords and phrases related to your business. I’m not an SEO specialist, but I highly recommend using free SEO tools or working with someone who specializes in SEO.

Blogging

Blogging can be a great way to reach your target audience and increase website traffic simultaneously. It’s also an effective way to build trust with potential customers by providing helpful and valuable content. You can share how-tos, and tutorials, tips, and take your audience behind the scenes. There are so many different topics that you can blog about.

Blogging regularly helps you establish yourself as an expert in your industry while driving more organic traffic to your website.

Your blog can also be a home base for all your long-form content. Your blog posts are evergreen, meaning they can continue to drive traffic back to your website long after you initially published them.

Networking

Connecting with people in your industry and networking with other small business owners will help you build a strong network that can potentially lead to new business opportunities. This could look like having a Zoom coffee connection, attending a networking event, hosting an event in your space, or joining a local chamber of commerce. Don’t underestimate the power of networking and building relationships offline!

Organic marketing has the power to reach people who may have never heard of your brand before. It is one of the most effective ways for small businesses to reach new customers without spending money on ads.

And yes, organic marketing takes time, but with a little effort and creativity, organic marketing strategies can pay huge dividends down the road when it comes time for customers to choose your brand!

Not Sure How To Start Marketing Your Business?

Figuring out where to start, what to focus on, and how to market your business can be challenging.

That’s why I created my free Marketing Guide for small business owners.

Click here to download and get valuable time-saving tips plus more revenue-generating ideas to market your business now.

How to Set Business Goals for Success in 2023 | Shawon Davis

Mon, 30 Jan 2023 00:21:27 GMT

How to Set Business Goals for Success in 2023 | Shawon Davis

Have you ever felt you should have all your goals set for the year, but you feel behind and not sure where to start?

If you’re nodding your head and saying yes, you’re not alone.

I remember it like it was yesterday…

I was introducing a speaker to a women’s organization. The presentation was about critical processes that business owners need to implement for long-term growth and success.

Somewhere along the introduction, I mentioned that I had not set my goals for the year.

The problem wasn’t that I didn’t have goals, it was that I didn’t have a system.

For any ambitious dreamers out there–especially entrepreneurs–setting goals is not only important, but it’s also essential.

Having a reliable goal-setting system can be the difference between success and failure.

And here’s the thing, nothing magical happens when we make our final countdown into the new year.

However, the new year is a perfect opportunity for a reset to think about not just hitting revenue targets and business milestones, but achieving better balance and bringing more awareness to every area of your life, both personally and professionally.

So how can you set yourself up for success with intentional goals in 2023 – and more importantly, how can you turn your goals into action?

How to Set Business Goals for Success in 2023

In today’s blog, I’m sharing three parts of my system that I use to set meaningful goals. If you want my exact system, watch the video here.

When it comes to setting goals with a system to help you achieve them, here’s what I focus on first:

1. Review the previous year.

Reviewing the last year’s accomplishments and challenges can help you to understand what worked, what didn’t work, and what changes need to be made. This is also a great time to write down lessons learned. When you’re done with your review process, it’s time for reflection. This is where you take all of that information from the previous step and reflect on how you want to move forward. What areas need to be improved? And what boundaries do you need to set for you to keep moving forward? What things will you say yes to? What will you say no to? Reflecting on these questions will help you determine the direction that your goals should take.

2. Consider your big-picture vision.

What is the big-picture vision for the life you want to create and live in? Setting goals will help you to get clear on this vision and have a roadmap for how to make it happen. Consider your big-picture vision for both your personal life and your business. Your goals will reflect this vision and help you to achieve it. Your big-picture vision will also serve as a filter for the things that you say yes to and no to.

3. Define what success means to you.

Last week I attended Imaging USA in Nashville, Tennessee , and one of the presenters shared something that resonated with me. Success = Balance. The system that I use for setting my goals helps me create balance in all areas of my life. To me, that is success.

I always want to make sure that my goals are not only focused on hitting business targets, but also ensuring I’m creating balance in my life, taking care of myself, enjoying my hobbies, and doing things that I love with the people I love.

These three steps–reviewing the previous year, considering your big-picture vision and defining what success means to you–are integral parts of my goal-setting system and will help you set meaningful goals for 2023.

To learn more and get my EXACT goal-setting system, watch the video here: https://youtu.be/iepSYW-j1tc

Brand Photoshoot with Brenda, The Sugar-Free Mom

Tue, 20 Sep 2022 00:16:18 GMT

Brand Photoshoot with Brenda, The Sugar-Free Mom

I’m so excited to share a few favorites from a brand photoshoot with Brenda, The Sugar-Free Mom. Brenda is not only a fantastic blogger, author, wife, and mother but also a great friend. As a brand photographer , I’ve had the pleasure of photographing her several times over the years, and our time at the studio for her newest project – The 30-Day Sugar Elimination Diet – is no different. As always, it was a joy to work with her!

The 30-Day Sugar Elimination Diet is Brenda’s latest project, and it’s very near and dear to her heart. Her journey of eliminating sugar from her diet and kicking a sugar addiction to the curb is inspiring. I’m so glad she’s sharing it with the world.

Not only is she sharing her story, but she’s also supporting others through their own sugar addiction. On her blog, The Sugar-Free Mom you can find a library of recipes that support a sugar-free lifestyle, keto or low carb, allergy, and family-friendly options.

I find it remarkable when you can share your story to help others, and Brenda does that perfectly. She’s relatable, down-to-earth, and, most importantly – real. It’s easy to feel like you’re the only one struggling with your diet, but Brenda’s story reminds the reader that they’re not alone.

The 30-Day Sugar Elimination Diet is a whole-food detox to conquer cravings & reclaim health, customizable for keto or low-carb. Brenda takes you through a 4-week process and includes meal plans and recipes that are easy to follow. Shopping lists are also included. Win-win!

She has been working on this cookbook for months, perfecting recipes and testing them on her family and friends.

When she reached out to me about photographing her author photos for the book, it was an automatic yes; I knew it was something I wanted to be a part of.

We started our consultation by preparing her wardrobe. Earthtones made sense as her book would be focused on nutritious foods and fresh whole food recipes.

During her consultation, we also chose a few studio set designs. On the day of her photoshoot, I had an idea to also include an array of fresh fruits and vegetables. I specifically chose complimentary colors that wouldn’t clash with her wardrobe.

One of the things I love about Brenda’s recipes is that they are always made with love and oh-so-delicious. She uses fresh and healthy ingredients to create meals that are good for you and taste great. I think her recipes are so successful because she takes the time to develop them until they are just right.

Another thing I love about Brenda is her passion for helping others. She has a heart for sharing her knowledge and helping people reach their goals. I know that so many people will benefit from her newest book.

30-Day Sugar Elimination Diet in-the-moment unboxing reaction

It was so much fun photographing her; I was thrilled to get a copy in the mail recently. You may have seen this unboxing video if you follow me on Instagram.

The 30-Day Sugar Elimination Diet is available for pre-order and you can get your copy here: https://bit.ly/3AyVdyr

You can find Brenda, The Sugar-Free Mom here:

Website: https://www.sugarfreemom.com/

Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/SugarFreeMom

Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/sugarfreemom/

How to Set Intentions for a Fresh Start in September

Tue, 06 Sep 2022 00:07:59 GMT

New month, new intentions! The start of a new month is always a great opportunity for a fresh start. This is especially true for September, which signals the end of summer and the beginning of my favorite season-fall.

If you’re looking for a way to reset and refocus your goals for the month ahead, setting intentions is a great way to do so. But what exactly is intention setting, and how can you go about doing it?

Read on to find out and you can also check out this week’s video here where I’m sharing I’m sharing my monthly review process and how I set goals, create an action list, and map out a plan for the month ahead.

What is Intention Setting?

Intention setting is the practice of choosing one or more specific goals that you would like to achieve and then taking concrete action steps to make them happen. It’s important to be as specific as possible when setting intentions; rather than simply saying you want to “be happier,” try something like “I will meditate for 10 minutes every day” or “I will spend time outside in nature two days every week this month.” If you love fall this one is for you “I will take a trip to the pumpkin patch with my family on the weekend.”

Tools to Set Your Intentions

There’s no one right way to set intentions; it’s really whatever works best for you. As a business owner, I’ve used a few methods and tools to help make setting intentions or goals more effective.

The tool I rely on every single month is my Powersheets Goal Planner . This has been a great tool to guide the monthly review process that I share here .

Another method you may have already heard of is the S.M.A.R.T. approach.

S: Specific – What exactly do you want to accomplish? Be as specific as possible.

M: Measurable – How will you know if you’ve achieved your goal? What system or metrics can you use to track your progress?

A: Achievable – Is your goal realistic, given your current season of life?

R: Relevant – Always start with your why, and specifically knowing why a goal important is to you will help you achieve it. What is your why? How will this intention help you achieve your big-picture vision?

T: Time-bound – When do you want to achieve this goal? Giving yourself a date to accomplish your goal will you accountable and on track.

Once you’ve selected your intention(s), it’s time to put them into action! Consider the exact steps you need to take in order to make your intentions a reality, and then make a plan for how and when you’ll take those steps. I love using a wall-post it notes so that I see the action steps I need to take and deadlines.

If you have a goal or set an intention to eat healthier, your plan may involve meal prepping every Sunday evening or packing a healthy lunch every day before work. The key is to choose what aligns with this season of life for you. Psst…If you want to try HelloFresh, click here to use my special referral code .

(Note: Yes, that is an affiliate link. If you decide to sign up for HelloFresh using my link, I’ll receive a small commission. Thanks for your support!)

Keep your focus

Setting intentions is a great way to focus and set your goals for the month ahead. Remember to be specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and time-bound when choosing your intention(s), and then take concrete steps towards making them happen. Be patient, stay focused on moving forward one step at a time, and don’t forget to celebrate your wins (big and small) along the way.

Want to learn more? Check out this week’s video where I’m sharing I’m sharing my monthly review process and how I set goals, create an action list, and map out a plan for the month ahead.

How to Set Intentions for a Fresh Start in September

How to Work Efficiently as a One-Person Team

Tue, 09 Aug 2022 00:02:00 GMT

How to Work Efficiently as a One-Person Team

Are you a solo small business owner? Feeling like you’re spread too thin and could use some help? You’re not alone! In this blog post, I’m sharing some tips on how to work efficiently as a one-person team. Keep reading for advice on time management, delegation, and more. I hope these tips help you feel less overwhelmed and more productive!

When you’re starting your business it may not be in your budget right away to hire team members, but that doesn’t mean you can’t work efficiently.

There have been seasons in my business when my team has consisted of myself and a VA and there have also been seasons where I’ve had a virtual assistant and multiple contractors.

No matter the size of your team, there are always ways to work more efficiently!

Batch work to stay focused and free up your mental space

One way to be more productive is to batch your work. Batching similar tasks together will help you stay focused and avoid task-switching.

Some great tasks to batch together are:

Recording videos
Writing blogs
Planning social media content

I know it can be hard to carve out time to batch work, but even setting aside one day a week to work on these tasks can make a big difference.

The goal with batching is to work on similar tasks that require the same mindset so you can stay focused and in a flow state.

You’ll be surprised at how much time you’ll save in the long run. You’ll also free yourself up mentally to focus on bigger, more strategic tasks.

Think about repeating tasks that you do on a weekly or monthly basis. These are a great place to start for batching!

Invest in the right tools for your business

Another tip for working efficiently as a solo small business owner is to invest in the right tools for your business. There are so many amazing tools out there that can help you automate tasks and stay organized.

Some of my personal favorites are:

Honeybook – Send contracts, invoices, manage client workflows

Metricool – Social Media Scheduling *a new favorite

Calendly – Scheduling consultations and meetings

FloDesk- Sending emails

Another way to work more efficiently is to use project management software, like Asana or Trello. Both offer free versions with some great features.

With project management software, you can create to-do lists, set deadlines, and assign tasks to team members.

Learn this one-word sentence fast

In order to work efficiently in your business, you have to set boundaries. And part of setting boundaries is learning how to say no.

Yes, many great opportunities come your way where you can serve others and make an impact. But you’re not superwoman and you can’t do it all!

Saying no is hard, but it’s a necessary skill if you want to be an effective leader.

You will also avoid burning yourself out, not having enough time to work on your own business, serving your clients well, and moving your business forward.

In order to show up at your best for yourself, your family, and your business, you have to learn the power of saying no.

So the next time someone asks you to do something that you don’t have time for or it isn’t aligned with your season of life right now, remember that it’s okay to say no.

If no is really hard, you can also say not right now.

Set your Fly Lady timer

When I was a stay-at-home, homeschooling mom, my kitchen timer became one of my best friends. I was first introduced to the set your timer idea from Fly Lady. Yes, Fly Lady.

Setting a timer to complete a task helped me stay focused. I knew I had a specific amount of time to complete the task and that helped me stay on track.

Not only did this help me with homeschooling my kids, but it also helped me get things done around the house.

You can use this same method in your business!

I attended a conference some years ago and learned about Parkinson’s Law… “work expands so as to fill the time available for its completion”, and it took me back to my Fly Lady days.

My timer continues to be one of my best friends and an invaluable tool. Whether I’m getting work done day-to-day, batch working, and also when I’m behind my camera at the studio.

Need Some Time and Space to Focus on What Matters Most in Your Life and Business?

I’d love to invite you to my Two-Day Reset Retreat for Women . Whether you’re a small business owner or work for someone else, this retreat will help you reset your goals, recharge your vision and finish the year stronger.

You can learn more and get your ticket here!

Metrowest Boston Brand Photoshoot with Janna | Shawon Davis

Mon, 08 Aug 2022 23:53:53 GMT

Metrowest Boston Brand Photoshoot with Janna | Shawon Davis

I’m thrilled today to share Janna’s personal branding photo shoot with you. If you follow me on Instagram, you may have seen this Instagram Reel with a look behind the scenes of her photoshoot.

The first time I met Janna was in 2018. I photographed her engagement session and her wedding later that same year.

It was a joy to photograph her then, and I was so happy to photograph her at the studio!

The goal of her brand photoshoot was to update her professional photos for her school’s website and photos that communicated different aspects of her role as a school administrator.

The confidence she conveys in the new photos is palpable, and it’s clear that she had a lot of fun during the shoot.

She looks natural and relaxed in her images, which perfectly reflects her easygoing personality.

In addition, the photos capture her warmth and approachability, two important qualities for a successful administrator.

Overall, the new photos are a perfect representation of who she is as a professional and will look and feel great on her school’s website.

We also added some fun, joy-filled just for her photos too. I love that her photos reflect her personal style and professionalism.

Having a studio space takes out the guesswork in finding a location. I’m able to control the lighting, it’s cool in the summer and cozy in the winter months, and I create set designs to customize photoshoots.

Although the studio space is the primary location, I do travel, and we have a bonus park location. Choate Park in Medway, MA is across the street.

It’s an option for clients who might want some photos in an outdoor setting.

During our wardrobe and style consultation, we figure out:

If you should bring props
Studio set designs
The best locations
Photos you need for marketing materials, website, or social media platforms.

And of course, your wardrobe is selected during the consultation too.

Professional brand photos that represent you

Branding photoshoots are not only for business owners and entrepreneurs, but they are also working for women in various professional careers and industries. Whether you work for yourself or someone your personal brand matters.

When you work with me on your branding photoshoot, we’ll spend time getting to know each other before the photoshoot. I want to learn about your business or profession and what you hope to communicate with your photos.

I knew that Janna’s photoshoot and final images would be amazing. Her photos represent her well both online and in person.

Because the website was our number one priority, we started the session with her professional photos. Her new images are beautiful and capture her personality.

We then moved on to using set designs that worked well to communicate a role with captions and posts for social media platforms.

Janna’s hair and makeup were styled at the studio by Nina, @ninaoartistry

Here are a few favorites from her gallery.

Metrowest Boston, MA Brand Photoshoot

Whether you’re a business owner, entrepreneur, or professional woman, your personal brand is important.

That’s why I offer branding photoshoots to help you communicate what you stand for and want to achieve with your career.

If you’re ready to update or elevate your brand photos, I’d love to chat with you about your goals and plan a photo shoot that will help you reach them! Schedule a consultation here.

Shawon Davis, is a Metrowest Boston Brand Photographer and Strategist. Her studio is located in Medway, MA in the beautiful Medway Mill.

Setting Goals and Planning the Rest of the Year

Mon, 25 Jul 2022 23:46:44 GMT

Setting Goals and Planning the Rest of the Year

So, the first half of the year is over. How are you feeling about your business goals? Are you on track to reach them, or have they fallen by the wayside?

If you’re like a lot of small business owners, you may have been so busy this summer that you haven’t taken the time to pause to plan for the months ahead. But if you want to make the most of the rest of 2022, now is the time to get focused and set some goals.

Setting and reaching goals can be tough. That’s why it’s important to take a step back and reassess what’s been working – and what hasn’t – in order to set realistic goals for the second half of the year.

oday, I’m sharing a few tips to get you started!

Goal setting and planning for the rest of 2022

1.Review your goals from the beginning of the year

When it comes to setting goals, I’ll always recommend a balanced approach so that your business goals aren’t pushing out the other important domains of your life. With a balanced approach, you’ll keep a pulse on both your life and business goals.

During your review process answer questions like:

How are you doing so far?

Are you on track to achieve your targets?

Are there any areas that need improvement?

Based on your priorities and what you want to achieve by the end of the year, you might refresh or set new goals.

2. Assess how well you’ve done so far and what you need to do to reach your goals

To ensure you’re making progress in your business focus on the essential areas that are important to keep your business growing and moving in the right direction.

Those key areas are leadership, marketing, sales, products, overhead, and cash flow.

A great tool to measure your progress in each of these areas is Business Made Simple’s My Business Report. I’m a BMS Coach, and you can use my link to access a copy of a free report for your business.

3. Make a plan and get organized.

Once you’ve reviewed your goals and made an assessment of where you are and what you need to do to move forward, it’s time to make a plan and get organized.

This will include specific steps you’ll take.

Break down your goals into actionable steps that you can start working on right away.

You’ll want to consider what you need to do and who do you need to help you achieve each goal. This could be hiring a virtual assistant, working with a marketing agency, or hiring a business coach.

Create a timeline for each goal with specific deadlines.

Once you have your timelines created, start working on each goal one at a time.

Those are just a few goal-setting tips to help get you started on the right path for the second half of 2022. If you want to learn a few more tips be sure to watch the entire video here.

Metrowest Boston, MA Brand Photoshoot with Cath

Tue, 05 Jul 2022 21:57:32 GMT

Metrowest Boston, MA Brand Photoshoot with Cath

As a small business owner, you know that high-quality photos are essential for your brand. You want your brand photoshoots to convey your brand’s personality and style. Personal brand photos help you build trust, connect with your ideal client, and communicate your brand messages.

That’s why it’s important to invest in a professional brand photoshoot.

I had the pleasure of working with Cath Carrara for a second time for brand photos.

Cath is a seasoned real estate professional. She helps her clients buy and sell homes in Franklin, MA, and surrounding areas.

We were able to capture some great shots that really capture her personality and business style.

It’s important to have a clear vision for your photoshoot. We planned photos for Cath’s website, social media platforms, and marketing materials for her shoot.

Start your planning details with questions related to your small business

What do you want your photos to say about your business? What feeling do you want to convey? Once you have a clear vision, it’s time to start planning the details.

The new studio space provides the perfect ambiance to take your headshots or personal branding photos. With a lifestyle feel, you’ll be able to have a photo shoot that showcases all of who YOU are!

I’m able to create the perfect space for your photoshoot with different lifestyle setups. We have a kitchen nook, cozy living room and office options, and plenty of props that will make your photos shine.

Stand out with your brand personality

Every brand has a story, and your photoshoot should reflect that story. That’s why putting some thought into styling your brand photoshoot is important.

What kind of message do you want to send? Who is your target audience? What feeling do you want to evoke? How can you best represent your brand visually?

You can use brand colors and brand personality as your guide! First, consider what colors represent your brand. Is it one main color or a palette?

What do those colors say about your brand? Maybe you want to go for a clean and classic look with black, white, and neutrals.

Or perhaps you want something more fun and lively with bright hues. Once you have an idea of the colors you want to use, start planning how to incorporate them into your outfits.

You can use color blocking to create contrast or go for a monochromatic look to show cohesion.

And don’t forget accessories! They are a great way to add pops of color or make a statement.

But above all, make sure your clothing choices represent your brand’s personality.

Are you approachable and friendly? Edgy and cool? Upscale and luxurious? Keep these things in mind when putting together your photoshoot looks and let your brand shine through!

Styling my clients for their brand session is a part of the studio process. I meet with all of my clients in advance of their photoshoot to plan and style their wardrobes.

The goal is to create a cohesive look that represents your brand and who you are.

With a little planning, you can make sure your brand photo shoot is a success!

For Cath’s branding session, we planned for her to bring props like the marketing materials that she shares with her clients. I styled them in one of our desk setup options and created new images she could use for marketing and social media.

Branding session tip for success

Small business owners, one of the most important things to do when planning a brand photoshoot is to communicate your goals for your session up front so that everyone is on the same page. This will help ensure that the session goes smoothly and that you get the photos you need.

During your initial consultation or planning stage, be sure to let your photographer know what types of photos you are looking for.

Your photoshoot should be an enjoyable experience that leaves you feeling confident and excited about your business. You’ll have the images that reflect your brand, personal style, and professional images for your need for marketing efforts.

Here are a few favorites from Cath’s half-day branding photography session.

Metrowest Boston MA Brand Photoshoot

At the studio, we are excited to help you create images that reflect your business and brand personality. Our team will work with you to plan the details and ensure your branding session is successful.

If you’re in the Metrowest Boston area and are looking for a professional brand photographer, please click this link to schedule a consultation . I would love to chat with you about your photography needs and see how I can help you create beautiful images that represent your brand perfectly.

If you enjoyed this blog, you might also like:

Mindset Coach Brand Photoshoot

Drapery Designer Brand Photoshoot

Women in Business Spotlight

How To Make The Most Of A Slow Season As A Small Business Owner

Mon, 27 Jun 2022 21:49:40 GMT

How To Make The Most Of A Slow Season As A Small Business Owner

As a small business owner, you know that there will be times when your business is slower than usual. But that doesn’t mean you have to just sit and wait for things to pick up again. There are plenty of things you can do to make the most of a slow season.

When I was a wedding photographer, I experienced a slow season each year during the colder months here in Massachusetts.

In order to stay focused and not lose momentum, I would look for ways to improve my business, such as thinking about what my clients needed and how I could better serve them.

I also worked on marketing and networking, so that I could reach more potential customers and add value to my networking community.

Additionally, I would take some time to review my business goals and objectives, so that I would make sure to stay on track.

Finally, I would use the slow season as an opportunity to learn new skills or knowledge that could help my business in the future.

The key during a slow season is to find ways to stay motivated and keep your business moving forward.

Are you looking for ways to stay productive and profitable during the slow season?

Check out this week’s video for 10 tips that will help you make the most of your time!

Implement these tips so you can stay productive and profitable during the slow season.

Grab your favorite notebook, and click here to watch the video .

3 Unexpected Ways Gratitude Can Help Your Business

Tue, 21 Jun 2022 21:45:57 GMT

3 Unexpected Ways Gratitude Can Help Your Business

Being a small business owner can be tough. There are always a million things to do, and it can be easy to get caught up in the stress of it all.

But one thing that can help you through the tough times is gratitude. Yes, gratitude! Cultivating gratitude can actually help your business in some unexpected ways. Here are three of them.

Three Ways Gratitude Can Help Your Business

1. Gratitude makes you more resilient. When things get tough, being grateful for what you do have helps you stay positive and push through the challenges.

2. Gratitude attracts opportunities. Being grateful opens up your mind and heart to new possibilities and opportunities.

3. Gratitude strengthens relationships. Being grateful for the people in your life – from your team to clients – creates strong positive relationships. These connections can lead to more referrals, collaborations, and overall success for your business.

If you’re looking for a way to increase your resilience, attract opportunities, and strengthen relationships, gratitude may be the answer. And luckily, cultivating gratitude is easy! It only takes a few minutes each day to reflect on the good things in your life. Are you in?

For more tips on how to cultivate gratitude in your business, check out this video on YouTube .

One Simple Way To Uplevel Your Brand

Tue, 14 Jun 2022 21:42:42 GMT

One Simple Way To Uplevel Your Brand

Hello, and thank you for calling an agent who is set apart to serve.

That my friends, was the beginning of my voicemail recording to leave a message after the sound of the beep.

My first venture as a business owner, I was a realtor. I worked with first time homebuyers and sellers who were ready to buy their dream homes. I loved serving my clients (hence my catchy tagline).

My love for service manifested as a deep consideration for my client experience. I wanted to do more than just sell my clients a house—I wanted them to feel appreciated, heard, and cared for along the way.

One of the things I did to create an elevated client experience was develop a workflow. I didn’t call it that at the time—in fact, I don’t think I even knew the word ‘workflow’ back then. But I knew I needed a process to make their experience seamless, so that’s what I did.

My process took my clients from signing their purchase and sales agreement to getting their keys in their hand. The workflow to get them there was a checklist I created to make sure I didn’t miss any details.

Every step was typed on a sheet that I could easily make a copy of and attach to the outside of their client file.

Although I didn’t have a fancy system—I relied on regular old paper and pen—my process was effective. I simply typed up my checklist as a Word document and crossed off each step as we went along. For example:

Scheduling the home inspection
Following up with reminders about the home inspection
Scheduling the closing
Making sure they knew the attorney’s address
Scheduling a walkthrough

…And a long list of other tasks that needed to be addressed during the home-buying process.

What Does This Have To Do With Your Business?

Fast forward to years later, when I started my photography business. I knew I needed a similar process—later, I would define this as a ‘workflow’ that helped my clients have a great experience all the way from their initial consultation, through the delivery of their photos.

Obviously, the steps I needed to complete as a realtor vs. as a photographer were different. But the ideas were the same.

Though I’d changed careers, I carried with me that same dedication to service. My workflow was a surefire way to make sure my photography clients felt cared for throughout our work together. Today, as a Brand Coach, I use a similar process to work with my coaching clients.

The point is, it doesn’t matter what industry you’re in. Creating a client workflow is a powerful way to uplevel your brand.

What Is A Client Workflow?

A workflow is, very simply, a checklist of tasks you always complete from start to finish when working with your clients.

This checklist should be as detailed as possible. Ask yourself questions like:

What emails do you need to send?

What tasks do you need to complete?

What special touch points will you add along the way to elevate your client experience?

Contrary to what some people assume about checklists, a workflow is about more than just making sure you don’t forget something. Creating a workflow also means…

If you have a team (now or in the future), your team can use your workflow to complete tasks and send out emails according to your processes. Your team can easily grab the client’s folder, see where they are in the process, and do what needs to be done.
Having a workflow helps to build your brand’s reputation. Creating a repeatable process is a form of quality control.
Having a workflow means you don’t have to recreate the wheel each time you start a new project. This is especially important as your business grows.
A workflow is easy to adapt and adjust. As your business changes, you can change your workflow too.

How to Create Your Client Workflow

As I mentioned, I got started with just a Word doc and a pen. However, I don’t recommend this. With all the amazing tech tools we have at our disposal these days, there’s a better way.

I personally recommend Honeybook —a CRM that makes keeping up with your workflow incredibly simple. One thing I love about Honeybook is that it makes it exceptionally easy to create different workflows for different services I offer. You can learn more about Honeybook right here.

(Note: Yes, that is an affiliate link. If you decide to sign up for Honeybook using my link, I’ll receive a small commission. Thanks for your support!)

Not Sure Where To Start Creating Your Workflow?

Watch More On YouTube here:

How to Plan Your Month for Maximum Productivity

Mon, 13 Jun 2022 21:37:37 GMT

How to Plan Your Month for Maximum Productivity

Have you ever strolled into your favorite home decor store in the middle of July, and a few feet away, you see all things pumpkin spice and fall decorations.

You can’t help but wonder what this store is thinking. It’s the middle of summer, and they’re already pushing fall decor. Do they not realize that people are still enjoying summer? Or do they know something that we don’t?

Just like our favorite home decor store, as a small business owner, you always have to be thinking ahead. What are your goals for the month? What needs to be done in order to reach those goals?

Start with your yearly business goals

For example, if your goal is to increase sales by 10%, you might need to focus on marketing efforts. This could involve planning and executing a marketing campaign, or it could simply mean making sure that your website is updated and easy to navigate.

No matter what your goals are, it’s important to have a plan in place to help you achieve them. By thinking ahead and being proactive, you can ensure that your small business is always moving in the right direction.

I have a simple process that I follow to plan out my month.

How to plan your month for maximum productivity

The first step is to start with my yearly goals. By looking at the big picture, I can make sure that I’m staying on track and meeting my goals.

My marketing strategy does the heavy lifting for me. I start with figuring out my content plan. I rely on my SEO strategy, combined with SEO research tools, and I’m also looking at my KPIs in several areas to determine what my content plan will be. I use data to help create content that is helpful and that my audience enjoys.

I also want to look at my month ahead to see what’s already scheduled. Commitments that are already scheduled. Family vacations, personal appointments… all of these things will impact my work schedule for the month.

Once I have a clear idea of what my availability is, I can start mapping out my month.

By setting clear goals and planning ahead, I can ensure that I’m making the most of my time – and achieving the results I’m looking for.

To learn more about my entire process, be sure to watch this week’s video for How To Plan Your Month here:

If you want to learn more about planning for your small business, you may also like these videos:

How to Create Work Life Balance That Works For You

My Morning Routine

How to Get Organized and Automate Your Business

Mon, 30 May 2022 21:33:21 GMT

How to Get Organized and Automate Your Business

If you’re like most wo men small business owners I know, you’re always tr ying to find ways to be more organized and efficient.

Let’s pause and write down a list of everything you juggle in a day. Just kidding. That would take you forever, right?

When starting and running your own small business, organization and efficiency are key. I realize that you have so many tasks on your to-do list in a day, a week, and even a month. It is so easy for something to fall through the cracks.

You NEVER want your client experience to be one of those things.

Thankfully, there are some great tools that can help you get organized and automate your business processes.

In today’s blog, I’m sharing my favorite business tool to get organized, automate your business, and deliver a wow-client experience.

Let’s start with the facts. You’re the CEO, the salesperson, the marketing department, and the visionary all rolled into one. It can be tough to keep everything organized, but it’s essential if you want your business to run smoothly.

Systems and processes may sound boring, but they can make a world of difference for a small business. By taking the time to set up some basic systems and processes, you can give your business the structure it needs to thrive.

Here are a few tips on how to start organizing your business:

-First, identify the areas of your business that need to be organized. This could be your project management system, your daily task list, or your client workflows.

-Next, start small. Don’t try to tackle everything at once. Choose one area to focus on and gradually add more structure over time.

-Finally, be consistent. Once you’ve put systems and processes in place, it’s important to stick to them. This will help you stay organized and efficient in the long run.

Client experience was on the top of the list.

If you asked me what was one of my top priorities when I first started my business, I would say my client experience.

It is so overwhelming to look through all of the choices you have when it comes to providing that. Not to mention paying for a client experience tool on top of other business start-up expenses just doesn’t seem feasible.

So I relied on my old pen and paper method that I used when I was a Realtor. It seems easy to just create a checklist and print a new one each time you get a new client.

That works great for a while….until more and more clients come into the business. Now you have a whole new set of worries.

You have to keep up with your paperwork.
You have to pack up your paperwork to take with you if you work elsewhere.
You have to make tons of copies.
You have to update manually.

Pretty soon the paper and pen bestie begins to eat up time. Something has to give.

That’s where Honeybook comes in to save the day!

This business automation tool will help you get organized and automate your business processes so you can focus on what’s important – your clients!

Here are some of the ways this online client experience tool will help you:

Honeybook helps you deliver a high-touch client experience.

I decided to try out Honeybook so I could claim back my time and my clients could continue to receive an amazing experience.

I knew that it was essential for me to have business processes in place to maintain an amazing, repeatable, consistent, client experience.

Honeybook can give you back the freedom to focus on running your business. I know the initial time investment can be overwhelming to think about when you first begin to use it. Isn’t getting back your time and energy worth it in the long run?

Honey Book provides an all-in-one experience.

Honeybook is proven to create a high-end customer experience all in one location. This is beneficial for both you and your clients.

Honeybook is a business management tool that helps you to do everything from invoicing to client communication. A few ways I personally use Honeybook are:

All of my workflows for branding and business coaching clients are in one location that I can have anywhere.
Create email templates to improve my communication time and quality.
Send out invoices, contracts, accept payments and keep track of finances.
Overall ability to automate and streamline my business without spending hours.

The list could go on and on, but I am pretty sure you are convinced you need Honeybook now too right?

Take back your time.

Automating systems and tracking client information can become a cakewalk. This can save you so much time and mental space that you can now put back into your business. Time and mental space that is going to allow your business to grow.

The best part is that Honeybook integrates with so many of the platforms you probably already use. Zoom, Zapier, Google Calendar, and Quickbooks are a few that immediately come to mind.

I’ve partnered with HoneyBook to help you get started for just $1 month for your first 8 months (or $96/year, paid annually) This is the perfect time to get your business organized and set yourself up for success. HoneyBook has been a lifesaver for my business and I know it will do the same for you.

If this doesn’t scream the perfect opportunity to get organized and set up for success I don’t know what does. Don’t waste any more time on your own paper and pencil method or switch back and forth between tons of platforms.

Get started today. http://share.honeybook.com/shawondavis I mean it is practically free for the first 8 months.

If you want to learn how to get started with Honeybook, you may also like these videos:

How to Boost Your Client Experience with Honeybook

How to Send Proposals and Contracts

How to Onboard New Clients with Honeybook

How to Create A Work-Life Balance that Works for You

Thu, 26 May 2022 21:23:34 GMT

How to Create A Work-Life Balance that Works for You

Are you constantly feeling pulled in every direction because you can’t seem to find a work-life balance that works for you? Are you struggling to juggle everything on your plate? If so, don’t worry – you’re not alone. A lot of women small business owners feel the same way.

Last year I read the book Win at Work and Succeed at Life by Michael Hyatt and his daughter Megan Hyatt Miller. They shared 5 Principles called the Double Win to succeed both professionally and personally.

As women small business owners, we often face challenges when trying to maintain a work-life balance.

The tips in this book are essential for anyone who wants to be successful in both their career and personal life.

The authors provide actionable steps that can be implemented immediately to help improve work-life balance.

In addition, they offer helpful advice for dealing with common challenges that arise when attempting to achieve success in both areas.

After reading this book, I felt empowered to make changes in my own life that would help me achieve the work-life balance I desired, and in this week’s video, I’m sharing my key takeaways (and more!) over on Youtube. Watch below.

If you enjoyed this video, you may also like:

My Morning Routine

How to Crush Your Goals

Productivity Hacks for Busy Moms and Business Owners

How to Have a Great Brand Photoshoot - Behind the Scenes

Wed, 11 May 2022 11:22:53 GMT

How to Have a Great Brand Photoshoot - Behind The Scenes

How to Have a Great Brand Photoshoot | Behind The Scenes

Let me take you behind the scenes of a recent personal branding photoshoot we had at our Medway, MA brand photography studio.

Jen came to me in the process of updating her website and was ready to take her brand to the next level. She knew that the perfect imagery combined with some amazing messaging could do just that.

Her website was our number one goal for capturing on brand images.

It was also a goal to capture photos that could be used for social media platforms, speaking engagements, workshops, an email avatar and signature, and other marketing materials.

Based on Jen’s responses to her brand questionnaire and brand color palette, we knew that a soft and natural look would be the best way to go. We wanted her to feel comfortable in front of the camera and for her brand images to feel relaxed and authentic.

For the wardrobe styling, we chose earth tones and natural fabrics that would compliment Jen’s warm personality and her brand’s visual identity.

Because Jen is a Mindful Leadership Coach what better way to discuss that on her website than to have some imagery of her teaching a workshop. On our shot list, was a styled set design to capture images where her attendees could get a visual of what they can expect, how she teaches and the information she shares.

We wanted to also personally reflect Jen, so we created a few shots of her practicing yoga.

She also brought in personal props for styling, and we added other styled set designs, like this lifestyle desk option, that conveyed her brand messaging.

For our last frame of photos, we went across the street to Choate Park to wrap up her branding session. Jen is also a nature-lover, so I’m happy that we had great weather to venture out.

Jen’s images turned out amazing because we were able to really capture images that reflected the uniqueness of her messaging and business.

Your brand photography can create the feeling behind your brand.

As a small business owner, it is important to align your brand’s visual identity and create images that reflect your unique story and message . A great way to do this is by having a personal branding photoshoot. This will help capture your personality and the essence of your business.

When planning your personal branding photoshoot, it is important to know how you want to show up in your photos and the clients that you want to attract.

Some things to consider include:

-What are your core values and what do you want your brand to represent?

-Who is your target audience?

-How do you want your brand to feel? Choose brand words

Some possible feelings that you may want to evoke with your branding photography could be: calming, empowering, sophisticated, relatable, or fun. You may also want to consider words that represent your brand’s personality. Some examples could be: passionate, friendly, and trustworthy.

Plan Your Brand Photoshoot

You are the only one with your brand story and your brand photoshoot needs to reflect that.

That is why it is so important that you plan before your photoshoot.

As a brand photographer, I always meet with our clients before branding sessions so that we can discuss planning in order to ensure their personality and their brand goals will be 100% reflected in their images.

Important questions to ask yourself before your branding session:

Will your photos be used for your website?
What offers do your photos need to reflect?
What pages do you need photos for?
Do you need a wide banner image?
Who is your target audience?
How do you want to show up in your brand photos?
What words describe your brand?

Through planning, when photoshoot days arrive, I am very clear on what messaging goal we are trying to accomplish. With my checklist in hand, I am ready to deliver brand images that directly support the business goals of my clients.

Have a great brand photoshoot.

You are the special sauce of your brand and that is what makes you the perfect person to work with your potential clients.

Be yourself in your photos. Have fun and let your true unique personality shine through your brand photos.

These images are really going to create the feelings behind your words, represent the aspirational identity of what your potential clients want, and allow you to connect with your audience.

“Teamwork makes the dream work” which is why I suggest hiring some professionals. Have a team do your hair, makeup, wardrobe, styling, and photos.

That leaves you free to enjoy your day and really be free to let your personality shine.

Elevate Your Brand Photos

If you’re looking for a brand photographer near me in the Metrowest Boston area, I’d love to chat! Learn more and book your photoshoot here.

Branding Photography | Shawon Davis Studio

Wed, 04 May 2022 11:35:22 GMT

Let’s face it, we live in a visual world where attentio n spans are short. In order to stand out from the competition, stop the scroll of your dream clients, and become recognizable, you need a powerful visual brand. One of the best ways to do that is through high-quality branding photography. But why is it so important?

Let’s take a look at some of the reasons.

A personal branding session can help you build trust. People are more likely to do business with you if they feel like they know and trust you. Personal branding photography can help build that connection by showcasing what makes you unique. It can also help establish your credibility as an expert in your field.

Good photography can also make your website more attractive and engaging. This will encourage people to stick around longer and learn more about what you do and how it helps them.

There’s a lot of white noise in the online business world…

And making sure that your business is standing out, and grabbing the attention of your dream client is the only way to thrive.

Your brand photography creates a personality identity for your small business. This type of photography is important because it conveys your brand message and values, helps you stand out from your competition, connects you with your dream clients, and can help improve awareness and recognition in your target market.

1. What is personal branding photography?

Personal brand photography is all about capturing the personality and essence of your small business in images. As a photographer, I am always looking to capture the unique personality of my client, their mission, what they do, and who they help. My goal is to create professional images that are not only visually stunning, but that also reflect the core values of their vision.

I believe that every small business has a unique story to tell, and it is my job to help tell that story through my photography. Your photography session is about so much more than just taking pretty pictures. It is about capturing the essence of small business owners and conveying it to the world in a way that is both creative and impactful.

In today’s highly competitive marketplace, photography is an essential tool for a small business owner looking to stand out from the crowd and create a connection with your target market.

2. Why is personal brand photograph y important?

First impressions matter. And one of the quickest ways to make a good impression is with high-quality photography. Whether it’s for your website, social media platforms, or marketing materials, high-quality images will make you look more credible and attract new customers.

Great photography will help you stand out from the competition, but it’s also a great way to share what you do and who you help.

If you’re a wedding planner, for example, potential couples will be able to see your level of expertise, what they can expect when working with you, and how you can bring their vision to reality simply by looking at your work through a beautiful wedding gallery images, portfolio, or blog.

For small business owners, investing in photography is one of the best decisions you can make. So if you’ve been meaning to take some for a personal branding session but just haven’t gotten around to it, now is the time!

3. How can you use photography to improve your business

High-quality photography can attract new customers and clients. People are visual creatures, and they’re often drawn to businesses that have aesthetically pleasing websites and social media profiles. People’s attention spans are short, and eye-catching visuals are important.

Photography is a great way to provide aspirational content for your ideal clients. By sharing images that capture your brand’s essence, you can give potential clients a taste of what working with you is like and better yet how working with you helps them.

If you’re an interior designer, share images of your work that highlight a client enjoying living in the new space in their home that you created for them. Aspirational images that express joy, warmth, or if you designed their kitchen, an image of their family gathered around the island in their kitchen laughing and eating freshly baked cookies would be perfect.

With the right images, you can attract new customers.

If you are looking to market in a creative and exciting way, photography is the perfect solution. Beautiful, high-quality images allow you to capture your unique essence and share it with potential customers. Whether you are an aspiring entrepreneur or a seasoned business owner, photography can help you reach new clients and grow your customer base.

At the core, beautiful pictures are all about capturing the essence of your business, taking potential clients behind the scenes on a personal level, showcasing your products or services in a relatable way, and telling a story that speaks to your target market.

They showcase the authentic side of your business and bring your identity to life in ways that words alone simply cannot accomplish. Whether you are promoting a new product or highlighting an upcoming event, beautiful pictures can truly take your marketing to the next level.

Great marketing fuels great businesses!

5. How often should you have a personal brand photoshoot?

Every online business owner has been there. You’re investing in a big project—often, a website redesign.

The website designer gives you a list of photos they need to make your amazing new website complete.

You ask: “What’s wrong with the picture I took during that branding shoot 5 years ago??”

Your designer says, “Well if we were designing this website 5 years ago, they’d be perfect. But we need current photos.”

Your photos are how your dream clients get to know your face and recognize your brand. They build that important Know, Like, Trust factor and bolster your reputation. When your photos connect emotionally with your audience, they can also help you build your online presence and attract more ideal clients.

This is why it’s SO important to keep your photos up to date!

But how current is current enough? How often should you go through the process of getting new photos?

In my professional opinion as a brand photographer, branding expert, and Business Made Simple Coach —the bare minimum for getting new brand photos should be once a year. Once a year is often enough that your website looks fresh and reflects where you are at this present moment in your life and in your business.

However, if regularly sharing content online is a big part of your business growth strategy (as I’d argue it should be), I’d recommend bumping this up to at least twice a year. This way, you can support your content marketing efforts with an abundance of fresh, diverse, and up-to-date photos that make a great first impression on your audience.

The same goes for if your brand is evolving quickly. If you’ve rebranded or are targeting a new market, you’ll want photos that reflect that change.

Ultimately, it’s up to you how often you update your brand photos. Just make sure that when you do update them, they reflect your current brand identity and target market. This way, you can continue to attract ideal clients and grow your business!

6. What are some common mistakes made with brand photography?

There are a number of common mistakes that are often made. The first and most obvious is using outdated or inaccurate images that don’t reflect how you and your brand truly look today.

If you find yourself making excuses or apologies for your photos every time you hand out business cards or mention your website, something’s gotta change.

Another mistake is failing to align your messaging with the images you use. Whether it’s through the setting or style of the photos, it’s important to make a clear connection between what’s being conveyed and how it’s being communicated visually. Otherwise, your images may feel off or mismatched, and this can actually damage your credibility.

A third common mistake is neglecting to include both professional shots and lifestyle images that showcase the personality you want to convey. To be truly effective, your imagery needs to strike a balance between these two types of images, combining high-quality professionalism with an authentic, approachable feel that resonates well.

7. What is included in a branding photoshoot?

At our personal branding photography studio , we believe that a great photoshoot starts with planning and preparation. That’s why we include a wardrobe styling and planning consultation in all of our collections, to help you select outfits that will make you look and feel your best. We’ll also provide hair and makeup artist recommendations that can come to the studio on photoshoot day.

Included in our collections are a variety of images based on your needs. And with our guidance on posing that flatters and camera techniques, we can help you create stunning photographs full of energy and who you are. At the studio, our goal is always the same: to capture who you truly are in your images.

When it comes to your online presence, don’t underestimate the importance of great visuals.

Your photos are your handshake- make sure they reflect you and your business in the best light possible! If you’d like help creating beautiful images for your website, marketing, or social media, I’d love to talk! Schedule a branding photography consultation today and let me know how I can help make you shine.

Branding Photography | Shawon Davis Studio

Planning for your Personal Brand Photoshoot

Mon, 02 May 2022 21:46:41 GMT

Planning for your Personal Brand Photoshoot

I love personal brand photography because while planning for your personal brand photoshoot I get to combine your vision for your brand with my love for business, storytelling, and styling behind the camera. It’s a perfect combination.

Being on the same page with your photographer and communicating exactly how you want to use your photos is important. You will have the photos that you need and get the most of our personal branding shoot.

The needs of a business professional who wants to have headshots to use on LinkedIn and business cards will be different from the needs of a business owner or entrepreneur who needs photos for launching a course or photos for content on social media for the next month or quarter.

Will your photos need white space for text, will you need horizontal and vertical images.

What is going on in your business this quarter?

Are you traveling, speaking, launching a course, is it your favorite season and you want to include your family, are you working on a project and you want to share behind the scenes or part of your process.

These are some of the things that I consider to effectively communicate your brand’s story, content, marketing and messages through your photos.

Each quarter or monthly, I meet with my branding clients and we come up with a strategic plan for the content that they need. On shoot day, I have a written plan and a shot checklist in hand.

When planning for your personal brand photoshoot, here’s some of the creative perspective that I use for a personal brand “shot list” that I want to keep in mind as I photograph and go through each story set of photos:

· Photograph the entire scene

· Step in for tighter shots and details

· Keep the rule of thirds in mind and leave space if there is a need for text on photos

· Get creative with different angles and photograph both in landscape and portrait orientations

· Add movement through standing, sitting and real actions that are authentic

And lastly, although not on the shot list. I want to make sure that poses, wardrobe, and light match the set/location and that they are authentic for my client.

If you are in the surrounding Metrowest Boston area and need a brand photographer who understands how to perfectly capture the essence of your brand in photos that stop the scroll, I’d love to chat. Schedule a consultation with me here!

5 Tips to Build Your Brand's Consistency

Mon, 02 May 2022 21:11:38 GMT

5 Tips to Build Your Brand’s Consistency

When you’re running a race, one of the worst things you can do is look left or look right.

The second you take your eyes off your own lane, you lose focus on what really matters—putting one foot in front of the other and running your own race.

For entrepreneurs and business owners in the online space, building a brand can feel like a high-pressure competition. We all want to show up consistently… everywhere… all the time.

After all, the other racers are hustling, aren’t they?

The problem is… entrepreneurship is not a race. It’s your life. The second you start worrying about keeping up with the person next to you, you forget that you’re on completely different paths.

Your lane might dip when theirs curves. You might need to take a rest when they’re in an all–out sprint.

That’s why, for entrepreneurs, if you want to show up consistently, you have to figure out what authentically works for you.

What does authentic consistency look like?

Even if you aren’t trying to win any races, consistency is important because it builds trust with your audience.

But it can and should vary from person to person.

For most of us, we imagine that consistency means showing up on all the platforms, every single day, and hustling with no break in sight.

But that kind of consistency can easily turn into feeling as though you’re on a hamster wheel, working on a never-ending to-do list, creating content 24/7/365.

It’s taken me some time to figure out exactly what consistency means for my brand. But across the board, consistency should look like showing up for your audience at your best , providing value, and you get to decide how often and when.

So without further ado, here are five tips to serve your audience and be true to yourself in the online space… consistently.

1. Pick just one

When you are new to building your brand, start by researching where your audience already hangs out. You don’t want to spend all your time creating content for Facebook if your audience is hanging out on LinkedIn.

Figuring out what platform your clients are on will help you to focus your energy in the right places. Put all of your energy and focus into one platform in order to get your momentum going. Remember, a big part of consistency is representing your brand well. So pick one, and do it really really well.

Once you feel comfortable managing one platform, or when you have the bandwidth, you can add another platform.

2. Determine what season of life are you currently navigating.

Remember, those toddlers will soon become teens, and school lets out for the summer. Your road is going to dip and curve and throw you a detour every once in a while.

What does your season of life look like right now? How much time can you spend on your business without feeling overwhelmed and exhausted?

When I started my business, I was juggling homeschooling as a mom of three. Facebook was the primary platform for entrepreneurs, and Instagram had started to emerge. I had no idea what I was doing on either platform; I didn’t have a strategy. But I often heard that I needed to be consistent.

So I took the advice and tried sharing content every single day not considering the season of life I was in. I found out pretty quickly that there was no way that I could maintain consistency that looked like being online every single day.

As I coach clients now, I want them to always consider what season of life they are in and make their best decision when it comes to how often they would like to show up on their social media platform of choice and where their clients are hanging out. You can have a successful content strategy plan that works best for the season of life you’re navigating and the bandwidth available for your business.

3. Set YOUR standard for consistently showing up.

So decide for yourself…

If you are in a busy season of life, juggling multiple things, ask yourself what consistency looks like for you. What can you maintain on a weekly basis? Can you consistently show up 2 days a week? 3 days a week? You get to set the standard for when and how often you show up.

If you’re currently only sharing one post a week now, don’t commit to five days because you might not be able to maintain that schedule going from one to five. Go back to step number one and choose what will work best. Start with two days; do that consistently for a week, and then increase that number.

4. Be flexible and give yourself grace.

Your audience wants to see that you’re a human because they are humans too.

Let’s say you’ve decided that consistency, for you, looks like 3 days a week of posting. Maybe you have a week where you’re not feeling well or you have a family emergency, i.e. legitimate excuses. Just give yourself some grace to pick back up and get back to your schedule the next week.

And recognize that it’s okay to push pause on social media. It is absolutely okay if you want to take a vacation to be away for a week or two. Just let your audience know that you’re going to be on vacation and that they’ll see you when you get back.

Remember, when you show that you’re a human, you give your audience permission to take time and pauses too. We get enough pressure everywhere else. Be the one place that allows humans to be humans.

5. Outsource, eliminate, and delegate .

Our to-do list can be a mile long, but if building your brand’s online presence is important, take a look at your to-do list to see what you can outsource, eliminate and delegate.

These three things will help you to be able to maintain your brand’s consistency, even if you’re only focusing on posting 3 days a week.

Again, your lane looks different than my lane. There’s no shame in passing off tasks that you don’t have to do yourself. While you’re focusing on social media, you might want to take a look at other aspects of your business too. What tasks don’t need your personal touch? What tasks would be more cost-effective if a virtual assistant performed them for you? Think like a CEO.

BONUS TIP! Plan.

Put together a reasonable content strategy that will help you to maintain the consistency that you want to achieve.

Your content strategy should consist of the main content pillars for your brand. Plan your daily posts around those content pillars. For example, you could cover Mindset on Mondays, Tips on Tuesdays, Inspiring Women on Wednesdays, Thankfulness on Thursdays, Fashion on Fridays, and Sell on Saturdays.

However, you choose to layout your week, be sure to nail down your content strategy plan in advance, and then choose one day of each week that you will write captions, gather photos, videos or graphics, and plan your content for the week.

Have fun!

I encourage you to consider what consistency looks like for you for this season of life. Give yourself grace, be flexible to make changes and to take pauses. Remember that this is your brand and your business. If you’re dreading any part of running your business, you can give yourself permission to take a step back and fix it so that you enjoy it again.

Most of all, don’t forget to have fun.

For more free content to help you grow your brand and a community of entrepreneurs who really get what you’re going through, join us in the Ignite Your Brand Facebook group right here!

8 Ways to Be More Confident on Video

Mon, 02 May 2022 21:06:42 GMT

8 Ways to Be More Confident on Video

When it comes to elevating your brand and marketing your business in 2022, one thing’s for sure. Video is king! From showing up live on Facebook and LinkedIn to creating Reels and Tik Toks, great video content can help you not only build a stronger brand—but increase your overall brand awareness more than almost any other type of content.

But for many business owners, showing up on video isn’t just a small inconvenience. It’s absolutely terrifying.

Sound familiar? It’s ok, we all start from somewhere. In fact, the first time I hit the Go Live button on Facebook, I was petrified. I wanted to give my audience value but I couldn’t stop wondering:

…What if no one watches?

…What if I’m boring?

…What if my voice starts to shake?

Feeling anxious about showing up on video is natural. But there are a few easy strategies you can use to quickly boost your confidence on camera.

8 Strategies For Looking & Feeling More Confident On Camera

Remember why you’re going on camera in the first place.

Chances are, you’re creating your video because you want to connect and share value with your ideal clients. When you can remember that you’re doing this in service of your audience, it’s easier to work through the fear. When I had a goal to add video to my business, I would use my word of the year to help me work through my fear. I posted it near my laptop, so that I could remember why I was going on camera. That year, it was, “Purpose.” Whenever I started feeling nervous about being on video, I remembered that doing so would serve my PURPOSE of serving my audience each week.

2. Plan ahead & show up with valuable content.

Ask your audience for feedback. Find out what they want to hear more about & simply listen to what they’re saying. That way, you’ll know you’re sharing valuable information that they want to hear.

3. Write out your talking points so you can easily stay on track.

A common fear with getting on camera is that you’ll clam up, go blank, and totally lose track of what you meant to say. To avoid this, make a list of talking points beforehand. Then, if you do blank out while the camera is rolling, you can easily reference your list and get back on track.

4. Look into the lens of your camera as if you’re talking to a friend.

It can be tempting to watch our own image on video. But when you look into the camera, you’ll feel more like you’re speaking with a friend or client. You’ll also look warmer and more natural in your video.

5. Give your hands something to do.

Ever feel super awkward about what to do with your hands? Hold a cup of coffee or tea. This will help you relax and make you feel like you’re having a casual conversation rather than teaching a lesson.

6. Wear your favorite color or favorite outfit.

Try on your on-camera outfit the day before you’re meant to record. This way, you can make sure you’re wearing something that makes you look and feel your best.

7. Schedule to record your video on a light day.

Stress is the enemy of on-camera confidence! Choose a day when you don’t have a lot on your schedule so you won’t feel rushed.

8. Practice, practice, practice.

Schedule a day or two each week to practice. Use your phone to record yourself. You can even share this video with a friend and get some feedback.

Want more branding and business growth strategy tips? Subscribe to my YouTube channel & enjoy a huge back catalog of videos + regular updates to help you market your business with confidence.

Watch the video here: 8 Ways to Be More Confident on Video

My Favorite Tool to Manage Social Media Content

Mon, 02 May 2022 20:56:45 GMT

As business owners, we know how important creating great social media content is for our long-term growth. But let’s be honest—it can be seriously overwhelming!

That’s why I love finding tools and systems to help my clients streamline and grow their businesses. Managing your content and social media process is definitely one of them. You work so hard creating great content—but the right tools can help you:

Work smarter
Take your time back
Create content that serves your audience better
Reach more potential clients across different platforms

There are tons of great social media scheduling tools on the market that can help you pre-plan and schedule your content. (I’ve personally used and recommend Plann and Planoly.)

But for entrepreneurs who want to take their content marketing strategy a step further and reach audiences on more than one platform, you’re going to need something a bit more robust.

So today, I’m sharing my new #1 favorite tool that I use for social media and content creation—Asana.

How I Use Asana My Favorite Tool to Manage Social Media Content

Asana is my key to creating a smarter (not harder), more comprehensive content marketing strategy. It saves me so much time, both in managing my social media content and staying organized as I strategically cross-post content between platforms.

Asana is incredibly diverse and customizable. But to give you a behind-the-scenes peek at the system that works best for my business, here’s how I personally recommend setting up Asana for content management.

2. Create tasks lists within that project for things you use often like social media platforms, hashtags, content categories, and calls to action. Whatever is relevant to your business.

3. Create one main task list that will be used as a template for your big content piece each week. This could be a podcast, blog, etc. Add your template information in the description field, and create a list of tasks that you need to complete for that week of content.

How to Set Up Asana to Manage Your Social Media

Start with clicking the add icon under teams and add a blank project, name the project, and click create project.

4. Open the template that you created, and duplicate it with a new name.

5. Once you’ve made the duplicate, write or copy and paste that week’s content into the description field. You can then check off the subtasks as you complete them for that task, assign due dates or assign tasks to your team.

6. Create a list for each platform that you want to share content on.

7. Write or copy and paste your content on a task card for each of those platforms and schedule due dates.

This process is incredibly simple for managing content—and yet, it helps me keep everything on track, so I can be strategic about my social media content strategy without spending hours juggling between different platforms and google docs!

I hope this helps you get more of your awesome content out into the world!

My Favorite Tool to Manage Social Media Content

How to Create a Content Marketing Plan

Mon, 02 May 2022 20:43:12 GMT

How to Create a Content Marketing Plan

Real talk: creating great content on a consistent basis can feel completely and utterly overwhelming—when you don’t have a clear plan, that is.

Without a plan, content creation can feel a lot like throwing spaghetti at the wall. You spend hours each week planning new content, only to find that no one engages with it. What gives??

Before you throw your hands up and swear you’re done with social media forever, let me just say—I’ve been where you are. I completely understand the frustration you’re feeling.

And I promise—operating with a solid content marketing plan is THE game-changer you’ve been waiting for. And even though it may feel really tough right now, staying the course and creating content is absolutely worth it.

Why Bother Creating Content Consistently?

Creating content that connects with your audience is essential to building your brand. Content allows us to have a 24-hour conversation with our ideal clients.

This means you can be working on your business, spending time with your family, or sleeping… And your content can STILL be working for you & connecting you with potential clients!

Content serves your audience by addressing their pain points. For your audience, this may mean creating content that educates, inspires, or just plain entertains.

Content also helps us build trust. It teaches your audience that you’re reliable and consistent, and positions you as a trusted advisor.

Finally, content helps you keep your audience engaged. It allows you to tell stories, share meaningful experiences, and introduce people to the human behind your brand.

That said, developing a strategic content marketing plan is essential if we want to reap all of those potential benefits of content creation.

5 Tips For Creating Your Content Marketing Plan

1. Start by clarifying your goals.

Don’t pay too much attention to what trends are happening or what everyone else is doing. Fads will come and go, and everyone has different goals. Instead, ask yourself: What are you hoping to accomplish with your content?

For example, are you launching a product or course? Do you want to increase your overall brand awareness? Are you trying to grow your audience?

Content marketing plans will be essential for each of these examples.

Your goals will impact the content you create, how often you’re sharing content, and your call to action for each piece of content.

2. Do your research.

Don’t skip this step! Before you start creating your content, find out what people are searching for. What does your audience actually need?

Pay close attention to questions and comments as your audience engages with you. Jot down notes from your consultations. Generate a list of SEO keywords either by hiring a pro, or using keyword research tools.

Add all of your research to a content marketing planner so that you can easily access ideas and research findings.

By creating well-researched content, you increase the value of your content and the odds of your audience engaging with it.

3. Use a content calendar.

This one’s for my fellow visual learners! Being able to see your content plan mapped out visually can be super helpful. You can do this using a virtual calendar, a number of different social media scheduling tools, or just a good old-fashioned paper calendar. These tools can be used as your content marketing timeline.

Planning your content with a calendar helps you create based on your annual, quarterly, and monthly goals. For example, I used to create content in 90-day chunks. As my strategy has evolved, I’ve learned that planning my content 30-45 days at a time works much better for me.

4. Plan to Plan Your Content Plan

Are you starting to understand how important planning is?? Joking aside, set aside time on your calendar each month to plan for the month ahead. Plan to batch your content creation monthly or weekly—whatever works best for you. There’s lots of room for flexibility here. The important thing here is that you budget time to work on your plan, and stick with it.

5. Document & Create

I launched a YouTube channel last year, and documenting my days has been just as valuable as creating content like this blog. Creating content takes a little more time and research. However, documenting allows you to take your audience behind the scenes of your everyday life.

Not sure what to share? You can share teaching moments, quick tips, resources, and so much more. My content plan for this year includes a combination of both documentation and content creation.

No matter what your goals are, creating a strong content marketing plan will help you achieve them.

Brand Messaging and Why it is Important for Your Business

Tue, 26 Apr 2022 20:38:06 GMT

When I began to brand my business I focused on a pretty website, choosing the right colors, fonts, and the perfect logo.

I believed I was all set, and that new clients were going to come flocking to my doorstep for the services I provided, right?

Here’s what I didn’t realize…

I had left out one really important part: my brand messaging .

You can offer the best products and services in the world, but if you can’t really speak to your audience you will never attract the right clients to your business.

Brand Messaging creates a consistent message for your audience.

1. What is brand messaging and why is it important for small businesses?

Brand messaging is one of the most important aspects of running a successful small business. It’s the process of creating and delivering a consistent message about your brand to your target audience.

Why is brand messaging so important? First, it helps you attract the right customers to your business. Second, it helps you build loyalty and trust with consistent, clear messaging. And third, it can help you differentiate your business from your competitors.

We are bombarded all day long with choices and your target audience is too. So think about this.

What makes you stand out?
What sets you apart from the competition?
What problem do you solve?
Are you clear and concise in your messaging?

Creating a strong brand message will help you rise above the noise and attract your ideal clients.

When done well, brand messaging can help women entrepreneurs build strong, recognizable brands that connect with their customers on a deeper level and drive long-term growth.

Think about a brand you really love. Chances are it speaks directly to you and you feel that connection. Your brand needs to do the same for your target audience.

2. How can you create a brand messaging strategy that works for your business?

How in the world are you supposed to create a strong brand messaging strategy in the midst of running your own business? I would bet you have been overwhelmed by this thought at least once before.

It doesn’t have to be overwhelming.

As one of StoryBrand’s Business Made Simple Coaches, I use the StoryBrand framework, which helps you craft a clear and compelling story that resonates with your target audience.

Identify what your ideal client is trying to achieve

Research their wants and needs

Clarify the problem

Define how you can solve their problem

Create solid brand messaging

Using the StoryBrand Framework positions your client as the hero and you as the guide. Once you have a solid understanding of your story, you can start to share brand messages that will resonate with your audience and help them achieve their goals.

Only you have your brand story and leveraging that will allow you to stand out above the noise.

3. What are some common mistakes made when creating and implementing a brand messaging strategy?

There are a lot of factors to consider, and it’s all too easy to make a misstep. Here are some of the most common mistakes made when creating and implementing a brand messaging strategy.

Do the Research

In order to speak to your target audience, you have to know what their needs are, what motivates them, and what their pain points are.

The best way to do that is actually by listening and researching people who are your target audience.

I know that this may seem like an unnecessary step when your plate is full with building your business, but can you really successfully market your business without knowing who you’re speaking to?

Never underestimate the power of creating a brand message that really speaks to your audience.

Align with Your Overall Branding

If your target audience visits your website, social media, blog posts, or anything else that you have created, are they going to consistently see the same thing?

Would someone who knows nothing about you be able to visit any of your resources and fully understand who you are, what you do, and the problems you solve for them?

Your brand messaging has to be clear and consistent in all of your marketing.

Never leave your audience confused about anything relating to your services, because that could be a lost opportunity.

Take the overwhelm out of the brand messaging strategy.

When I first started my business I was at a loss on where I should begin when it came to my brand messaging.

Trying to figure it all out on my own was so overwhelming.

If you’re not sure how to start creating a brand messaging strategy for your business, I’m here to help.

Together we can create a strategy for your business that aligns with your brand story and resonates with your target client.

Schedule a free consultation today and let’s get started attracting your dream clients.

Brand Messaging and Why it is Important for Your Business

5 Reasons to Use Story to Grow Your Business

Mon, 18 Apr 2022 20:33:38 GMT

5 Reasons to Use Story to Grow Your Business

In February, I ha d the opportunity to speak at the Professional Photographers of America Massachusetts Evolve 2022 Conference. It was truly a full-circle moment on so many levels. While many people know me as a business strategist & branding expert today, there were a few years early in my entrepreneur journey where I truly wondered whether I’d ever even be able to grow a successful business—much less be recognized as an expert or asked to speak at an important event like this.

When I first started building a photography business, I truly believed that my clients would choose to work with my brand because of the pretty photos that I was making for my wedding couples. I was extremely focused on taking creative, beautiful photos—but I was missing a lot of what it really means to build a brand and a business.

I would post pretty photos on social media and on my website. They’d get likes or comments, but it wasn’t really doing much to develop my brand or attract my dream clients.

Somewhere along the line though, I started to think more about the moments behind the images. I started sharing stories about the couples, their wedding day, and the experience.

The day I started using storytelling in my marketing was the day everything began to change. Here are five reasons to use story to grow your business.

Why Should You Use Stories In Your Marketing?

1) Stories Build Trust

Storytelling helps build trust in brand marketing, which is important because you build trust when your audience understands that you get them. They’ll relate to you and your brand, making it easy for them to feel comfortable doing business with you. That’s a great place to start if you want to grow your business over time. Through storytelling, they will trust that you understand their pains and desires (better health, more freedom, more money, better relationships, greater impact etc.)

2) Storytelling is a Great Way to Connect with Your Audience

Storytelling is one of the oldest forms of communication, and there is a reason it is so powerful when we use it in our messaging. When we share stories, our clients can see themselves in the stories that we tell. Marketing is all about connecting with people on an emotional level, so leveraging that power by telling stories can make a big difference in your business’s brand strategy.

3) Storytelling Helps You Stand Out From Competition

Each business has a unique brand strategy, and telling your story is the best way to create an engaging brand that resonates with your audience. Stories help you connect to customers on a deeper level than just messaging about the thing that you sell, making them memorable and relatable to your customer’s lives. Share stories of your clients as much as possible: Show how they struggled with their current problem, how they tried to solve it, and how you were able to help.

4) Stories Are Memorable

Stories are memorable. This means that stories stick with people, not just when they first hear it, but also later on. If you want to build your brand and help people understand your business, storytelling is one of the best ways to do so. Remember that marketing isn’t just ads and emails; it’s anything a small business does to get its brand in front of customers – which means storytelling can be a part of all aspects of your marketing strategy.

5) Stories Create a Sense of Community

Your brand strategy is so much more than choosing a beautiful logo, pretty fonts, and colors. A solid brand strategy will include a sense of community. How do you create that sense of community? By telling stories. Telling stories builds trust and shows empathy with your audience. Stories can create a sense of community and share your understanding of the obstacles that may be preventing them from getting what they want. Stories help us relate to each other, and in turn, they help us connect, motivate and inspire each other as well.

Through story, you can build trust, and empathy, and inspire your audience to go after the life they truly desire and deserve. You can show them that you understand what they’re experiencing and you’re the person to help them transform from where they are, to where they want to be.

If you can connect with your clients through story, they will choose you. They will say yes to working with your brand.

As a certified BMS Coach, I use the StoryBrand Framework with my coaching clients. I help my clients create their unique BrandScript to tell a brand story that positions them as the guide in their ideal client’s journey.

Spending time clarifying your message (AKA developing your brand’s story) makes every other aspect of growing your business that much simpler. A clear message helps you communicate about the problem you solve and how your brand can help.

That’s why I offer my Brand Messaging Playbook—together we will work 1:1 to help you clarify your brand story, create your Brand Messaging Playbook & implement it effectively in your marketing, so you can easily create strong, consistent messaging for your social media content, videos, blog posts, podcasts, sales copy, website, and more!

Inside your Brand Messaging Playbook, you’ll have:

BrandScript to help you craft your core brand message for your business
Brand Narrative, to help you share your brand messaging
One-Liner, so you can easily & efficiently communicate what you do
5 Lead Generator Ideas, so you can attract more of your dream clients
5 Social Media Posts, so you can start sharing your message with the world

You’ll also get:

Four(4) 1:1 Coaching Sessions
Your done-for-you Brand Messaging Playbook
And more!

Ready to start sharing your brand messaging & marketing your business with ease? Schedule a Consultation to get started so you can start dialing in your brand messaging today!

How to Overcome Your Inner Critic

Mon, 11 Apr 2022 20:03:04 GMT

How to Overcome Your Inner Critic

Does this sound familiar? You know you need to put yourself out there in order to grow your business. But you worry…

What will people say about you when they see you posting about your business online?

Do you really have the level of credibility to position yourself as an expert?

Will stepping outside your comfort zone actually be worth it?

What if everyone makes fun of you?

What if you crash and burn and everyone sees?

Thoughts like this can be absolutely crippling as we grow your businesses. But if you want to grow a scalable, successful business, you have to check in with yourself and address one major question…

…What’s REALLY stopping you?

What to Do When You’re Your Own Biggest Obstacle

It took me almost a year to say yes to teaching a photography course to middle and high school students at a local non profit. I had a list of reasons why I was sure they wouldn’t want me to teach:

I didn’t know enough. I didn’t have enough experience. I hadn’t been a photographer long enough. I didn’t have a curriculum. I needed a certification and a long list of letters behind my name.

Eventually, I discovered that leading the way of all my “reasons”—scratch that, my excuses—was fear.

Have you ever noticed that when you step outside of your comfort zone, fear is always hanging out waiting for you?

Yes, me too. It’s never easy when you step out of your comfort zone, but the rewards on the other side are worth it. I’ve experienced so many amazing wins and memorable moments, all because I chose to stare fear in the face & use my gifts to make a difference despite being more than a little nervous.

Right now, you may have some big questions. You may be wondering (just like I did):

Who am I to be doing this?

Do I have enough experience?

Do I need to get certified first?

What should I call myself?

What if I share my message and it flops?

Should I wait a few more years until I feel like a real expert?

These doubts creep into our minds at the worst times and cause us to create self-sabotaging stories. We tell ourselves things like:

I’m not good enough.

I’m not ready enough.

I need more equipment.

Other people will see that I’m an imposter.

If we aren’t careful, we can forget about why we started our businesses in the first place. We can lose sight of the transformation we’re hoping to provide our clients. We can allow our God-given gifts and talents and the possibility to change lives to be hidden.

Your inner critic will show up every time you decide to step out of your comfort zone… But as one of my favorite quotes goes:

“If you’re willing to be seen, magical things can happen.”

Navigating your inner critic isn’t something that comes up just once in your entrepreneurship journey. It doesn’t go away when you hit a certain level of success. In fact, the bigger your business gets, the more often your Inner Critic will step in and attempt to sabotage your success.

That inner critic will pop up at every stage, at every level, every time you say yes to moving forward. If you let it, it will stop you from moving forward.

And THAT’S exactly why it’s absolutely vital to get ahold of your Inner Critic right now. Here are a few strategies for silencing that voice that have worked well in my business over the years.

3 Ways to Overcome Your Inner Critic

1. Let go of perfectionism & take imperfect action.

My coach challenged me a few weeks ago to take action on a small offer that I didn’t feel was ready. I’m a planner at heart. I like having a detailed plan, with every step planned from point A to B. Sometimes that can hold me back because I want everything to be perfect. I don’t want to mess up.

Letting go of perfectionism has been essential to my ability to grow. Taking messy action still scares me, but it’s something I’ve had to learn to do in order to get out of my own way and grow my business.

2. Remember your purpose.

Don’t let what you have to offer the world remain hidden. Don’t stand on the sidelines or stay silent. If you ever start to question whether you really have what it takes—remember your bigger purpose and trust that everything you’re doing is in service of fulfilling that purpose.

3. Practice Positive Affirmations.

Repel negative thoughts. Develop a positive mindset. Positive Affirmations are short positive statements targeted at a specific set of negative beliefs. When practiced regularly, a positive affirmation can help to make lasting, long-term changes to the ways that you think and feel.

Remember: You’re not alone, and you’re not the only one who feels this way.

We are all challenged by our inner critic at every stage of business, from zero to six figures and beyond.

If you’re ready to stop your inner critic in her tracks and get out of your own way, here are a few tools and resources.

These books are a few of my favorites and have been instrumental in helping me overcome my own inner critic, and I believe you’ll find them helpful as well.

How do you overcome your Inner Critic? Do you have any tips or strategies to share? If so, comment below! I’d love to hear what works for you.

How to Market Your Business

Fri, 11 Mar 2022 19:53:45 GMT

How to Market Your Business

If you’ve been in business for more than a year or so, you know how important marketing is. Your brand can be beautiful. You might even have a great offer. But if you don’t know how to position your brand to stand out in a sea of competitors, you’ll be the best-kept secret of your industry.

A few years ago, I began to shift my business to become a branding strategist and business coach for women entrepreneurs. So many women in my community needed support learning how to not just show up online—but show up in a way that would help them stand out to their ideal clients.

I knew I would need to effectively communicate this pivot in my business, and start marketing my new services seamlessly. Among other changes, I needed to:

Generate a new website wireframe with magnetic messaging
Refocus on growing my brand awareness during what promised to be a particularly challenging year
Leverage my 8 years of entrepreneurial experience & reposition myself as an expert in branding and business growth strategy as a whole
Generate offers at the beginning of my value ladder that I could use to help women entrepreneurs take their business to the next level

It sounded like a lot on paper. But I knew if I broke it down into a series of actionable steps, I’d be on my way to marketing myself effectively & attracting the right clients in no time.

If you’re ready to get serious about your marketing but feeling overwhelmed—the same will be true for you. Here’s a step-by-step plan you can follow to start marketing your business with confidence.

How to Confidently & Effectively Market Your Business

STEP ONE: Identify Your Target Audience & Get Clear On the Problem You Solve For Them.

Your ideal client needs to be able to show up on your page, website, etc., and instantly understand how you can help them.

If you’re not sure what problem you solve, ask yourself: What roadblock is getting in their way? How does your business help them overcome this roadblock?

STEP TWO: Clarify Your Message & Position Your Brand As the Guide.

Once you’ve identified your target audience, the next step to clarifying your brand message is figuring out exactly how to effectively communicate your messaging. Clarifying your brand message ensures that everything you share will speak directly to your ideal client.

STEP THREE: Create a marketing plan.

Years ago, I bought an ad with an advertiser who gave me some great advice. She pointed out that the ad wasn’t the only thing I’d need to market my business—that I’d need to fill up a few other buckets.

The same is true for you. Unless you have tons of money to spend on ads, I’d encourage you to create a more comprehensive marketing plan for your business. Doing so will help you generate quality leads, consistently share the problem you solve for your ideal clients, grow your business, and become more known in your industry.

If you need some ideas around what marketing your business could look like, download my free guide, 10 Ways to Market Your Business .

Ready to Boost Your Business, Become Known as An Expert in Your Industry, and Grow the Successful, Scalable Business of Your Dreams?

Applications are open for my Brand & Business Growth Accelerator is open! We’ll be kicking off in the spring. Apply right here, right now.

Brand Photoshoot Behind-the-Scenes

Mon, 14 Feb 2022 19:47:39 GMT

Brand Photoshoot Behind-the-Scenes

Have you ever wondered what a professional brand photoshoot really looks like? Today, I’m taking you behind the scenes of a half-day brand photoshoot I recently worked on with one of our amazing clients, Lori of Lori Mackeil Designs.

Lori works with interior designers and architects. She has a custom drapery workroom located at Medway Mills in Medway, MA.

When Lori approached me about her brand photoshoot, we started with a conversation about her goals. Anytime I work with a new client, I send over a questionnaire to get a clearer idea of what they intend to use their images for—for example, websites, social media, bios, marketing collateral, a launch, a celebration, change for a new season, or content planning.

In Lori’s case, she’s in the process of working towards a website redesign. Working with her goals in mind, we planned some styled design sets that showcase the way she works with her clients—taking measurements, reviewing fabrics, planning for installations, etc.

Because Lori is also located in the same space as the studio, we added a setup inside her gorgeous drapery workroom showing her at work.

When you’re planning for your brand photos, it’s important to think about the relationship between your images and your messaging.

Whether you’re preparing social media content, updating your website, creating blogs, or launching a new course, your brand photos should reflect the overall message you’re trying to communicate.

It’s also important to think about how your images will resonate with your audience. The right photos will immediately connect with your ideal client. They should also repel people who aren’t your ideal client.

For example, do you work with high-level executives? Then a high-end, professional photoshoot is in order. Is your brand polished, sophisticated, and classic? Is it relaxed and chic? Whatever the feel of your brand is, you want photos that represent that, so your dream clients are attracted to you.

Your photos should take your ideal client on a journey and show them how they’ll feel when they work with you. Use your photos to fully represent your brand message, so your ideal clients know you care for them.

Think About Support Beyond the Photographer

When you’re planning a brand photoshoot, you know you need to be on the lookout for a superstar photographer… But what about the other support you will need in achieving your vision?

During my shoot with Lori (and all my brand photoshoots), I provide a wardrobe and style consultation, guidance with posing, and hair and makeup experts to ensure my clients look their best on their big day. For us, this includes:

�� Hair & Makeup Artists (I love @versastylesbynina for our shoots)

�� Wardrobe Consultations to choose the best outfits to represent your brand

�� Styled Design Sets to reflect your brand & the way you work

�� Posing Guidance to help you look natural, warm, and inviting on camera

Remember—teamwork makes the dream work! It’s important to think about your brand photoshoot as a comprehensive experience, not just an opportunity to show up and take some pictures.

Supplemental Materials

In the digital age, we all know the importance of having high quality photo AND video content. While I specialize in brand photography, I love to provide clients with some surprise supplemental materials they can share to promote their brand online.

In Lori’s case, we created an Instagram Reel showcasing the behind-the-scenes of her photoshoot. In it, she shares how she prepares to leave her workroom for a drapery installation day. You can check it out here.

As you plan your own brand photoshoot, don’t be afraid to ask your photographer whether they’d be able to support you in creating additional video content. The answer may not always be yes, but you’ll never know if you don’t ask!

Should You Plan Your Own Brand Photoshoot?

Brand photoshoots are a must for any serious entrepreneur. Ideally, scheduling consistent shoots on a regular basis will keep you stocked up on personal brand photos & give you a never-ending supply of beautiful photos to showcase your brand online.

Having brand photos you love is key to showing up authentically and professionally online. If you aren’t in love with the way your brand appears on your website or social media, scheduling a brand photoshoot is a simple and highly effective way to immediately elevate your brand’s virtual presence.

If you’re a woman business owner in the MetroWest Boston area who is ready for brand photos that help you show up professionally, confidently, and consistently online, I’d love to connect with you. You can schedule a consultation call here.

How to Plan Your Year as an Entrepreneur

Thu, 10 Feb 2022 19:41:27 GMT

How to Plan Your Year as an Entrepreneur

As business owners, it can be easy to get caught in a cycle o f reactivity.

But if you want to break out of the hustle cycle and start scaling your busy in a strategic, aligned way—you absolutely MUST learn how to plan effectively.

Personally, planning and strategizing are some of my favorite things to talk about. Learning to effectively plan for your business is essential to:

Feeling aligned with your work

Creating space in your schedule

Avoiding burnout

Not overcommitting or overextending

And yet, so many business owners don’t really understand how to plan, in a long-term sense. So today, I’m sharing with you a few of my favorite tips for planning your year of entrepreneurship.

3 Strategies For More Effective Annual Planning

1. Not Sure Where to Start? Put All Your Most Important Dates On Your Calendar.

There are certain dates you want to make sure you don’t accidentally double-book—these might be birthdays, family vacations, anniversaries, holidays, or any other date that’s important to you.

Putting your non-negotiables on the calendar first gives you a strong foundation to start with and ensures that you’re planning your business around your life—not vice versa.

Looking for a new calendar? My favorite is this one, from Etsy . It’s a 36” x 48” tool that allows me to easily see the big picture for my year. It hangs in my office and even travels with me when I go on my solo business retreats!

2. Schedule Existing Obligations

What things have you already said yes to? Add those dates to your calendar next. These could be clients you’ve agreed to work with, speaking engagements, masterminds you’re offering or attending, etc.

3. Refer to Your Goals List

Now that you know what free time you have available, it’s time to think strategically about how you want to spend that time. Where do your launches fit? What big projects will you prioritize, and when will you work on them?

Planning your projects and promos around big life events makes it easier to determine which seasons you’re more likely to have time and energy available—and which seasons may require you to move at a slower pace.

Blocking out your projects this way also allows you to plan for your revenue goals. In looking at your big picture, you can easily break down your annual revenue goal into quarterly revenue goals. Then, you go one step further and figure out what products and services you need to sell to hit those specific goals. This is the key to consistently hitting your revenue targets, without overextending, burning out, or feeling like your work is getting in the way of your life.

Ready to Get Serious About Planning For Your Business?

March 4-5, 2022 , I’m hosting a retreat for women business owners and professionals! During this 2-day event, you’ll learn how to create meaningful goals for your life and business, in a way that creates ease, focuses on all of the domains of your life, and prioritizes what matters most to you.

This is not your run-of-the-mill, create-a-goals-list retreat. You’ll leave this event with a life plan and a goals planner to help you manage your time and energy this year, so you can maximize your productivity without procrastinating or losing focus, and crushing your biggest goals.

Interested? Get more information & secure your spot here .

Ask Me Anything: How to Manage Your Limited Time As a Busy Entrepreneur

Thu, 03 Feb 2022 19:34:37 GMT

Ask Me Anything: How to Manage Your Limited Time As a Busy Entrepreneur

QUESTION :

I’m a small business owner, a wife, a mom of three kiddos 10 and under. I’m juggling all of the things and I have a short window of time each day for work hours. (Technically, I have five hours each day)

When I sit down at my desk to get to work after dropping the kids off at school, I honestly don’t know where to start.

ANSWER :

One of the biggest obstacles to building a thriving, aligned business is finding TIME to do everything we want to do. Especially in the early stages of growing and scaling, it’s common for business owners to feel…

CONFUSED about where to focus their attention.

OVERWHELMED, like they’re constantly drowning in a mile-long to-do list.

EXHAUSTED, sick of struggling, and maybe even edging up against burnout.

First of all, let me just say—you’re not alone in feeling this way. When I first started my business 10 years ago, I was a homeschooling, stay-at-home mom.

I wanted to build a successful business that was joyful and purposeful… But I felt like almost every minute in my day was already spoken for. It took a while, but eventually, I was able to carefully carve out time by delegating, outsourcing, and flat-out eliminating some tasks.

Choosing to hand over some of your day-to-day personal or professional obligations might not feel possible right off the bat. But think of this as an investment in yourself and your growth. If growing your business is truly important to you, it’s important to see outsourcing and delegation as an essential form of investment in yourself and your growth.

How to Find Time For Your Business When Your Schedule Is Maxed Out

So where to start? I like to break down my process of removing tasks from my plate into two core steps.

STEP 1: Ask yourself, what tasks don’t require your personal touch?

Are there tasks in your day that you don’t physically have to be the one doing? Are there items that would be more cost-effective if someone else performed them for you? Some common team members to invest in while building your business include:

Virtual Assistant
Social Media Manager
Accountant
Bookkeeper
Copywriter

Building a team can be scary—but if you want to be a CEO, you have to start thinking like a CEO.

STEP 2: Create a schedule to accomplish everything that’s left.

There will inevitably still be a long list of things that you personally need to attend to. That’s okay! For tasks that remain on your list after delegating, outsourcing, and eliminating, I want you to assign a specific day of the week to accomplish that task. Then, assign a specific time block for that specific task.

In my business, I take this a step further by mapping out each week of the month and dedicating each day to a specific task. For example:

WEEK ONE: I’ve assigned four days of the first week of the month to specifically work on my business. This means tasks related to improving client experience, business development, marketing strategy, etc. In Week One, I also have a designated day to meet with clients inside my Brand & Business Growth Accelerator Program, and this is also assigned on weeks two and three.

WEEK TWO: In Week Two, I have time set aside for content research, writing blogs, and we open the studio for brand photoshoots for clients.

WEEK THREE: Week Three is my content production week. I focus one full day on writing video scripts for YouTube, recording videos, and editing videos.

WEEK FOUR: In Week Four, I have one full day assigned for monthly review, checking in on goals, and planning my content repurposing strategy.

Some tasks will only need to be done once each month—for example, paying bills or checking in with my bookkeeper.

Other tasks need to be accounted for on a weekly basis—for example, consultation with potential clients, networking, and engaging on social media.

I’ve found this system helpful because, like you, I juggle many things in my business and family life. Every week can’t look exactly the same.

However, even when life gets busy, this system allows me to know exactly what I need to be working on in my business—so I can keep taking action and my business can keep growing.

Want a quick way to get started with this system? Here’s a Weekly Schedule Template based on the exact framework I use to plan my business activities every month.

Grab it here —and be sure to let me know if it helps you take back control of your time!

PS – Even with this system, it’s important to give yourself grace. Sometimes as entrepreneurs and parents, we need to be agile. No matter what happens, just keep going. You’ve got this!

Have a Burning Business Question You’d Like My Support With?

Interested in joining a future Office Hours session?

Click here to explore upcoming workshops, events, and current experiences.

New Paragraph

How to Achieve Your Goals in 2022

Thu, 13 Jan 2022 19:18:48 GMT

How to Achieve Your Goals in 2022

Years ago, I used to call myself the Post-It Notes Queen—because when it came to writing out my goals, I didn’t really have a clear plan. Just a bunch of disconnected notes and ideas.

I’d jot down these “goals” on post its or scrap paper, but rarely did I achieve them. Instead, I’d get all excited while making the list—then promptly shove it into a drawer, never to be seen again.

Looking back, I can’t be too hard on my past self. I was just doing what I saw everyone else doing: writing down a list of “resolutions”, without any plan of action to accomplish what was on that list. I had good intentions, but strategy.

Maybe you can relate?

Eventually, I realized I needed to find a way to go beyond scribbling down good ideas. I need a real, bonafide goal setting system. A way to keep my goals visible, track my progress, be intentional with my actions, and know whether I’d actually accomplished anything on that list.

This is true for anyone who sets any kind of goal. But for entrepreneurs, adopting a solid goal setting system is absolutely crucial.

If you want to grow a sustainable, profitable business, you MUST learn how to set and achieve smart, strategic goals.

As we transition into 2022, it’s time again to think about how you want to grow as an entrepreneur—and as a human being—in 2022. The new year is the perfect opportunity to think about not just hitting revenue targets and business milestones, but achieving better balance and bringing more awareness to all the domains of our lives, both personally and professionally.

Having well thought out goals in place makes a huge difference in how we operate as business owners. Even if we experience seasons where we need to rework some things, having clear goals can help make sure we continue to move in the right direction.

So how can you set smart goals and intentions for 2022—and more importantly, how can you turn those intentions into action?

Here are five of my best tips for rocking your new year’s goals and achieving your desired level of growth and impact in 2022.

1. Choose a Word of the Year.

Selecting a word of the year is a great way to stay focused and motivated. Unlike making resolutions, a Word of the Year provides flexibility. You get to choose a general theme for your year, which you can use to make more intentional decisions about where your time and energy goes.

For example, one of my previous words of the year was “purpose.” I had a big goal to go live weekly on Facebook. Any time I felt scared of pushing the “Go Live” button, I reflected on that word—purpose. I thought about a mission that was greater than myself. I thought about my audience and how much I wanted to show up and support them.

This year, my word is, “Relentless.” Some ideas for your word could include: bold, courageous, thrive, or growth.

2. Establish routines for the bookends of your day.

The bookends of our day hold everything else together, so choose wisely when planning your morning and evening routine.

A great morning routine could include starting your day with gratitude exercises, journaling, prayer, exercise, reviewing your goals, or setting daily intentions.

Likewise, your evening could include reflection, brain dumping, or affirmations.

3. Use tools & systems to track your progress.

What things do you want or need to measure in your business this year? What system will you use to track your metrics? Maybe you want to grow your Instagram account, track your leads, or ensure your offers are profitable. Measuring your success with reliable tools based on clear benchmarks will help you stay on track and achieve success.

4. Stay committed to taking small steps.

Taking small, daily action towards your goals will build momentum. Right now, your goals probably feel huge. Taking baby steps is ultimately what will lead you across the finish line.

Each day, figure out a few small steps you can take to keep yourself moving in the right direction. It might not feel like much when you’re doing it, but you’ll start to notice a snowball effect soon enough.

5. Find a support system.

It’s hard doing it alone! Find someone to help hold you accountable. Choose friends who make a great sounding board. Partner up with a biz bestie and help keep each other on track. Having people like this in your life will help you better see your own gaps and blindspots.

A support system could look like a Mastermind, a Business Coach, or an accountability group. If you’re not quite at that level, this could also be a close circle of trusted friends or even your spouse.

Need Some Help Getting Clear On Your 2022 Growth Strategy? Let’s Talk!

I’d love to help you come up with a clear, actionable plan to grow the profitable, sustainable business of your dreams in 2022.

Click here to Book a free consultation now and let’s figure out how we can move the needle towards your biggest goals for 2022 and beyond!

5 Business Tools I Cant Live Without

Wed, 17 Nov 2021 19:11:45 GMT

5 Business Tools I Can’t Live Without

5 Business Tools I Can’t Live Without

High-Impact Resources to Elevate Your Brand

Since starting my photography business in 2011, I’ve realized the power and importance of having great systems in place.

While there are thousands of business and branding tools available in the world, having the right tools to keep business running as smoothly and efficiently as possible is absolutely invaluable.

So today, I’m sharing five tools that I use every single day in my business to help me maximize my productivity, uplevel my client experience, and elevate my brand.

Note: This post contains affiliate links. When you sign up for one of the services below using my link, I’ll get a small commission—and you might get a discount! Using my affiliate link doesn’t impact your user experience at all. It’s simply a way for me to share products I use and love with my audience.

1. Honeybook

Honeybook is an all-in-one client management system that has taken my workflow and client experience to another level. With a little bit of initial assistance from the Honeybook team, I’ve been able to set up:

Workflows for my coaching and branding clients
Email templates
Fillable, signable contracts
Invoices
…and more!

… All in one easy-to-use, beautiful platform.

Each day, I can login and get a quick picture of where all my in-progress projects are and what tasks I need to complete. I can also review reports, communicate with clients, respond to inquiries … and the list goes on!

One of the things I love most about Honeybook is that it makes automation a breeze. By creating automated workflows in Honeybook, I save myself a TON of time and mental space, which I can then use towards higher-level, CEO work in my business.

Plus, Honeybook integrates with many of the other apps I use seamlessly!

Try It Now & Get 50% Off Your Honeybook Subscription Use Code: shawondavis

2. Calendly

Let me be clear: I don’t know how I ever lived without Calendly.

This simple scheduling tool allows me to easily create events for initial consultations, wardrobe consultations, session dates, reveal sessions, and more … without EVER having to worry that I’m going to miss an important appointment.

Prior to using Calendly, I spent so much time going back and forth with clients to schedule appointments and sessions. Now, I can simply send them my Calendly link and they can select a time from my calendar that works best for them.

When a client schedules a new appointment, I instantly receive an email. From there, I add to my calendar. Calendly syncs with your Google Calendar (and many other calendar apps) to help you avoid double booking or over-extending yourself.

Another Calendly feature that I absolutely love is that they’ll send text or email reminders to my clients to remind them of their upcoming appointment. This means fewer missed appointments and less wasted time for both my clients and myself.

Calendly also offers a wide variety of other features—I’ve really only scratched the surface.

Learn more about how Calendly can save you time and streamline your planning at www.calendly.com

3. Davey & Krista Website

Your website is your home on the internet. It’s where people look first to find information about who you are and what you do. So it goes without saying that having a beautiful, effective website that prospective clients can navigate easily is essential.

But that doesn’t mean you have to spend $10,000 having a custom site created, only to end up needing to hire a developer every time you need to make changes.

Davey and Krista offer breathtaking, professional website templates that elevate your client experience and help you solidify your brand. They’ve been a favorite of mine for a few years now, and I actually just launched my new website using one of their templates this past August.

Find the Best Template For Your Business Right Here.

4. Canva

Raise your hand If you have zero graphic design skills.! Both of my hands are raised.

Canva is a lifesaving tool that allows non-designer entrepreneurs (like myself) to design gorgeous assets. Personally, I’ve used Canva to create lead generators, presentation slides for workshops, PDFs, social media graphics, and much more.

I also use Canva to store all my branding elements in one place. Their workspace allows me to keep my logos, color palettes, etc. organized and makes it easy to design branded assets in just a few minutes.

Canva offers templates to help you get started, but free-hand designing in Canva couldn’t be easier if that’s your thing. They also offer both a free and paid version, so you can try before you buy!

Start designing at www.canva.com

5. Creative Market

I’ve been using Creative Market for about six years, and every year, I think I love them a little more. Prior to Canva, they were my go-to for all my design needs. But even now that I have Canva, I still turn to them for design help once in a while, and I’m never disappointed.

Creative Market is full of amazing designers who offer products from marketing collateral to fonts, magazines, graphics, product mockups and more.

I have personally purchased fonts, canva templates for lead generators, social media, and website mockups.

Designs are available for Photoshop, Indesign, Canva, and others so make sure that you choose the correct file type when purchasing a product.

Shop Creative Market Using This Link

However, I hope this list gives you a great starting point!

These are the tools that have allowed me to build my brand and grow my business with ease over the years, and I can’t recommend them highly enough.

Just choose the one that makes the most sense for your goals, and click the link above to get started now!

How to Find Your Niche

Mon, 20 Sep 2021 19:01:26 GMT

How to Find Your Niche

Niching down when there are so many things to love about what you do can be a huge challenge for business owners.

I faced this challenge myself when I was starting my business.

One thing that I’d tell my just-starting-a-business self, was that my lack of a niche was making it harder for me to grow. I was struggling to build a brand or develop a reputation because I wasn’t known for any one thing … I was, in most folks’ eyes, just another photographer. I needed to specialize if I wanted to become known.

It was hard to choose one thing because I loved everything. Wait until you hear all of my choices–YIKES!

Three other limiting factors that were on my list:

The fear of limiting myself, I wasn’t ready to choose an area of specialization, and I didn’t know how or where to start.

What I didn’t know…

There is tremendous value in finding your brand’s niche.

Choosing a niche doesn’t mean you can’t ever offer any service or serve any client outside your niche. It simply means you’re choosing to become known for your expertise in one particular area of your market, specialize in that one thing, and do it well.

How to find your niche to up-level your business?

Finding your brand’s niche can help you build your brand faster and reach that next level of business growth. In this video, I’m sharing why niching down can help you scale your business up and three questions to help you figure out your brand’s niche.

Grab your journal, brainstorm some answers to the questions above, and see what you come up with.

Watch and Subscribe here on YouTube. See you over there!

3 Pillars For A Strong Brand Marketing Strategy

Tue, 14 Sep 2021 18:56:46 GMT

3 Pillars For A Strong Brand Marketing Strategy

When it comes to branding, so many entrepreneurs get stuck on feeling like they need a fancy logo, the perfect brand colors, or exactly the right fonts.

But while those are all part of your brand identity—it’s important not to get stuck there.

Visual elements can make your brand look beautiful. However, aesthetics are only a small piece of the equation. If you’re spending all your time obsessing about how your brand looks, you’re spending your time in the wrong place.

So what’s the right place? As a branding expert and business coach, I’ve learned that there are three crucial brand pillars that can actually strengthen your brand marketing strategy and move your business forward.

Creating A Brand Is About So Much More than Choosing Pretty Design Elements.

It’s about solidifying your brand’s core framework. Knowing your why and your mission. Clarifying your voice and message. Connecting with your ideal clients and creating a remarkable client experience.

If you can move beyond the beautiful visual and work to establish a strong, clear brand—that’s when your business will start to shine.

Interested in learning more about how to create a strong brand marketing strategy? I’ve created this video to walk you through your next steps!

Watch & subscribe on YouTube using this link. See you over there!

5 Tips To Choose Your Brand Photographer

Wed, 25 Aug 2021 18:52:45 GMT

5 Tips To Choose Your Brand Photographer

Raise your hand if there’s more than one person in your industry who does the same thing you do!

Yep, that’s everyone.

Now, raise your hand if there are more than 100 people who do the same thing you do!

…Chances are, your hand is still raised. But that’s okay!

Even if you feel like you’re in a saturated industry, it’s possible to set yourself apart from the competition and create a brand that stands out to your ideal clients. One of my very favorite ways to do that is through branded photography.

Brand photography helps you tell your brand’s story, forge a deeper connection with your audience, and puts you in a class of ONE.

Brand photography is a big part of what allows me to confidently share my expertise as a branding expert, photographer, and business strategist. Are there thousands of other coaches and service providers who do something similar? Probably. But I don’t worry about that, because I know I’ve built a strong brand—and I have highly personalized, storytelling photos to help me share that brand.

No matter how many others may offer similar services to yours, YOU are what’s completely unique about your business. No one can take that away from you, and no one can do it exactly the same way.

This is why sharing your brand story through branded photos can be so very powerful and impactful.

But far too many business owners don’t have enough beautiful branded photos. They use the same photos from five years ago, or grab what they can with their iPhone.

In the beginning, using what you have access to might fly. But as your business grows, it’s important that your brand photography reflects your story.

And what kind of story are we telling with outdated or low-quality images?

5 Tips to Choose Your Brand Photographer

All that being said, choosing the right brand photographer can be challenging. With so many talented folks to choose from, how can you be sure you’re working with an expert who will effectively capture your personality, your story, and your brand?

I’ll tell you what I told one of my clients recently. These are my favorite tips for choosing the right brand photographer for a photoshoot.

1. Take a look at the photographer’s style.

When I say their style, I mean look at their portfolio and see if their photos align with your brand words. For example, if your brand words are “classic” and “timeless” and their photos are clearly vintage-style, I’d recommend you continue your search. A vintage style is not going to align with the clean, classic, and timeless feel you want your brand to convey.

2. Are their photos consistent?

Thinking again about the style of their photography, does it seem to stay consistent from shoot to shoot? Are they using the same editing styles across the board? A mix of editing styles (vintage, clean, bold, muted, etc.) can be a major red flag. You don’t want any surprises when you receive your photos!

3. Set up a phone or video call.

Make sure your photographer has great energy. When you step in front of the camera, you will often mirror the energy that’s given to you. If your photographer is laid back, upbeat, and relaxed, you’re more likely to embody those qualities in your pictures.

4. Ask about their process.

Set your expectations ahead of time. Will they offer a planning consult? I’d personally say this is an extremely important part of preparing for a successful shoot and essential for getting the exact images you’ll need. Will they help style your wardrobe, hair, or makeup? Do they have a studio in case of rain? How long will it take to get your photos back? How will those photos be delivered? Make a list of questions you have before speaking with them, and don’t be afraid to ask.

5. Check their reviews.

This is a simple tip, but it can have a massive impact. The best way to know whether a photographer can deliver what you’re looking for is to see what past clients have said about their experiences.

Having Brand Photos Is 100% Necessary In Today’s Digital, Image-Driven World.

Choosing the right photographer to capture the essence of your brand is key to showing up consistently, marketing confidently, connecting with your ideal clients, and growing your business.

Need a Brand Photographer In the Metrowest Boston Area?

I understand how to perfectly capture you and the essence of your brand in photos, and I’d love to chat! Contact us below for your initial consultation!

The One Thing To Make Your Brand Stand Out

Sat, 07 Aug 2021 18:46:30 GMT

The One Thing To Make Your Brand Stand Out

Before we dive in, let’s play a game: Name that HGTV show! Here are a few hints to get you started:

This show is all about helping homeowners who have a dream to live in a nice neighborhood with great schools, so they can raise their family in a wonderful location… BUT they don’t have a large budget to put into that nice neighborhood.
The purpose of this show is that the hosts help families find a home in the right location, within their budget. Then, they create a plan to fix it up and turn it into the family’s dream home.

Any guesses?? If you said Fixer Upper , you’re correct!

The hosts of HGTV’s Fixer Upper , Chip & Joanna Gaines, have a very clear approach to solving their ideal client’s problems. It’s not just that they renovate houses—they fix up specific types of houses, for specific types of families, to create a very specific solution.

We understand, through their messaging, marketing, and mission, exactly who they are, what they stand for, and how they can help.

Sure, their brand is beautiful. They have a gorgeous logo and pretty colors. But it’s about much more than that.

Their brand is about family. It’s about simple luxury, personal touches, and creating a wholesome, beautiful environment on any budget.

Can you say your brand is just as clear as theirs??

Fixer Upper Is a Great Example Of The Fact That Brands Exist To Solve Problems For Their Clients. Period.

Like Chip & Joanna, your job is to communicate exactly how you can help your client, and then take them through an amazing transformation.

Your ideal clients want something. They’re looking for a change or a solution, and they need someone to help get them there. Building a brand is all about making it crystal clear exactly why YOU are the right choice for YOUR clients.

What Problem Do You Solve?

Knowing what problem your brand solves is the one thing to make your brand stand out.

One of the core frameworks I take clients through in my Ignite Your Brand Mastermind is getting clear on the problem they solve, clarifying their brand message, and creating their brand’s story. I help them position their clients as the hero, and their brand as the guide.

In his best-selling book Building a Storybrand, Donald Miller says, “If you confuse, you lose.” This is one of my favorite branding-related quotes. Your ideal client needs to be able to visit your website, landing page, etc. and immediately understand exactly how you can help them.

Figuring out what problem you solve is a seemingly small step that is absolutely crucial when it comes to creating content that’s clear, not confusing.

Going back to our HGTV example, Chip & Joanna have made it very clear exactly what problem they solve. We get teary-eyed seeing their big reveals, because we understand that they’ve given these families more than just a pretty house—they’ve turned a dream that seemed impossible into a reality.

What To Do After You’ve Figured Out What Problem You Solve

Drill down on your story and WHY you solve the problem you solve. Repeat these elements again and again in your marketing. Walking through this process is crucial.

As a BMS Coach, my clients are coached through how to do this using the proven StoryBrand Framework. This framework teaches you exactly how to create brand messages for social media content, blog posts, podcasts, marketing messages, your website, and much more. By following it, my coaching clients are able to clearly communicate exactly what they do, who they help, and why—so they can market their offers with confidence & consistently grow their business.

Want Help Clarifying Your Message & Improving Your Marketing?

Click here to explore my current workshops, events, and brand experiences created for women business owners who are ready to show up with confidence and visibility.

Women In Business Spotlight | Shawn Strok, Strok Design - Shawon Davis

Tue, 27 Jul 2021 18:39:28 GMT

Women In Business Spotlight | Shawn Strok, Strok Design

As a brand expert and Business Made Simple Coach, I absolutely love helping women in business find new ways to stand out, clarify their message, connect with their dream clients, and hit their business growth goals.

That’s why I started the Women In Business Spotlight—as an opportunity to showcase some of the incredible women entrepreneurs I get to work with, spotlight their work, and dish out some of the recognition they well deserve.

This month, I’m excited to introduce you to Shawn Strok, the incredible designer behind Strok Design. Check out Shawn’s interview below to learn more about her story, her services, and how she went from a fashion student to one of New England’s top home designers.

Why did you start your business or choose your profession?

After graduating from The Fashion Institute of Technology in NYC, I started my career in the center of the fashion business on Seventh Avenue. Through my first few years in the clothing industry, I worked in showrooms and gradually found my way into the interiors market selling European textile designs.

The idea that interior design was also fashion hadn’t occurred to me, and I was intrigued. I had always loved creating beautiful spaces. I constantly gravitated toward the local furniture stores on my walk to work through the Westside streets of Manhattan.

To get my start in interior design, I trained to design and sell custom closets and other organizational spaces in the home. I was fortunate to work in gorgeous homes throughout the Tri-State area of New York, New Jersey, and Connecticut for several years.

After 911 priorities changed, and a move to Massachusetts to be closer to family was a huge shift. Now married with two young children and lots of renovations to our new home needed, I honed my skills. The results caught the eye of one of my contractors, and in 2004 I started my first interior decorating company—Potters Hand Interiors.

In 2008 I aligned with Decorating Den Interiors, a national design company. With the increased access to exclusive products, trade relationships and training, my little design business grew exponentially.

In 2018, another home renovation—this time a waterfront property, which has been a life long dream—transformed my business again. Organically, clients started to ask about their summer homes throughout Massachusetts and Rhode Island shores and lakes. Would I travel? The answer was a resounding yes, of course!

During the Covid 19 Pandemic I was able to continue working and designing in empty summer homes while my clients wintered somewhere warm. It was perfect and since then, I have carved out a specialty with my team of architects and builders to create the best and most distinctive summer homes in New England and beyond.

What do you love most about what you do?

The thing that I love most about what I do is seeing my clients’ reactions when they walk into their newly designed space for the first time. I’ve gotten everything from tears of joy, hugs, and applause to actual gifts.

What’s something fun that someone might not know about you?

My first business was in direct sales for Amway Corp. in 1991. Together with my husband Craig, we built a small organization of people and learned how to manage a business and a team among so many other things.

We both say that we went to AMWAY UNIVERSITY for our graduate degree because we learned more during those 8 years of our “side gig” than we could have ever learned doing an MBA.

What’s your favorite book?

My favorite book is Prayers That Avail Much by Germaine Copeland. There have been many times that I utilized the prayers in this book to calm my spirit and spur me on.

Interested In Working With A New England Interior Designer? Shawn Is One Of the Best!

Use the links below to visit her website for more information about her services, or connect with her on Instagram!

Website: https://designorganizegather.com/

Instagram: www.instagram.com/designorganizegather

3 Ways to Grow Your Small Business

Tue, 20 Jul 2021 18:31:29 GMT

3 Ways to Grow Your Small Business

Entrepreneurship is NOT for the faint of heart—especially in the early days before you’ve built a team. Being a business owner means wearing many different hats, juggling all the things, and making all the decisions.

No matter what we do, it can feel like there’s never enough time. Between showing up for our family, staying up to date on client work, spending time on social media, and whatever else pops up from day to day, intentional, leadership-focused CEO activities often fall to the wayside.

And yet—if you want to create an aligned brand and a business that gets results, stepping into the role of CEO in your business is absolutely vital.

Thinking like a CEO means leading your team with a vision for your brand and planning for what’s next.

Even if you don’t feel like you’ve reached that level just yet, step into that mindset. As the CEO of your business, one thing to start doing now is carving out time to work not just IN your business, but ON your business.

So how can you find balance and make sure you’re spending time on both?

It’s no easy feat. But these are my top 3 strategies for finding this balance, so I can take care of daily to-dos without sacrificing my business’ long-term growth and strategy.

DAILY

Almost every day, I review my life plan and my goals for the year. I also write down the top three primary tasks that I want to accomplish for the day. Writing down my top three tasks helps ensure that I’m focusing on the needle-movers—not just the to-do list.

Another important part of my daily planning is that I designate certain days of the week for certain tasks in my business. For example, I have a day where I pay my bills. A day where I send info to my bookkeeper. I also have days for finalizing brand galleries, completing audits, coaching my Mastermind, and working with private clients.

MONTHLY

Each month, I identify specific goals that I want to be sure I’m working towards in my business. I set aside one day to review the previous month and plan the next one using my PowerSheets. You may have heard me talk about my PowerSheets Planner before—this is because it’s a lifesaver! It helps me make sure I’m cultivating what’s important in both my business and my life.

During my planning days, I block out time specifically for:

Reviewing what worked and what didn’t in the previous month
Looking at the specific numbers I’m measuring (for example, social media or email list growth)
Creating my content plan for the month

QUARTERLY

A few years ago, I started treating myself to quarterly business retreats … And all I can say is, why didn’t I do this sooner??

This is a time that I literally get away to:

Review my goals
Celebrate my wins
Look at what’s working, what’s not, and what can be improved
Create a strategy for the next 90 days based on my business goals
Develop a vision for what’s next—this is one of the most important CEO activities you can do because no one else can develop your vision for you!

My quarterly retreats allow me time and space to get crystal clear on my goals, desires, and strategies. They’re a wonderful chance to reflect and reconnect with my purpose. In fact, I credit these retreats as being the MOST important thing I do to maintain a balance between working in my business and on my business.

How To Start Working More Intentionally On Your Business

Click here to explore my current workshops, events, and brand experiences created for women business owners who are ready to show up with confidence and visibility.

My 3 Favorite Sources For Inspiration

Wed, 14 Jul 2021 18:24:23 GMT

My 3 Favorite Sources For Inspiration

If you’ve been in this community long, you likely already know that creativity is one of my passions in life. I started this business as a photographer. I love design, branding, and all things beautiful.

But even as a natural creative, I sometimes find myself struggling with inspiration. At the end of a long week, when my energy is low and decision fatigue has set in, creating something truly innovative and unique can feel like an uphill battle.

Do you ever feel that way?

If so, today’s blog is for you! In my own life, it’s been helpful for me to set rhythms and patterns around rejuvenating my creative inspiration. When I get stuck in a rut or hit a wall, I know there are certain places I can look to rekindle that spark and drum up a great idea.

Here are 3 of my favorite sources of inspiration.

1. Interior Design & HGTV

If you ask my hubby, he’d tell you that interior decorating was NOT one of my superpowers when we first got married. And I can’t blame him! I didn’t have one home-design-oriented bone in my body.

And then—like many of us—I found HGTV! This channel has become a huge source of growth for me creatively. I love learning from other designers and getting inspired by the layers, lines, textures, and colors others use in their homes and designs for others.

Some of my favorites are Fixer Upper, Property Brothers, Love It or List It, and No Reno Demo a recent new favorite. Did I list any of your favorites?

I love them all, but let’s chat about Fixer Upper because I love seeing how Chip & Joanna Gaines apply their natural taste to meet their clients’ goals. Their ability to incorporate their personal aesthetic and their clients’ wants seamlessly is truly inspirational to me, and I’m always awe-struck by their transformations.

I frequently incorporate what I learn on HGTV into my own life. For example, I’ve used some of their tips to design my photography studio and sets for personal brand photography clients.

I’m also extremely inspired by the intentional branding behind each unique design show, and I love noticing how these shows—though similar at heart—are marketed to completely different audiences.

2. My Garden

Ahh, my garden has become such a sweet, quiet space for me. This year, I’ve been especially inspired by one of my peonies, which managed to bloom even after our contractor mistakenly placed a huge rock over it last year. To see that beautiful bloom emerge out of such a difficult space gives me hope. It encourages me to think about my own story and inspires me to bloom wherever I’m planted, in spite of whatever obstacles I may face.

In a more general sense, the garden also inspires me to consider the ways in which we nurture things in our lives and in our businesses. What we put time into, will grow.

I’m inspired by each unique season in the garden. There’s always something new growing, and each year seems to somehow be bigger and more beautiful than the last.

And yes—I’m also inspired by the weeds. Pulling them out of my garden reminds me how important it is to rid ourselves of things that are not serving us, so we can continue to grow.

3. This Quote: “You are the average of the five people you surround yourself with.”-Jim Rohn

You may have heard this quote before… and that’s because it’s true! As a business owner, I’ve found great inspiration through the women I surround myself with.

When I went full-time in my business, I immersed myself in great books, podcasts, and a local network of women business owners. That local network, along with many other amazing women I’ve encountered since, inspired the work I do every single day. Serving these incredible women makes me love being a brand and growth strategy coach for women business owners even more.

If you’re looking for a great group of women, I highly recommend The Advance Network. An Open House is happening soon if you’d like to check it out. In transparency and full disclosure, the link shared is my affiliate link and if you join I will receive a commission.

Last week, I left our lunchtime connection call completely inspired as we were encouraged to keep a “feel-good folder”. A place to store our wins, encouragement received through sweet cards, or conversations that cheer us on to reflect on when we’re having those not-so-high mountaintop days.

Finding inspiration through my hobbies and those I surround myself with are my top three. Also on my list are turning on some music, dancing, soaking in a warm bath, exploring new and old places, and taking time to rest and just be.

I’d love to hear what your favorites are for inspiration.

What’s One Thing That Inspires You?

Whether it’s a favorite TV show, a local spot, a great book, a certain person, or something else entirely, I’d love to know! Leave your answer in the comments section below this blog or DM me on Instagram ❤️

What It Really Means to Ignite Your Brand & Build Your Business

Fri, 09 Jul 2021 16:16:09 GMT

What It Really Means to Ignite Your Brand & Build Your Business

Do you ever feel like you’ve checked all the boxes to have a brand that looks good… But you’re still attracting the wrong clients??

You’ve got the pretty website. Pretty colors. Perfect fonts. Check, check, and check.

And yet, something feels disjointed. You are unsure of where to focus your time and energy. You never know what to say in your online marketing.

And looking at your client acquisition patterns…you’re nodding your heading and agreeing.

When you’re in the early to intermediate stages of developing your business, it can feel like you have all the pieces to a 10,000-piece puzzle—but no idea what the final picture is supposed to look like!

You may want more than anything to focus on business-growing activities that feel authentic and move the needle towards growing a profitable and sustainable business…. But you have absolutely no idea:

What those activities are

What order to do them in

Whether they’ll actually get you closer to your goals

You’re on social media. You’re networking, wearing all the hats in your business, doing all the things…

…But you still feel like you’re getting nowhere. You’re not giving up, but you ARE getting tired. Everywhere you look, it seems like someone’s telling you to hustle. That you’ll do the work if you really want to be successful. That this is all part of the entrepreneurship experience.

But deep inside, you can’t help but wonder… Is it really supposed to be this way?!

Believe me… I’ve been there! When I first started my business, I had no idea what I was doing. I had big dreams and the ambition and work ethic to match, but I constantly felt like I was….

Spinning my wheels
Putting my time and energy in the wrong places
Running on empty

I spent tons of money on many shiny objects (new equipment, online courses, and advertising) that I THOUGHT would be my golden ticket.

Advertising that I thought I’d be able to set it and forget it. I wanted to put all my marketing into one basket…

…And I trusted that somehow, the clients would just come pouring in.

I vividly remember the day my sales rep gave me a great piece of advice: Don’t forget that you’ll need to put in the work to fill all of your marketing buckets if you want to grow your business.

I’ll spare you the whole story, but suffice it to say, her words stuck with me. I realized that if I wanted to grow a truly impactful brand, I’d need more than just the visuals.

What Does It Really Mean to Build a Brand?

If you’re like me circa my first few years of business, you probably think ‘branding’ refers to your brand colors, fonts, logos, and all that fun, pretty stuff. If so, you aren’t completely off base. But it’s about SO much more than that, too. For example:

Getting clear on your messaging
Creating content that resonates with your ideal client
Developing your marketing strategy

It took me a long time to realize that these core business pillars were all part of building a great brand. But once I saw the light, that’s when everything began to change in my business.

By focusing on building a solid brand, I was able to:

More intentionally choose where/how I spent my time
Focus my energy on the tasks that truly mattered
Forge a connection with my audience

I started working smarter instead of harder.

I was able to implement repeatable frameworks and systems that helped me slowly take my time (and my sanity!) back into my own hands AND start getting dramatically better results in my business.

Are you ready to do the same?

If you’re ready to grow your business with more intentionality, alignment, and strategy, don’t miss The Roadmap to Ignite Your Brand—my free 5-day experience where you’ll learn the exact systems and strategies that helped me transform my business.

During this 5-day experience, I’ll teach you how to…

Build Your Brand From the Inside Out
Get Clear on Your Messaging
Create Content That Connects
Map Out Your Brand’s Marketing Strategy
Become UNSTOPPABLE!

…By focusing your energy on the business-building tasks that actually matter.

This challenge is open at no cost for any woman who’s serious about growing her business and building a brand in 2021. If you’ve ever…

Worried that you’re spending time and money on the wrong things
Found yourself blindly throwing money at business growth “solutions” that didn’t work
Felt totally overwhelmed by the idea of creating a brand or building a sustainable * brand marketing strategy

This challenge can help you get crystal clear on what you actually need to do to move the needle closer to your goals.

You can view current offerings and upcoming experiences here.

Digital Course Creation Tips You Didn't Know You Needed

Wed, 30 Jun 2021 15:44:41 GMT

Digital Course Creation Tips You Didn’t Know You Needed

One of the first things you learn as an entrepreneur is that there’s only so much of you to go around. Maybe you’ve maxed out your client intake but you still have so much more demand for your services and products.

So how can you keep serving the masses without overwhelming yourself in the process?

Simple.

It all depends on the goals you have for your business.

If your goal is to increase your brand’s impact and serve more people, a digital course is one way to fulfill your mission.

Pros and Cons of Creating and Selling a Digital Course

But how do you know if a digital course is the next best step for your brand?

A good old fashioned pros and cons list can help you decide.

Pro : You can serve a bigger audience without substantially increasing your hours.

Con : Your audience will have questions and need support, so you may find yourself stretched even if the course is on autopilot.

Pro : You can create evergreen courses that run year-round so you always have something to offer new clients, or you can create fresh content on a semi-annual basis so you can leverage those repeat customers.

Con : Evergreen courses are pretty hands-off, but first you have to take the time to create them. They will also need updates and ads to keep them working and selling their best. New courses require frequent launches to drum up interest, and that could take even more of your time and energy.

Pro : Evergreen digital courses are a great source of passive income.

Con : But, if you don’t create new courses for current customers, you could wind up decreasing the lifetime value of your customers.

Recently, I spoke to Special Guest Expert, Sharice Enis of Sharice & CO about the digital course creation tips you didn’t know you needed, and here are some valuable insights from Sharice’s brilliance!

So before you consider creating a digital course, you have to ask yourself:

Do I have the time to invest in creating a course?
Do I have money in my budget to pay for the course platform, monthly maintenance, and marketing?
Am I willing to hire support to manage the customer service?

If you answer yes to all three questions, you might be ready to start the creation process. But first, some more advice from Sharice.

Digital Course Creation: Where do I start? First, write your sales page.

This might surprise you, but you should begin with the marketing.

When you look at your idea from the marketing perspective first , it forces you to think about the strategy so that you create for the people who would buy your digital product while keeping in mind what they actually want.

Yes, you can create a rough outline of your course to give you something to work with, but then hone in on your ideal client’s pain points and what you can solve for them through the medium of a digital course.

With the marketing in place and the sales page written, you will have clear guidelines for writing your course content and pulling out all the angles that make it transformational—as well as marketable and profitable.

Next, shift your mindset.

Think of your project as an “offer” and not as a “digital course”.

Why?

Because when you craft an offer, you’re including what your ideal client needs.

Starting here will help you consider what your customer/ideal client wants.

Ask yourself what they want to accomplish and what transformation your course will provide?

The value of what you’re teaching is in the transformation, and the “offer” (your digital course) is the bridge that the client crosses to get to that transformation.

Then, get a plan in place for customer service.

You may not realize the importance of customer service before you’ve even launched your digital product.

But, inevitably, people will forget their login, something won’t work, others will request a refund… There’s always something that requires a timely response.

The lack of customer service support can impact your brand in a negative way if you haven’t planned for this in advance.

A good impression will bring in referrals, but a bad impression can affect your brand.

You not only want your course to make a transformational impact, but you want to create a great client experience as well.

Finally, create your digital course!

Start with an outline to get the structure of your course in place. And then block off time to record your lessons and iron out the details so that everything is perfect when launch day arrives.

Remember, your course will continue to evolve as you get feedback from customers. You’ll want to record new sections or add additional content.

But don’t let the perfection mindset keep you from creating and launching a solid prototype to your audience.

Want to find out more about digital course creation?

Click here to watch this interview with Sharice! https://www.facebook.com/shawondavis2.0/videos/10225485873360646

5 Things Most Successful Brands Do

Tue, 22 Jun 2021 15:38:43 GMT

5 Things Most Successful Brands Do

(Free LIVE Webinar, Tuesday, July 13th, 1pm EST)

Building a brand can feel overwhelming.

As an entrepreneur, you have many things on your plate, and creating a brand that connects with the vision of your business is probably taking up quite a bit of space on that plate.

You might have a blurry picture in your mind of what it should look like. But it’s scattered and disconnected like 10,000 pieces of a puzzle dumped out on the kitchen table.

The problem is that there are so many necessary pieces. There’s one piece of the puzzle—the visually beautiful part of your brand. But there are also several other pieces of the puzzle to create a brand that is trusted, connected, and aligned.

How does anyone know where to start?

When I started my business nine years ago, I only had the visually beautiful piece in my mind. I thought branding was just choosing the right colors, a fancy logo, and visually pleasing fonts.

And all of those things were and are important—but nobody told me that I needed to get some other key pieces in place first so I wouldn’t waste my time fiddling around with aesthetics that didn’t connect and align.

I remember all too clearly the days of feeling like I was spending my time and my energy in all the wrong places.

I had Google and a little bit of success with my business. But it was a lonely road and I spent plenty of late nights gathering all the pieces by myself with no one to answer my questions. I took course after course without any real guidance, support, or accountability to implement that information.

The only two things I was confident about was my skill behind the camera and I knew that I wanted my clients to feel cared for.

How to build a brand and grow in a sustainable way.

Well, eventually, I realized that I needed to do more than just gather information. I had to put the pieces together so that I could begin to grow in a sustainable way. But, again, I had absolutely NO idea where to start.

More often than not, this is where a lot of business owners get frustrated and spin their wheels. They waste a lot of time feeling unsure about their next step because they don’t have the framework in place that they need to grow confidently.

Personally, I made a lot of mistakes and encountered a lot of roadblocks before I FINALLY realized that growing a successful business has *very* little to do with …

Pretty websites
Fancy logos
Unique fonts
Interesting color palettes
… Or any of that other fun stuff that usually pops into our heads when we think of “branding.”

But that was okay because I learned all the what-not-to-dos in the early stages of my business…

And I finally pieced together the strategies, tools, and frameworks women ACTUALLY need to know if they want to build a brand and business they love.

You Can Do It Too!

You can have a brand that you love that makes an impact, creates a legacy you’re proud of, and strengthens your bottom line.

And you don’t have to stay up late at night squinting at pieces of the puzzle anymore. You can start enjoying your business again because you’ll feel confident and empowered to make choices that are right for you and your goals.

If you’re ready to stop guessing and Googling and start transforming your brand in a way that feels connected and aligned to your mission, come join me for a free live webinar:

5 Things Most Successful Brands Do, Tuesday, July 13th

In this hour-long LIVE webinar, you’ll get the framework you need to:

-Build your brand with clarity

-Attract your ideal client

-Create a thoughtful and intentional brand that goes far beyond colors and logos

You’ll learn where to start to build a brand and grow your business in a sustainable way.

We’re talking about more than logos, fonts, and color palettes here, my friend. This webinar will give you ACTIONABLE strategies for building a confident, connected brand.

Are you ready to do this together?

Click here to register.

4 Ways to Visually Communicate Your Brand

Mon, 07 Jun 2021 15:34:39 GMT

4 Ways to Visually Communicate Your Brand

Have you ever watched the show Curb Appeal on HGTV?

Great Realtors advise their clients to declutter, paint walls, and possibly use a home stager to help sell their homes faster.

Time and money well spent can make the inside look and feel amazing.

However, if the same effort hasn’t been spent on the outside, the home could be sending all of the wrong messages and causing potential buyers to drive right back and not step one foot inside.

Curb Appeal designers helped homeowners uplevel the outside appeal of their homes to make heads turn, cars stop, and buyers ready to sign on the dotted line.

If you’re attracting the wrong clients or no clients at all, it might be the curb appeal.

Well, not the curb appeal exactly, but you might be sending the wrong visual message with a disconnect with your brand colors, your photography, AND your wardrobe.

For whatever reason, you’re attracting the wrong type of client over and over again.

You have a clear idea in your head of what you do, who you help, and how you help them, but visually it doesn’t align or flow.

You’ve communicated your brand in words. It’s right there on your website. Maybe you’ve even brought in a copy-writer to audit your messaging and make sure you’re on the right track.

But the problem might not be in your words or the service you offer.

The problem might be that you’re visually communicating the wrong message.

Your photos, videos, wardrobe, and colors are not in alignment with the heart of your business.

Whether you’re working with your clients 1:1, working with them in person or virtually, group coaching, or posting on social media it’s important to visually communicate your brand thoughtfully and intentionally with your clients and brand in mind.

It might take a little bit of work and a lot of strategy, but you’ll soon be attracting the clients you’ve been waiting for all along.

Why your visual representation matters.

Building a consistent brand that stands out online requires a plan.

Think about it. If you’re communicating your brand through the type of pictures you post, the colors you wear, and the way you show up in your videos, you’re going to have a consistent brand and increase your brand awareness much more effectively.

The second your audience sees you (your face), or potentially your brand colors in a live video or a graphic, they’ll stop their scroll and pay attention because of the familiarity.

But be careful about the colors you choose and the images you post; if you aren’t communicating your brand in the right way, you’re definitely communicating another message.

People are drawn to things that are visually pleasing, and they associate certain characteristics with colors, speech, and clothing. This is great news for you if you learn how to leverage it to elevate your brand.

Where to start: Brand words.

Always start with your few brand words to guide you as you hone in on the emotions you want your brand to elicit for your audience. How do you want your brand to feel and be experienced?

Examples of these words could be classic, timeless, joyful, growth, empowered, feminine, sophisticated.

Your brand words will guide you to communicate the look and feel of your brand visually.

Content strategy should always begin with your ideal clients in mind.

Think about who they are, what type of business they own, or life they live. What are their pain points and what kind of help they are looking to invest in?

4 Ways to Visually Communicate Your Brand

1. Colors

Picking colors is a lot of fun, but don’t let your creativity run away with you. Colors have meaning , so make sure the colors you choose align with your brand words.

*(these color definitions are from a page of Where Women Create Magazine��

Red – ambition, determination, assertiveness, confidence, power. Red tells the world you’re courageous, driven and you take action.

Yellow – originality, intellect, happiness, fun Yellow tells the world you’re wise, confident and optimistic.

Purple – Compassion, wealth, luxury, spirituality. Purple tells the world you’re regal, set apart, and you demand respect.

Blue – trust, perseverance, caring, integrity, responsibility, authority. Blue tells the world you’re idealistic, orderly, and a peacemaker.

Once you choose your colors, there’s no limit to what you can do with them.

You can wear them. Use them in your website design and logo. You can also highlight them in your Pinterest graphics, Instagram highlight story covers, and product packaging.

Some brands are known for their brand color—think Tiffany’s little blue box.

The important thing is not to overthink it.

Do your research; but if you can’t decide, go with a neutral and choose one other color.

Consider working with a graphic designer.

It’s always a good idea to have a second set of eyes when you start to go color-blind in the research process.

2. Photos

The saying “A picture is worth a thousand words” is so true.

Telling your brand story through thoughtful, high-quality, authentic photographs can help you connect with your audience and attract your ideal clients more quickly.

That’s why you should absolutely inject your brand’s story and messaging into your next photo session and hire a brand photographer to capture all the magic.

Brand photos can be an extremely powerful way to elevate and solidify your brand.

The right photos will immediately connect with your ideal client and repel everyone else.

Do you work with high-level executives? Then a high-end, professional photoshoot is in order.

Is your brand polished, sophisticated, and classic? Is it relaxed and chic? Whatever the feel of your brand is, you want photos that represent that so your dream clients are attracted to you.

Take them on a journey. Show them how they’ll feel when they work with you. Use your photos to fully represent your brand message so your ideal clients know you care for them.

Consider how your photos fit into your brand’s big-picture . Just because a picture is flattering or fun, that doesn’t necessarily mean it should be part of your content. Ask yourself whether someone who saw JUST this image would get an accurate idea of the brand you’re creating. If the answer is no, it may be wise to choose a different photo.

Don’t forget about the photos you choose for your website. You want to make sure that your ideal client can see themselves in your photos too.

And then, think about the relationship between your images and your messaging. Make sure they are compatible. Whether you are preparing social media content, updating your website, creating blogs or launching a new course, your brand photos should reflect the precise message you’re trying to communicate.

Ideally, the tone you use in your captions and across your website should work cohesively with your brand photos. Great copy is the icing on the cake for your brand representation.

It’s all about the strategy!

3. Videos

Social media is a fantastic way to connect with your audience on a deeper, more human level—which makes them far more likely to buy from you in the long run. And right now, using video content on social media is the BEST way to nurture your audience.

A few notes for posting videos online…

Stay in line with your brand strategy wherever you show up.
Make sure you have high-quality videos and reliable internet to remove any distractions from your message.
Be on time and try not to cancel when you say you’re going to be there. Being on time goes a long way for proving your trustworthiness.
And have fun! If you’re uncomfortable, your audience will be too. But don’t worry. If you keep showing up again and again, it will get easier, and you’ll start to feel more relaxed in front of the camera.

4. Wardrobe

You represent your brand and, yes, your wardrobe matters. Be thoughtful and intentional about how you show up both off and online.

Check out this blog post from my conversation with the Style Sherpa.

Go back to brand words and keep your ideal client in mind. In my opinion, you should select outfits for both brand photos and your everyday wardrobe that display your brand professionally and casually. Sure, you might be known for wearing JCrew Blazers, but give yourself some space to share a casual, down to earth, relatable side of your brand as well.

Remember to be YOU. Your ideal clients will be drawn to your personality and authenticity.

Whenever I style clients for brand photoshoots, I always say to start in your closet first and choose colors that you love. If your brand color isn’t the best on you, consider a complementary color. If you need something new, let’s head out to your pillar store(s). Your pillar store is the one that you can always count on for your perfect fit and style.

What does your visual brand say about your business?

When it comes to standing out, building your brand’s consistency, and increasing your brand’s awareness, the way you visually communicate your brand is essential to attracting your ideal clients.

But we can’t always see the forest for the trees. If you need a fresh, expert perspective to find out what your brand is communicating visually, you can schedule a Brand Audit with me!

A brand audit is a review of your social media platforms, website, visual online presence, messaging and marketing and collateral evaluation—essentially, it’s a complete audit of your brand’s important frameworks.

Click here to schedule your audit today!

Work, Life, Hustle, Balance - How to Really Do it All: Part 2

Tue, 01 Jun 2021 15:27:45 GMT

Work, Life, Hustle, Balance – How to Really Do it All: Part 2

We are diving into part two of Work, Life, Hustle, Balance – How to really do it all as women business owners and entrepreneurs.

Win at Work and Succeed at Life

Recently, I took a mini-vacation to Maine. On the way home, I was listening to the Read to Lead Podcast where Meghan Hyatt Miller was sharing about her most recent book, Win at Work and Succeed at Life written with her dad, Michael Hyatt.

I was introduced to Michael Hyatt at the beginning of my business owner journey and learned about setting S.M.A.R.T. goal s, and I knew that this new book was a must read.

It proved to be timely because I had been feeling the tug—not balanced, needing to get back into alignment.

I had an Audible credit waiting for me, so I immediately downloaded the book, finished it in about 3 days, and started to tell my friends to read it!

For the business owner who loves her business but has struggled with balancing life and work and wants to spend more time living life, this book is pivotal.

The authors provide insights and relatable stories and help you to figure out how to apply the principles shared so that you can Win at Work and Succeed at Life .

In the book, they share 5 Principles of the Double Win. Here are those principles along with some of my thoughts and takeaways:

1.“Work is only one of many ways to orient your life. You want all of the domains of your life to thrive together. Work can push out the other domains fast.” *quoted from book

If you’re anything like me, you also want to be able to cultivate all of the areas of your life and not only your business. It’s easy to allow our hustle, and our work to take over.

When I’m 85, I want to be able to look back at my life and feel that I lived a full life that was meaningful and focused on the things that mattered the most. For me, that’s more than the work that I love and that I get to do.

2. “Put constraints in place to foster productivity and creativity.” *quoted from book.

Boundaries are a good thing to have in place. They are not roadblocks and shouldn’t be viewed as negative. A simple example of how to set a boundary is to ask yourself, “What time am I starting and ending my workday?” It’s a simple question, but it frees you up to close your laptop and walk away from your desk when the workday has a definite ending. A schedule will allow you to be more productive and creative. Check out my blog post on Productivity Hacks to help you get more done.

3. “Work/Life Balance is possible” *quoted from book

Raise your hand, if you feel like you’re always juggling all the things? Don’t worry, I’ve got my raised hand too! One thing that stood out to me in the book is that work/life balance is not about perfection. It will never be perfect. I do believe that as business owners we will have seasons that call for longer hours, but those seasons shouldn’t last forever. Life experiences, along with insights provided through each of the 5 Principles of the Double Win, I do believe that a more intentional and thoughtful approach will allow us to thrive and have the balance that feels right.

4. The power in Non-Achievement

This principle made me think through my hobbies and things that I like to do simply for fun. Has anyone ever asked you what you do for fun, and it takes you 5 minutes or more to respond? We love our work so much at times that it becomes our favorite thing to do. I love flowers and gardening. I love my hands in the dirt, designing, figuring out what will work together. There’s no big achievement involved. I do it only for the joy of the work and the beauty of flowers that I get to enjoy. And that is so fulfilling.

5. Rest

It’s not always easy to carve out self-care time, but if we want to meet our goals, it’s essential that we get enough rest and take time to recharge between busy weeks.

Sure, I can show up to 20 networking events a month, build a great business, work with 500 clients, say yes to every speaking opportunity, but what about the other areas of my life?

I value myself (health, spiritual, mental health), my family, my faith, my friends, and my business. That’s why I want to make space for everything that I value. Work can’t have 95%. It just can’t.

Alex Soojung-Kim Pang said in the book Rest, “We need to rethink the relationship between work and rest…We shouldn’t regard rest as a mere physical necessity to be satisfied grudgingly; we should see it as an opportunity.”

For entrepreneurs, that’s a hard but necessary mindset shift.

My Review of Win at Work and Succeed at Life by Michael Hyatt and Meghan Hyatt Miller

This book is a must-read for any business owner who feels torn, tugged in different directions but wants to feel aligned and have a fulfilling personal life alongside a successful business.

Since reading this book, I have been more intentional about the five principles. I’ve spent a few weekends doing my favorite hobby; I’ve put some constraints in place to end my workday; I feel more balanced, and I’ve definitely said no to hustle. I think I’d call it balanced hustle. I don’t hustle every hour of the day, just during my hours set aside for work.

Each of these principles working together will help you win at work and succeed at life.

Here’s to thriving!

Check out part one here: Work, Life, Hustle, Balance – How to Really Do it All: Part 1

Warmly,

Shawon

Work, Life, Hustle, Balance - How to Really Do it All:Part 1

Thu, 27 May 2021 15:22:29 GMT

Work, Life, Hustle, Balance – How to Really Do it All: Part 1

I knew that it was well past her bedtime so when the phone rang I answered.

Hi Grandma��

She was calling me because she hadn’t talked to me in a while. She wanted to know how I was doing.

I told her that I was doing “fine” and filled her in on my busy wedding season.

In fact, the night she called, I was at the studio editing photos and preparing a blog post.

She was happy to hear that I was doing “fine” and that my business was great.

Then she asked me.

Well, what do you do for fun? (insert southern Grandma voice)

I paused.

That conversation with Grandma never left me.

The word hustle hangs beautifully inside a gold frame and written in the prettiest calligraphy in my office. It has for a few years now.

I believe in hustle and hard work.

But… I also want to be able to cultivate everything in my life that is important to me.

There’s no question that business owners love their business and what they get to do. We choose to be self-employed because we know entrepreneurship offers the enormous potential to live a life that we love, 100%.

But what happens sometimes is that we value our business so much that we spend 95% of our time doing our business and 5% of our time doing the other things that we love.

And even if we don’t feel like we’re working (because we love what we do), it can still lead to:

Seasons of forgetting about self-care
No space for creativity
Burnout
A tug-of-war feeling between life and work

At least it has for me.

Raise your hand if you’ve ever struggled with balancing/juggling all the things that pertain to life and work.

If you’re wondering, I have my hand raised too.

I recently shared with a friend, that I’ve felt as though I’ve been in hustle mode for a year now as I decided to bring brand strategy and growth coaching for women entrepreneurs to the forefront of my business.

I’m still a work in progress, but I’ve figured out some ways to take care of my health, spiritual health, and mental health while running my business.

One of those ways is definitely listening to my body. It will let me know immediately when it’s time to pump the breaks and take a pause.

The problem is when I choose not to listen.

Choose a day to relax each week to turn off business. I know it’s hard, but it’s necessary. Start with a half-day.

My faith, my family, a small circle of real-life friends who help keep me grounded, some great Internet friends who always have great advice to share, and then there are my Powersheets. If you’ve been following me for a while, you know I’m a huge fan.

How to balance work and life.

Okay, I love to use my Powersheets Planner to take some time to pause and reflect at the end of the month (month in review) to check in on what’s important for my business and life. I also set my goals and plan for the month ahead.

And I also love the intentional questions that I am asked:

What are you saying no to?
What are you saying yes to?

At the end of April, my response was, “I’m saying no to hustle and overextending myself, and I’m saying yes to more balance in my work and life. I need/want to feel more aligned.”

Writing it down is just a way of making your goals move from brain to paper to real-life action.

For the month of May, I was focused and intentional about attaining a healthy work/life balance that felt right for me.

You won’t get very far in business, in a healthy, sustainable way, if you don’t learn how to prepare for the month ahead and how to reflect on the month behind. That’s the only way you can make adjustments that align with what matters most to you.

Lastly, going back to Grandma, don’t forget to plug in some time to have fun. Figure out what you enjoy doing, and do it. This past month I had a girl’s day with a friend getting pedicures and manicures, and planting new flowers in my garden.

At the end of the day, you get to choose what’s best.

I encourage you to find the balance for your work and life that feels right for you.

Part two of this blog is coming soon! In the meantime, I’d love to hear from you.

Comment below and share one way that you balance work and life.

Lets Talk Social Media: How to Work Smarter Not Harder

Tue, 11 May 2021 15:05:19 GMT

Let’s Talk Social Media: How to Work Smarter Not Harder

For some business owners, the idea of going online is exhilarating. The potential to build your brand online is huge if only you can get in front of the right people to earn that know, like, and trust factor.

But even the exhilarated business owners hit a roadblock when it comes to posting engaging content consistently.

Why? Because social media can be overwhelming! But it doesn’t have to be.

If you’ve been trying to please everybody, I have some tips to help you save time, stay focused, show up in all the right places, and most importantly how to work smarter and not harder.

Whichever method you choose, just know that with social media, authenticity wins every time. Faster is not always best. The key is simply to be consistent, help your ideal clients solve their problem, and engage authentically so they know that behind that perfect profile pic, there’s a real human with real solutions.

Free Project Management Tools for Social Media

When you’re an entrepreneur, anywhere you can save money and time is a huge win, and social media project management is no exception. You don’t have to spend anything to get organized and show up.

The great thing is, many free project management tools will grow with you as you build your brand to include team members. I’ve used each of them as my brand has evolved over the years.

A simple and easy universal tool is Google Docs . The great thing about using Google docs is that you have the ability to share and edit documents effortlessly. And, the organization possibilities are limitless. You can create a new team folder with a simple system for keeping track of when to post what. Or, you can keep simplify further and have one shared Google Doc with a header for each day of the week and the single piece of content you’re sharing.
Trello . This is a great project management tool to keep everything in one place and is designed for team use or one-person use. The platform allows you to use boards (kind of like a bulletin board) and create cards for each of your content categories. Under each content card, you can write a post or caption that you’ll be sharing for the week. Again, there are so many possibilities here but don’t get overwhelmed by the system. Just keep it simple, and make it work for you.

(Tip: When you’re posting on some platforms, like Instagram, it’s more effective if you post in real-time rather than auto-posting your content. Remember, to get engagement, you have to engage as well, so be sure to take the time to post and comment. Trello makes it easy for you to copy and paste from your desktop onto the platform that you’re using, or you can download the Trello app for your phone and copy and paste it into the social media platform.)

Yes, you can schedule your content in advance, but make sure you’re on the platform when it’s scheduled to post.

My new favorite project management tool is Asana . It allows you to:

create a project for your entire social media content calendar for the year
create one template that you can duplicate to organize your content by week or month
have all of your content in one place
assign tasks to team members

Catch my full Asana tutorial here .

Best Tools for Scheduling Social Media Posts

But, Shawon, you just said I should post in real-time, didn’t you?

I did. But as I mentioned above you can schedule your posts ahead of time, but remember to be present on the app for the time that you’ve scheduled.

Writing content and scheduling posts in advance is helpful:

When you need to maintain your online presence without spreading yourself too thin
When you need to take a mental health break from showing up without ghosting your audience

Now, if you’re trying to show up everywhere for everyone, my advice is to narrow down your audience and show up where they’re hanging out, unless you have a system, a team or the bandwidth to be in multiple places.

Social media scheduling tools are making it easier to have a presence on more than one platform.

Plannthat is an excellent tool for scheduling. You can plan your content in advance, save drafts, schedule automatic posting, and you can post content to Facebook, Instagram and LinkedIn with the option to format your content for that platform.

Planoly is another good scheduling tool that I’ve used.

A Word of Advice

Just remember above all else, show up where your audience is hanging out, share content that solves their problems, and authenticity & consistency wins every time.

For more business ideas and practical advice to build your brand, join us inside Ignite Your Brand, my free exclusive Facebook community for women entrepreneurs. Link: https://www.facebook.com/groups/581973525727990

Why Building Your Brand is Important

Wed, 05 May 2021 14:58:37 GMT

Why Building Your Brand is Important

For weeks, I tuned in to Undercover Billionaire . It’s a show where an already successful billionaire business owner/entrepreneur volunteers to go undercover in an unfamiliar U.S. city with only $100, a cell phone, and an old truck.

They have 90 days to build a business with a million-dollar valuation, and if they fail by even one penny, they have to invest one million dollars of their own money into that business.

They have no reputation to build on. They’re starting from scratch—no contacts, no name, and a new identity.

In Season 2, we meet Monique Idlett-Mosley (founder of Reign Venture Capital) and see her brilliantly build a brand new health and wellness business in Tacoma, WA.

The thing that stands out to me most is Monique’s understanding of the importance of building a brand.

Even though she’s starting from nothing, she builds a trusted brand with a mission that invites the community to be a part of it.

How does she do that in 90 days?

She consistently shares her mission with every potential investor and contact
She makes sure that each element of the brand is connected and built with intention, strategy, and purpose. That means client experience, brand story, values, visual brand identity, marketing—all of these clearly restate her mission.

Why is it so important to build your brand as an entrepreneur?

Just like Monique, you may be starting your business from scratch or you might be in your 5th year of business and you’re ready to elevate your brand to stand out in your market and make a greater impact.

You might be familiar with this timeless and true quote: “People do business with and refer business to people they know, like, and trust.” – Bob Burg

The goal isn’t just to have a visually beautiful brand. You want to build a brand that is trusted, connected, and aligned. For Monique, that meant tying every aspect of the client experience to a mission that invited the community to be a part of it. Her investors shared her vision that the community of Tacoma, WA needed health and wellness, and they trusted Monique’s expertise to deliver on that vision.

How will people KNOW your brand?

It’s going to take more than your logo. Personal connection, whether it be through video, in photos, or in person, is key. If you want to grow your business, you’ve got to show up to build your brand.

Here are some ways you can connect with your audience to make your brand known:

Connect with them through conversation
Share transformation testimonials
Create a brand experience that precedes you
Showcase your personality
Share your brand values and mission
Take your audience behind the scenes to experience your brand
Don’t let it stop online… Get out and network
Use a brand photographer so that you can share cohesive photos that represent you and your mission

How will people LIKE your brand?

When you share your brand’s mission in the form of a brand story that positions the client as the hero, you create likeability. Your ideal client will be able to see themselves in the story and they will want to be a part of it.

How will people TRUST your brand?

You have to set yourself up as the expert by knowing your ideal clients inside and out. Get to know them so well that you can anticipate their problems before they’ve even said them out loud. When you can articulate how your product or service solves those problems, you’ll earn their trust.

You can do this by:

Sharing content that serves and adds value ( check out this plan I created to help you go live on social media)
Showing your face through fresh photos of yourself
Trusting in your products and services to solve your client’s problems and transform their lives
Asking questions and responding
Collaborating with other respected, complimentary brands that will add value to your community (think guest blogs, podcast interviews, IG live interviews, etc.)
Delivering a repeatable client experience

When you serve your clients well, they will refer you to others for the problem you solve, the transformation you provide, and the experience you deliver. That’s how trust works in a business.

What is the value of building a brand?

When all of the elements of your brand are aligned and connected, you solve your ideal client’s problems and deliver a repeatable experience, your brand reputation should precede you.

The benefits of building a trusted brand?

You will attract your dream clients.
Your business will grow.
Your business will be referred.
Your business will be top of mind.

Ready to transform your brand? Book a free 30-minute strategy call here! (I have a few slots available next week). We can take a look at where you are now, where you want to be, and three actions you can take to start moving toward your mission.

How to Stand Out on Instagram

Tue, 27 Apr 2021 14:51:37 GMT

How to Stand Out on Instagram

Recently on the Ignite Your Brand Show, we were joined by my friend, and special guest expert, Sam Masisin, to share with us exactly how to stand out on Instagram and stop the scroll. If you missed it, you’re in luck because Sam is sharing more with us today here on the blog.

3 Benefits of Using Branded Templates on Instagram by Sam Masisin aka Awesamgram

Back in the early days of Instagram, you could grow an audience simply by posting cute selfies. Not any more. The competition is tenfold. The attention span per viewer is limited (just 3 seconds!). It’s more important than ever to stand out, and claim what makes you different. You can achieve this with the help of branded templates.

What is a branded template?

A branded template is simply a design that consists of your brand’s colors, font, and some graphic elements that when used together create your brand’s “look”. This template’s contents (text and photo) can be edited several times without really changing the integrity of the design which creates cohesiveness between all the different types of posts you make with it.

For those of you who are familiar with the graphic design tool Canva, you know how easy it is to edit one of their pre-made templates. However, if you want to stand out on Instagram, you can’t use templates every Canva user has access to. You have to create one unique to your brand, and here’s why:

1. Branded Templates Create Brand Recognition

When someone is scrolling through their feed, you want them to immediately recognize your posts. That increases the likelihood of them clicking over and engaging with your post. After all, you’re not making content for them to scroll past it.

The more your followers recognize your posts in their feed, the more you stay top of mind as the go-to expert in your niche. Your potential clients typically need 7 touchpoints before they buy from you, but if they keep missing your posts, they’ll never get those touchpoints.

2. Branded Templates Positions You as an Authority

When brands want to position themselves as the go-to expert, they hire a designer for their brand identity so they can put their logo on their stationery and business cards. Well in 2021, your Instagram is your business card now.

Having a well-designed page is critical if you want people to have a good first impression of you. If your page is full of selfies and quotes that you shared from someone else’s account, it makes you look like an amateur. If you sell high-ticket services, your page needs to look professional otherwise there will be a disconnect between what you look like and what you charge. If those two things don’t align, it creates mistrust in your potential buyer.

3. Branded Templates Set You Apart From Competition

What makes you different from the hundreds of other coaches or service providers in your space? It’s one thing to say it in your bio, but it’s a whole other level to show it on your profile page.

When you use branded templates, each of your individual posts come together to paint a picture of what it’s like to work with you, and what your brand personality is like. For example, doctors typically use blue in their branding to represent calm and professionalism. If you want to be different and let people know you’re a cool, fun doctor, you can use purple.

People want to work with people they like. Use branded templates to show your personality and attract the ideal clients who would love to work with you for you.

Are you convinced? Want to create your own branded template?

Here are the 3 elements you need on your template:

Your Brand Colors – Alternate them as your background colors or text colors.
Your logo (if applicable) – Pop this onto one of the corner ends of your template for quick brand recognition. If your logo text is illegible when small, just use the icon of your logo. You can also use your website or Instagram handle instead.
1-2 Visual Elements – This could be a certain border design, a talk bubble or icon-related niche-related (a carrot if you are a nutritionist). You can also use a pattern. The idea is that the element makes sense for your business, and you use these elements consistently on all your posts.

Your brand is more than just visuals. The way you show up, connect, and communicate matters too.

For more resources, visibility strategies, and behind-the-scenes insights for women business owners, visit my YouTube channel here .

Treat Yourself Like a CEO

Mon, 26 Apr 2021 10:58:44 GMT

Treat Yourself Like a CEO

Work ON your business, not just IN it.

Imagine you own a flowershop.

You are a whiz at arranging flowers, ordering just the right amount of exotic vs. domestic plants for every occasion, and even growing a prize-winning selection of hybrid flowers that can’t be found anywhere else.

You’re so busy with your customers and your garden and managing the inventory that you forget all about keeping the storefront up to date. Pretty soon, the windows are looking cloudy. The display tells your customers that it’s still Valentine’s Day, in the middle of June. Two lights are out in your welcome sign; instead of FLOWERS, it looks like you sell LOWER.

Now, stay with me… You are the flowershop owner.

You’ve been working “in” your business – keeping customers happy, doing all the tasks that produce a return on investment.

But you haven’t been working “on” your business – stepping back to look at your storefront, planning for the next quarter, keeping the windows clean so your goal is always in plain sight, making sure your message is still as clear and strong and applicable as it was on Day 1.

Stepping into a CEO Mindset

One thing about entrepreneurs is that we typically start the year out strong. We have our goals ready to go and our planners filled in, but then we don’t take the necessary time to:

review our progress
celebrate the big and small wins
chart the course for what’s next

The result is that:

we lose focus
we lose steam
we don’t hit our goals because we’re too busy working in them

But that’s all going to change because I’m going to give you my best tip to help you step into your role as a CEO, whether you’re a one-woman-show or leader of a team.

Quarterly Business Retreats

Thinking like a CEO means leading your team with a vision for your brand and planning for what’s next.

Even if you don’t feel like you’ve reached that level just yet, step into that mindset.

As the CEO of your business, one thing to start doing now is carving out time to work on your business and not only in your business

A few years ago, I decided to implement quarterly business retreats . (I don’t have a team yet, but I’m planning for the one that I will have some time in the future.)

This is a time that I literally get away to:

Review
Celebrate
Plan Ahead
and a big one…REST.

The last thing on the list is a hard one for me. My mind is always going. I’m the type of person who feels like they should always be doing something. But rest is essential and it recharges you.

Ideally, you want to review your business at the end of each month – seeing what’s working and what’s not working. See my productivity tips here .

But the quarterly retreat is different because it allows you to get away from your business to take an even broader perspective of where you’ve been and where you’re going.

Because so many entrepreneurs are working from home, it’s important to actually get out of your “work space” where you might be tempted to jump back into work or take care of things around the house. A neutral space like a bed and breakfast, if it’s a practical option, is a great way to leave the work behind and stick to your agenda.

Recap of My Most Recent Quarterly Retreat

There’s no perfect schedule for a quarterly retreat as long as you implement all of the elements I mentioned above. But just to give you an idea of what mine typically looks like, here’s a breakdown of my most recent:

Day One:

Reviewed my goals that I wanted to accomplish in Q1. Powersheets Planner was extremely helpful in staying focused doing my review with thoughtful questions. Reviewed areas that were challenging, what to work on, and celebrated my progress.

Tools that I used: Powersheets Planner

Vision – spent some time envisioning the quarter ahead. I turned on a soothing instrumental playlist and created a vision board on Pinterest . This was my first time doing this with Pinterest, and it was so fun!

Next 90 Days – If you’ve read my goal-setting blog here , then you know I strongly believe in 90-day strategic plans of action.

Created a 90 Day Action List - All of the small actions that I need to take to help me reach the 90-day goals.

Day Two

*By the end of day one, I was battling a headache, so a lot of rest happened on Day Two

Calendar – Setting up my calendar with important dates for upcoming webinars, workshops, and masterminds. This is also a time where I make adjustments based on birthdays, family plans, and prior commitments that I’ve said yes to. Great to visually see, so I feel aligned with my business and my life. Not overextending myself. I know how many one to one clients I can take on, and if I have the bandwidth to say yes to anything else.

Content Planning

Brainstormed ideas for content for the month ahead. I would typically do some blog writing.

Be the CEO of Your Flowershop

As entrepreneurs, we have to set aside time to work on our businesses. It’s so important! We are the leaders, the CEOs of our businesses. In order to create a profitable and sustainable business, we have to be intentional.

Don’t forget that the time you spend reviewing, celebrating, and planning ahead is just as important as the time you spend in the details of doing your business. It’s the equivalent of grabbing your lawn chair to take a full view of your storefront from the other side of the street.

If you want to develop yourself as the CEO and transform your business, comment below or send me an email to shawon@shawondavis.com for a free copy of Business Made Simple.

Elevate Your Brand with Conscious Dressing-The Style Sherpa Gaelen Abt

Wed, 07 Apr 2021 10:51:38 GMT

Elevate Your Brand, With The Style Sherpa Gaelen Abt

Taking the Guesswork Out of Your Wardrobe, With The Style Sherpa Gaelen Abt

Most women entrepreneurs understand the power of a great wardrobe. But showing up with the right balance of authenticity, professionalism, and personality? Choosing clothes that accurately reflect our brand while still feeling authentic to our personal sense of style? That’s not always easy!

Luckily, I recently had the pleasure of speaking with The Style Sherpa, Gaelen Abt—a style expert who helps women take the guesswork out of creating a wardrobe they love with conscious dressing.

Today, I want to share just a snippet of our conversation with you. Keep reading to check out one of my favorite moments in our conversation!

A Conversation With The Style Sherpa, Elevate Your Brand With Conscious Dressing

Question : Lately, it seems like everyone has become jaded by ZOOM calls and may not be paying as much attention to how we’re showing up and representing our brands. Can you talk about the importance of showing up, and how our inward emotions can impact our outward appearance? And the role that our wardrobe plays in all of that?

Gaelen : 1,000,000% for sure! I started my journey with this in mind – that when we’re truly at ease with ourselves, people respond accordingly. So if we put on a ‘uniform’ for our brand people are going to feel something. They may not be in touch with it or understand it, but they’re going to feel a disconnect.

We’ve probably all met a few different people who do the same types of work. They all have the same type of business—but you’re probably drawn to one of them more than you are the others. And I’ll guarantee you, it’s because that person is representing themselves and showing up more authentically true to themselves.

You can be true to yourself, yet still, be professional. I always say, dress to please yourself first—but then make it appropriate to where you’re going, who you’re going to be, and with what you’re doing.

For example, I need sparkle today. But for this conversation, I didn’t need to look like I was going out—so I made it a little more business-appropriate, yet still bringing my personality into it. I didn’t just put on a stuffy blazer, like something from my corporate days. I’ve updated my corporate jackets to something more fun, something that represents me—and people are drawn to that. It really, really, really makes a difference.

If you’re a woman business owner who wants to strengthen your visibility, confidence, and brand presence, I’d love for you to explore my current workshops and events.

Click here to view upcoming workshops and experiences.

Ask Me Anything | Ignite Your Brand Show

Mon, 05 Apr 2021 10:46:01 GMT

Ask Me Anything | Ignite Your Brand Show

We did something a little different this week on the Ignite Your Brand weekly live show , and I think it’s here to stay.

We had a live Q&A, or ask me anything about branding and marketing strategy.

Today, I’m sharing a question that I get often and was excited to answer on the show.

Question : I’m just starting out with my business and branding. Where do I start?

Answer …

Dear New Business Owner,

Many entrepreneurs and small business owners are doing this one thing all wrong and I when I first started my business, I was in the same boat. They are focused on creating a website and a new logo, choosing fonts and colors instead of the one thing that can actually start making an impact in their business.

Unfortunately, this means that most people are wasting time and money on the wrong things. Don’t get me wrong, those things are important, but when you

When you’re first starting out, focus on these things first to get your brand messaging clear.

Clarity on who you are serving and what they want.
What problem are you solving for them?
What is the solution that you offer?

I know the feeling of wanting to skip to “the fun part” of choosing a website and the font and our fancy logo.

Having this foundation at the beginning makes everything so much easier as you take steps towards growing your brand and your business.

When you know who you’re serving, you can show up online and talk to that person over and over. You’ll never run out of things to say to them because you know who they are and what they want. You can show them how you can be their guide in the product or service that you offer in order to make them the hero.

Take it from me, start here. I’m a huge fan of Donald Miller’s Storybrand, and I wish I would have had this framework when I first started my business. I had the puzzle pieces of building my business and brand, but I didn’t know how to connect them and apply them both visually and in my messaging. Most importantly, I didn’t know where to start.

Starting here would have saved me time, money and frustration.

You’ve got this!

Warmly,

Shawon

PS… If you are feeling stuck with your branding or you don’t know where to start, I’d love to chat with you. We can talk about where you are, where you’d like to go in your business and create three action steps that you can take now. Click here to book a call.

5 Productivity Hacks to Get More Done

Tue, 30 Mar 2021 01:40:16 GMT

5 Productivity Hacks to Get More Done

Get More Done With These 5 Productivity Hacks

Have you ever wished you had an extra hour (or five) in your day?

As entrepreneurs, it can feel like there’s never enough time. We always seem to be rushing from one task to the next, trying to meet a deadline, juggling work life with family life…

Unfortunately, there’s no way to add more time to the clock… But what if you could use your time more effectively by getting more done, more quickly, and more ease?

In my own business, I’ve been able to develop a handful of systems and processes that help me make the most of my time. The productivity hacks I’m about to share have been absolute game-changers for me—so if you’re looking for a way to ‘get more bang for your buck’ when it comes to maximizing your time, these are the 5 tips I’d recommend implementing first.

5 Productivity Hacks to Get More Done

Tip #1: A Great Day Starts With Setting a Great Tone

How do you start your day? Your morning routine can have a huge impact on how the rest of the day unfolds.

When you begin your morning in a rush or feeling stressed, those feelings can easily carry over into the rest of your day. And likewise, when you own your morning and set the right tone, it’s easier to feel in control of your day.

To create the right energy in your day, try expanding your morning routine to include an activity like journaling, prayer, meditation, or even just taking time to write down a few things you feel grateful for. You could also try introducing some physical movement into your morning plan.

There’s no one ‘right way’ to set your day up for success, so try a few different morning habits on for size and see what leaves you feeling your best.

Tip #2: Take Care of Your Most Important Task First

Raise your hand if you’ve ever opened up your email inbox first thing in the morning! I think we’ve all been there… But really, that’s rarely the best place to start.

When deciding on your most important task, it’s important to ask yourself what your big goals are for the month. Break those goals down into actionable steps and spend the first two hours of every single day working through these business-building tasks.

Tip #3: Assign Specific Tasks to Specific Days of the Week

I LOVE this hack! As business owners, we usually feel like we’re juggling a hundred different things. From operations, to serving our clients, to creating content, to marketing, networking, consultations, revenue generation, elevating our client experience…. And the list goes on!

It’s easy to feel like we’re constantly chipping away at tasks but never really making serious progress. To avoid that feeling, I recommend assigning certain days of the week for specific tasks.

Not sure where to start? Begin by writing down everything you need to do in a week to move the needle forward in your business. Then, assign each category of tasks to a specific day and start time-blocking your tasks. It’ll come together more easily than you think!

Tip #4: Batch Work

Did you know we can lose a significant amount of time and energy each day to task-switching? When it comes to dealing with repeating/recurring tasks, it’s better to batch projects together so you can stay focused, pour all your energy into one thing, and do your best work.

Great tasks to batch work include things like:

Filming videos
Writing blog posts
Recording podcasts
Creating Pinterest pins
Planning social media content

When we group these tasks together, we get them off our plate and free up our mental space for bigger, more CEO-level strategy work.

Tip #5: Review Your Processes

At the end of each month, it’s important to set aside time to review what’s working in your business… And what isn’t. Plan a block of 2-4 hours where you can look back at your processes and decide what’s serving you, and what could be improved.

In your review, ask yourself: Did you leave enough time and energy for the activities you really need to do to grow your business? Are you being intentional with the habits and frameworks you use to plan your days?

Schedule this review day on your calendar ahead of time so you can make sure to carve out enough time to celebrate your wins and strategize in the areas that need some work.

Bonus Tip: Take care of yourself!

The phrase ‘self-care’ gets thrown around a lot, but when it comes to boosting your productivity, taking care of yourself is one of the most important things you can do.

It’s not always easy to carve out self-care time, but if we want to meet our goals, it’s essential that we get enough rest and take time to recharge between busy weeks. The first step to growing a profitable and sustainable business is making sure you’re able to consistently show up and do your best work… And that means making self-care a priority, always.

Looking For More Productivity & Business Strategy Tips?

Watch and subscribe to my Youtube channel for more.

How to Stop the Scroll & Clarify Your Brand

Sun, 28 Mar 2021 01:33:56 GMT

How to Stop the Scroll & Clarify Your Brand

Whether we like it or not, social media is hugely influential in our lives and our businesses. Every single day, we let our social media feeds tell us…

What we should be posting about
What we should be doing in our business
How we should look
How we should measure our brand’s success

But can I let you in on a secret?

You’ll never build your brand by scrolling through your social media feed.

What It Really Takes to Build a Recognizable, Successful Brand

When it comes to creating a brand that’s actually successful—not just flashy or popular on the ‘Gram—the key is creating something that stands out. You shouldn’t be aiming to look, talk, act, or be exactly like everyone else in your industry!

So how can you create a brand that stands out from the crowd, both online and in the real world?

It’s all about clarifying your brand, showing up authentically, and building a strong foundation. In this blog, I’m going to show you how to do exactly that—and no, it has absolutely nothing to do with finding ‘inspiration’ on your favorite social platform.

The Stages of Clarifying Your Brand

‘Clarify your brand’ might feel like a vague instruction. After all—if all our brands should be unique, shouldn’t the clarification process be unique too?

Somewhat. However, there’s absolutely a proven framework you can follow. These are the steps I recommend following.

1.Get Clear On the Problem You Solve For Your Ideal Client.

One of my favorite lines in Donald Miller’s Storybrand is, “If you confuse, you lose.” Your ideal client needs to be able to show up on your page/website/etc and instantly understand how you can help them. This seemingly small step is crucial to creating content that’s clear, not confusing.

2.Identify Your Brand’s Message & Story.

Once you’ve identified exactly how you can help your ideal client, the next step is to get clear on your brand’s message and story. Why are you in this business? Why is the transformation you provide important? What are your values? Drill down on the problem you solve + your story, and repeat these elements again and again in your marketing. Walking through this process is crucial! As a certified coach with Business Made Simple, my clients are coached through how to create and use the StoryBrand Brandscript Framework.

From this simple, proven framework, you’ll create your brand messages which can be used for social media content, videos, blog posts, podcasts, your marketing messages, your Website and MORE!

3.Consider How You Want Your Brand to Be Felt & Experienced.

How do you want people to feel when they interact with you? Empowered? Inspired? Understood? Choose a few brand words to guide you as you hone in on the emotions you want your brand to elicit for your audience.

Clarifying Your Brand Takes Time & Effort—But It Makes Every Other Element of Growing Your Business That Much Simpler.

Click here to view current workshops and upcoming events.

3 Mistakes to Avoid to Grow Your Business

Tue, 23 Mar 2021 01:29:57 GMT

3 Mistakes to Avoid to Grow Your Business

The first year or so of doing business can best be described as a period of hustle. You’re perfecting your craft or your skill. You’ve created a flagship offer that gets great results. You’re doing your best to show up consistently on social media and network with the right people. You’re wearing all the hats in your business because having a team is still a dream.

And yet—you may frequently feel like you’re doing #AllTheThings, but getting nowhere.

You spin your wheels, pull long hours, and work weekends in the name of growth. But you quickly realize… That’s not sustainable! You may be making money, but the fact is, there’s no way to keep up that level hustle in the long-run.

But here’s the good news: You don’t have to .

When It Comes to Growing a Profitable, Sustainable Business, It’s All About Developing Systems That Can Support Your Growth—Without Leading to Burnout.

Business Made Simple has a great analogy for this. They compare growing a business to keeping a plane in the air. Brute force won’t get you far. You need systems, processes, and frameworks in place if we want to keep soaring.

This is one of the biggest reasons why I became a Business Made Simple Coach—I wanted to help other women avoid the mistakes I made early on so they can stay focused on creating a bigger impact and strengthening their bottom line.

What mistakes? So glad you asked! I made a lot of them—but looking back, there were 3 really big ones that very nearly kept me from growing the profitable, sustainable business of my dreams.

3 Mistakes That Can Keep Your Business On the Ground

Mistake #1: Not stepping into your role as CEO.

Early on, you may not feel like a CEO yet. But going back to the BMS plane analogy—your business needs a pilot. If you want to keep the plane in the air, you need to know where you’re going and how you’re getting there.

In your business, this means having a clear vision for your business. Where are you headed in the next year? 5 years? 10 years?

It’s important to align your business goals and your personal goals early on. That way, you can avoid ever feeling like you’re being tugged in two different directions.

Mistake #2: Not clarifying your message.

Clarity is key! It’s not always easy, but spending time clarifying your message makes every other aspect of growing your business that much easier. A clear message helps you communicate about the problems you solve and who you can help. It can also help set you apart from your competitors!

Mistake #3: Not developing a brand marketing strategy.

Ever feel like you’re just throwing spaghetti at the wall to see what sticks? A brand marketing strategy can help keep that from happening.

Your brand marketing strategy empowers you to show up confidently in your business, attract your ideal clients, and grow with intention.

Developing a brand marketing strategy that reflects your overall goals and values helps you know what strategic action you need to take every month. This is the secret to working smarter, consistently showing up for your audience, and generating more income!

Ready to Start Developing Your Brand Marketing Strategy?

I can help you approach your business growth by aligning your goals, clarifying your message, and strategy, so you can build your brand and grow your business. Schedule a free discovery call here to get started!

*This post contains an affiliate link. When you sign up, I’ll get a small commission. Using my affiliate link doesn’t impact your user experience at all. It’s simply a way for me to share products I use and love with my audience.

Ready to Ignite Your Brand & Grow Your Business?

Mon, 15 Mar 2021 01:24:59 GMT

Ready to Ignite Your Brand & Grow Your Business?

Are you ready to ignite your brand and grow your business? Start Here.

Do you ever feel completely stuck on how to stand out? Overwhelmed with building your brand? Unsure of where to focus your time and your energy?

When you’re developing your business, it can feel like you have all the pieces to a 10,000-piece puzzle—but no idea how to fit them all together to get to the picture that you envision!

You may want more than anything to create a profitable and sustainable business that you love and that makes an impact in the world, but you have absolutely no idea:

What you should focus on
What order to do them in
Whether they’ll actually get you closer to your goals

You’ve got a flagship offer. You’re working hard to be heard on social media. You’re networking, wearing all the hats in your business, doing all the things…

…And yet, you still feel like you’re getting nowhere. You’re not giving up, but you ARE getting tired. Everywhere you look, it seems like someone’s telling you to hustle. That you’ll do the work if you really want to be successful. That this is all part of the entrepreneurship experience.

But deep inside, you can’t help but wonder… Is it really supposed to be this hard?!

Believe me… I’ve been there! When I first started my business, I had no idea what I was doing. I had big dreams and the ambition and work ethic to match, but I constantly felt like I was….

Spinning my wheels
Putting my time and energy in the wrong places
Running on empty

I’ll spare you the whole story, but suffice it to say… It wasn’t until I had one major epiphany that things started to change.

I was spending too much time working IN the day-to-day happenings of my business—when I should have been intentionally BUILDING a brand.

What Does It Mean to Build a Brand?

If you’re like me during my early years of business, you probably think ‘branding’ refers to your brand colors, fonts, logos, and all that fun, pretty stuff. If so, you aren’t completely off base. But it’s about SO much more than that, too. For example:

Getting clear on your messaging
Creating content that resonates with your ideal client
Developing your marketing strategy

It took me a long time to realize that these core business pillars were all part of building a great brand. But once I saw the light, that’s when everything began to change in my business.

By focusing on building a solid brand, I was able to:

More intentionally choose where/how I spent my time
Focus my energy on the tasks that truly mattered
Forge a bond with my audience

I started working smarter instead of harder.

I was able to implement repeatable frameworks and systems that helped me slowly take my time (and my sanity!) back into my own hands AND start getting dramatically better results in my business.

Are you ready to do the same?

Introducing—the Ignite Your Brand Workshop

If you’re ready to grow your business with more intentionality, alignment, and strategy, don’t miss the Ignite Your Brand Workshop—my free 5-day experience where you’ll learn the exact systems and strategies that helped me transform my business.

During this 5-day workshop, I’ll teach you how to…

Build Your Brand From the Inside Out
Get Clear on Your Messaging
Create Content That Connects
Map Out Your Brand’s Marketing Strategy
Become UNSTOPPABLE!

…By focusing your energy on the business-building tasks that actually matter.

[Sign Up Now, For Free!]

This workshop is open at no cost for any woman who’s serious about growing her business and building a brand in 2021. If you’ve ever…

Worried that you’re spending time and money on the wrong things
Found yourself blindly throwing money at business growth “solutions” that didn’t work
Felt totally overwhelmed by the idea of creating a brand or building a sustainable brand marketing strategy

This workshop can help you get crystal clear on building your brand and focused on what you actually need to do to move the needle closer to your goals.

Ready to jump in? The workshop starts March 22—register now to save your seat!

Are You Building Your Business By Default or Design?

Sat, 13 Mar 2021 01:18:09 GMT

Are You Building Your Business By Default or Design?

Why Building a More Thoughtful, Intentional Business Is Essential to Elevating Your Brand

A few years ago, my husband and I shared the amazing experience of a vacation in Maui. I can’t recall exactly what happened, but for some reason, we had to arrive a day earlier than we’d originally planned.

(I know—so sad, right?)

Arriving a day earlier meant that we needed to make changes to our hotel accommodations. Because it was a busy season, we’d have to stay in a different room for our first night. But that was no big deal—we were on our way to Maui, and that was all that mattered.

When we arrived at the hotel, we were greeted warmly with Alohas and adorned with our beautiful leis. Our luggage was whisked away, and we were offered beverages and escorted to the front desk to check in.

To our surprise, one more room change had been made.

We’d been upgraded to an oceanside suite. What?!!

When we walked into our room, we were welcomed with champagne, a happy anniversary card, and soon after a phone call checking in to welcome us and ask if there was anything that we needed. I was completely blown away by the entire experience.

Every single day felt as though we were being welcomed and greeted for the first time.

It was like The Ritz Carlton had thoughtfully and intentionally designed an experience just for me. Every little detail was simply amazing.

And while you may not own a hotel in Maui, I think this is something we can all learn from as business owners.

Are you building your business by default or by design?

When we build our business by default, or on autopilot, we may neglect important details that make our processes feel more intentional and strategic.

On the contrast, when we build a business by design, we put thought and intention into every element of our brand—which helps communicate our values and leaves our clients feeling special, the way I did at The Ritz Carlton.

Our website, photos, messaging, client experience, and added touches all come together to influence the value your clients feel they’re getting from your brand.

In the case of our hotel, these little details upgraded what I expected to be a comfortable stay, into an unforgettable stay. I got a real luxury vacation—one that I couldn’t wait to go home and tell all my friends about—because The Ritz Carlton made it clear that they valued my experience.

Building your business by design starts with setting clear goals and keeping your ideal client in mind.

A business built by design, rather than by default, will allow space and time for you to work on your business—not just in it.

A business built by design, rather than by default, will have repeatable, intentional processes and systems in place for a memorable client experience.

A business built by design will skyrocket your revenue and grow your profits because your clients will look forward to the next chance to work with you (and rave about you to their friends).

Ready to ignite your brand and grow your business by design? I can help you approach your business growth with thought and intention, so you can get specific with building your brand, standing out, and attracting your ideal client so that you can grow your business. Schedule a free discovery call to get started!

5 Ways to Use Video to Grow Your Business

Thu, 25 Feb 2021 01:13:36 GMT

5 Ways to Use Video to Grow Your Business

When it comes to elevating your brand and growing your business in 2021, one thing’s for sure… Video is king. Great video content can help you not only build a stronger brand, but increase your overall brand awareness more than almost any other type of content.

But if you’re like many business owners, you may be wondering… How can you get started with video? What kind of content should you create, where should you share it, and how will creating video content help you grow?

So today, I wanted to share with you 5 ways you can start using video to grow your business today.

5 Ways to Use Video to Grow Your Business

Using Video On Social Media

Using Video On Social Media

If you’ve been in business for more than a few weeks, you’ve undoubtedly heard about the ‘Know, Like, Trust Factor’. If you haven’t, here’s the gist: Basic marketing principles show that consumers only buy from brands that they know, like, and trust.

This is what makes social media so powerful! Social media is a fantastic way to connect with your audience on a deeper, more human level—which makes them far more likely to buy from you in the long run. And right now, using video content on social media is the BEST way to nurture your audience.

Building Your “Know” Factor

Educational and instructional videos are a great way to help your audience learn who you are, what you do, and how you can help them. Share how-tos or stories about how your brand can provide the solution they’ve been looking for. This positions you as the ‘expert’ on your particular topic—so when they’re ready to hire help, they’ll know exactly who to turn to.

Building Your “Like” Factor

Use Instagram Stories to share snippets of your daily life with your audience. I’ve personally used mine to walk my audience through everything from planning out my day, to shopping for kitchen lights, to putting up Christmas decorations. It doesn’t have to be fancy—the goal here is to let your followers get to know the person behind the brand.

Building Your “Trust” Factor

Cultivate trust by sharing behind-the-scenes or process videos. Show off clips of you working with your clients. Share a plan that you recently implemented to help a client get better results. Better yet, have your client share a video of their experience on their own Instagram story and tag you! Then, be sure to share their video testimonial to your own story so your audience can see how much your clients love working with you.

2. Using Video to Nurture Your Email List

Video is a great way to showcase the face and voice behind the brand in your emails! Even sending out a quick greeting can make a huge impact on your email list. For example, you could create a video that follows a format like this: “Hi! This is ____ and I wanted to pop in this week to say hello and share some ideas about _____.” Spend 30 seconds talking about a tool, method, system, recipe, etc. that you love, and voila! You just created an email that will set you apart from the dozens of other emails your audience might open on a daily basis.

3. Use Video to Build Your Team’s SOPs

Are you working towards building a team to support your business? If so, start using video NOW to create ‘training videos’ that detail all your basic systems and processes. This will save you time and money in the long-run because your future team members can reference these videos to easily understand and implement your standard operating procedures.

4. Use Video to Share Your Favorite Tools

Do you ever share your favorite business tools with clients? Video is a great way to take this sharing one step further and actually TRAIN your clients on this new tool! Simply create a video showing off the tool—then save the video so you can easily reshare and add extra value for future clients who might benefit from the same instructional video.

5. Use Video to Elevate Your Brand’s Client Experience

Video is one of the easiest and highest impact ways to elevate your client’s experience. If you’re looking to rehaul your client onboarding process, adding a simple welcome video to the beginning of your workflow can provide a special, personal touch.

Looking For More Marketing & Business Growth Ideas?

Join my exclusive Facebook Community! We go live every Tuesday for the Ignite Your Brand & Business Live Show, where I share my best tips for growing your business and elevating your brand. See you there!

How Business Made Simple Could Transform Your Business

Wed, 24 Feb 2021 01:03:26 GMT

How Business Made Simple Could Transform Your Business

Last March, I sat staring at my suitcase feeling conflicted. I was supposed to leave for my quarterly solo business retreat… When seemingly overnight, the world learned about the COVID-19 pandemic.

All around me, businesses were closing. Friends were canceling their spring plans. People were confused and scared. And there I was in the middle of it, wrestling with whether I should venture out for this retreat or not.

Eventually, I weighed my options and decided. Because this would be a solo retreat and I was only traveling one state over to Rhode Island, I kept my travel plans. I loaded my car up with groceries, my planner, my laptop, and my tabletop Post-It board and headed across the state line.

As I drove, I needed something to fill the silence. So I put on the StoryBrand Podcast. Long story short, the podcast episode led me to Donald Miller’s new book, Marketing Made Simple. It had only hit the market recently, so I hopped over to Audible to download the audio book.

I couldn’t have known it then, but that moment ended up being the game-changer for my business.

One of my goals last year was to add more services to work with more women business owners. I’d been specializing in brand photoshoots for a while (and loved them!), but I wanted to really help my clients take their brand and business to the next level.

Marketing Made Simple was the catalyst I needed because it showed me a clear path forward—one where I could effectively communicate this pivot in my business and start marketing my new offers seamlessly.

I ended up using my solo business retreat to:

Generate a new website wireframe
Refocus on growing my brand awareness during what promised to be a particularly challenging year
Reposition myself as an expert not just in brand photography, but in branding and business growth as a whole
Generate a wealth of service/offer ideas I could use to help women entrepreneurs next-level their business

That Was Almost a Year Ago… So Why Bring This Up Now?

Because Donald Miller just put out a new book. And after reading it, I believe this one could be an even BIGGER game-changer for your business than Marketing Made Simple was for mine and transform your business in 2021 and beyond.

Business Made Simple is Miller’s 60-day roadmap to growing a successful business.

Let’s face it—running a business can be dreamy, but it can also be … well, let’s just say it can be a lot, especially when you’re juggling all the hats and doing all the things. It can be challenging to know where to focus your attention.

That’s precisely the problem solved with Business Made Simple. Throughout 60 entries, this little blue book helps readers transform the way they run their business—so they can stop spinning their wheels and finally start growing with intention.

If you said 2021 was going to be the year when…

Your business finally gained some momentum
You started generating serious revenue
You shifted your focus from surviving to scaling

…Don’t miss this read! Check out Donald Miller’s Business Made Simple right here.

Need Help Gaining Clarity, Developing Your Strategy, & Moving Forward In Your Business?

I’m here for you! As a Certified Business Made Simple Coach, I can guide you through the exact steps Don recommends and help you maximize your impact every step of the way.

You don’t have to do this alone.

Schedule a free 30-Minute Consultation & let’s figure out how we could work together to accelerate your business this year!

How Niching Down Can Help You Scale Your Business Up

Sat, 13 Feb 2021 00:52:26 GMT

How Niching Down Can Help You Scale Your Business Up

During my third year as a professional photographer, I decided to attend one of our industry’s most significant professional events. I’d been to a smaller workshop the previous year, but this was my first time attending the main event—and I was on top of the world.

I packed my suitcase with all the essentials: My camera, cute outfits, and of course, my business cards.

Flash forward to the event itself: I was meandering around the event floor, checking out the latest camera gear, and networking with other photographers. I wrapped up a conversation with a photographer who was a little further along in her career, shared my business card with her, and that’s when it happened…

“Wow, you do it all don’t you?”

Ouch! Nothing she said was actually hurtful… And yet, my feelings were definitely hurt. I couldn’t help but feel like there was a little bit of judgment in her tone—or at the very least, like my lack of a niche made me look like an amateur.

But that was the thing: Niching down wasn’t a concept I was super familiar with yet.

I’d heard of it, sure… But I didn’t really see the value in it. And more to the point, I didn’t feel ready to choose just one type of photography yet. I was still figuring out who I wanted to be as a photographer, where my passions were, who my ideal client was, and how I could help them.

But what I hadn’t realized yet was that my lack of a niche made it harder for me to grow. I was struggling to build a brand or develop a reputation because I wasn’t known for any one thing … I was, in most folks’ eyes, just another photographer. I needed to specialize if I wanted to become known.

How niching down can help you scale your business up…

The Case For Niching Down

As a Branding Expert & Business Coach, I meet many women who feel exactly how I felt back then. They’ve heard other entrepreneurs talk about their “niche,” and they sort of understand that they probably need to define theirs …

…. But they don’t really see the value in it. They don’t like the idea of labeling or limiting themselves, and they don’t feel ready to choose just one area of expertise yet.

I totally get it! Niching down when there are soooo many things to love about what you do can be a considerable challenge.

But the reality is, being a generalist is probably keeping you from reaching that next level of business growth. Niching down can help you…

Become known for one thing—which empowers you to build your brand faster and more intentionally
Gain momentum by focusing all your attention in one direction rather than spreading your time and resources across multiple paths
Connect with your ideal clients on a deeper level because they’ll trust that you know exactly how to solve their specific problem

Niching down doesn’t mean you can’t ever offer any service or serve any client outside your niche. It simply means you’re choosing to develop expertise in one particular area of your market. And when people see you as an expert, they remember you, respect you, and are more willing to pay rates that more accurately reflect the value of your work.

How to Start Choosing a Niche

When it comes to choosing your niche, I always recommend that my clients start by answering three simple-but-important questions:

1. What’s Your Why?

If you can define your mission as an entrepreneur, you can more clearly understand who you need to be serving.

2. What Do You Enjoy Most About Your Work?

Is there a particular part of your business that you enjoy most? For instance, do you love taking family photos but **reallly** love newborn photography? Or maybe you enjoy painting furniture—but there’s just something about interior design that really sets you on fire. Honing in on what makes you feel most aligned is a great way to get clarity around your niche.

3. What Transformation Do You Provide For Your Clients?

This is a big one. Once you’ve settled on who you might want to serve—for example, interior design for commercial projects or design projects for homeowners, sticking with the examples above—you can get clear on how you want to serve them. When you can tell your ideal client exactly what impact your work will have on their lives, marketing your services becomes much easier and more effective.

If you’re ready to start the process of niching down, I hope this article gave you a clear starting point! Take out your journal, brainstorm some answers to the questions above, and see what you come up with.

Looking For More Branding & Business Growth Ideas?

Join my exclusive Facebook Community! We go live every Tuesday for the Ignite Your Brand & Business Live Show, where I share my best tips for elevating your brand and growing your business. See you there!

The Roadmap to IGNITE Your Brand in 2021

Tue, 19 Jan 2021 00:09:44 GMT

The Roadmap to IGNITE Your Brand in 2021

Free 5-Day Brand Building Challenge Open Now!

When I started my business nine years ago, I had no idea what building a brand truly meant. Like most business owners starting out, branding to me meant choosing the right colors, a fancy logo, and fonts.

Yes, all of those things are important—but they aren’t the starting point to building a brand.

So this year, I want to offer something a little different for women who might be in a similar place to where I was nine years ago—AKA hoping to grow, but with no real idea of what it means to create a brand.

Here’s Your Roadmap to IGNITE Your Brand

Starting January 25, I’m hosting a free 5-day workshop, The Roadmap to Ignite Your Brand. And you’re invited!

If you’re ready to get serious about building your brand, standing out from the competition, and growing your business to new heights in 2021, this is your opportunity to make it happen.

The Roadmap to Ignite Your Brand 2021

What to Expect

Each day of the workshop, we’ll meet for LIVE Brand Coaching. I’ll share proven strategies and frameworks that can help you…

Build a memorable brand that goes beyond just looking pretty + actually helps grow your business.
Attract your ideal clients + convert more of your leads into buyers
Grow strategically, with the exact same frameworks I’ve used to grow my own business + that I teach as a Certified Business Made Simple Coach
Stand out from the crowd, even if your niche feels oversaturated or noisy
Get unstuck and finally start making meaningful forward progress in your business

Who Is The Roadmap to Ignite Your Brand 5-Day Challenge Right For?

This challenge is open at no cost for any woman who’s serious about growing her business and building a brand in 2021. If you’ve ever…

Worried that you’re spending time and money on the wrong things
Found yourself blindly throwing money at business growth “solutions” that didn’t work
Felt totally overwhelmed by the idea of creating a brand or building a sustainable marketing strategy

….Believe me. I’VE BEEN THERE!

This challenge is designed to help ambitious entrepreneurs (like you!) get crystal clear on what they actually need to do to move the needle closer to their goals in the new year.

In just a few focused days together, we’ll hash out the EXACT next steps you need to take to create a lasting brand and take your business to the next level.

Sound like something for you?? Then join us!

Click here to save your seat for my free 5-day Roadmap to IGNITE Your Brand Challenge.

3 Tips to Rock Your Goals in 2021

Thu, 14 Jan 2021 00:03:28 GMT

3 Tips to Rock Your Goals in 2021

A few years ago, I was presenting a speaker to a women’s organization I led. The speaker was an expert in critical processes, and her topic for the day focused on essential processes that business owners need to implement for long-term growth. I casually mentioned that I was excited to learn from her … and that I hadn’t yet set my goals for the year.

As soon as the words came out of my mouth, I felt the vibe shift a little bit. We were already a few days into Q1 at that point … and despite being in a position of leadership for these women, I was clearly behind on one of the most critical processes an entrepreneur has to go through—my goal setting.

Long story short, the speaker put me on the hot seat right then and there. And while I felt a little bit embarrassed in that moment, I’m SO grateful that she was willing to turn the spotlight on me, because I learned an invaluable lesson that day…

When it comes to growing a sustainable, profitable business, smart, strategic goal setting is EVERYTHING

So now, as we transition out of 2020—one of the most unpredictable and challenging years to date—it’s time again to think strategically about how we want our business to grow in the new year.

Having well thought out goals in place makes a huge difference in how we operate as business owners. Even if something comes up (like, ahem, a pandemic) that causes us to need to pivot or rework some things, having clear goals can help make sure we continue to move in the right direction.

So how can you set smart goals for 2021—and more importantly, how can you hold yourself accountable to those goals and take meaningful action to turn them into realities?

It’s not as hard as you might think.

Here are three of my best tips for rocking your new year’s goals and achieving your desired level of growth and impact in 2021.

Start Today

NOW is the time to:

Take a good look at what worked in your business last year.
Get critical about what didn’t work as well.
Think about the most important lessons you learned.
Develop your vision for this year.

As you work through this process, it’s essential to ask yourself: How do you want to move your business forward over the next 12 months? What specific impact do you want to make? Will you need to rebrand or rework any of your current strategies?

Whatever you decide you’d like to—run, don’t walk, towards the finish line.

2. Work in 90-Day Sprints

Every 90 days, choose THREE goals that you want to really focus on. Ideally, these should be smaller goals that move you in the direction of your BIG overall vision for your business.

Working in small, focused chunks like this empowers you to get strategic, stay focused, and take meaningful, consistent action without burning out.

3. Make Your Goals Visible

Write your goals down and put them somewhere you’ll see them every single day. You can…

Put them in a picture frame on your desk.
Make them your phone’s screensaver.
Glue them to your vision board.
Tape them to the coffee pot.

Whatever works! The important thing to remember here is that, as Tony Robbins says, “Our energy flows where our attention goes.” Keeping your goals within your line of vision will help you make even those seemingly small daily decisions with clear intention.

This will also help you decide which opportunities to act on—and which you can comfortably say NO to. Acting with your goals at the forefront of your mind prevents Shiny Object Syndrome and ensures that you consistently select opportunities that are aligned with your vision and your business goals.

Need Some Help Getting Clear On Your 2021 Growth Strategy? Let’s Talk!

I’d love to help you come up with a clear, actionable plan to grow the profitable, sustainable business of your dreams in 2021. Book a free consultation now and let’s figure out how we can move the needle towards your biggest goals for 2021 and beyond!

Women in Business Spotlight | Sharice Carpenter, Sharice & Co.

Thu, 17 Dec 2020 21:16:24 GMT

Women in Business Spotlight | Sharice Carpenter, Sharice & Co.

Women in Business Spotlight | Sharice Carpenter, Sharice & Co.

Taking the Tech Stress Out Running Your Business

For this month’s installment of the Women in Business Spotlight, I’m SO excited to introduce you to one of the most creative, resourceful, and intelligent online entrepreneurs I’ve ever met … Sharice, of Sharice & Co.!

Sharice is a marketing tech who takes the technology-related stress off of business owners’ plates so they can focus on planning, creating, and growing their business. Keep reading to learn more about who she is, what she does, and how she makes the world of business ownership a little brighter.

Q: Why did you start your business or choose your profession?

I had no intention of starting a business. I began freelancing to make extra money and as a way to gain experience for my future dream job. The longer I was freelancing, the more I realized I was meant for entrepreneurship.

At some point, I stopped looking for jobs and started focusing on getting more clients and building a service-based business around my skill set and experience as a web production specialist. Now my business focuses on building online courses, membership sites and tech services for coaches and consultants.

Q: What’s the thing (or things) you love most about what you do?

There are two things I love most about what I do. One, I love seeing an idea for a course or a digital product go from just an idea to reality. I don’t think it gets more magical than taking something that didn’t exist and bringing it into existence.

Second, I’ve been so fortunate to work with really smart and talented people who have ideas that aren’t just focused on profitability, but on making a bigger impact. To have a hand in helping them make a greater impact on the world feels really special.

Q: What’s something fun that most people don’t know about you?

I’m an avid bowler. I was the captain of my high school’s bowling team. I still regularly bowl today.

Q: Share a favorite book, podcast, or word of wisdom to someone who’s just starting their business.

One of my favorite books that I recommend everyone read is You are a Badass by Jen Sincero.

Are you a business owner, coach, or consultant who could use a little help in the tech department?

Grab a Marketing Template from Sharice’s website and discover how easy simplifying your business with templates, guides, and Mad Lib Style swipes can be! Or, get in touch with Sharice at any of the links below to learn more about how she can help you grow your business.

Website : https://www.shariceandco.com/

Instagram : https://www.instagram.com/shariceandco/

Facebook : https://www.facebook.com/sharice.carpenter/

YouTube: Sharice & CO -> https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCPuIQO_FuW9Ls2a-tw9utqg

Why Growth Alone Isn't Enough

Thu, 03 Dec 2020 21:08:43 GMT

Why Growth Alone Isn’t Enough

What I Wish Someone Had Told Me During My First Year of Business

I remember the day I decided to start my photography business. I’d been on the fence about whether or not entrepreneurship was right for me. Until my dad gave me some really incredible advice:

“Don’t wait for someone to give you permission,” he told me. “Go, do the work, and become.”

So that’s exactly what I did. I hit the ground running, and in my first year of business ownership, I did a LOT of work towards honing my craft.

But I’ll be transparent: I didn’t really have a solid growth strategy. Or at least, not one that I could keep up with for the long-term.

I was still in the midst of figuring out f-stops, proper lighting, and some of the more technical aspects of my camera when it occurred to me that I ALSO needed to get a little more serious about building a brand and growing my business.

I knew I wanted to create a business that allowed me to provide my clients with timeless, heartwarming, candid memories they could cherish for a lifetime. I wanted to show up with an exceptional experience that left my clients feeling genuinely valued.

But the fact that I didn’t have a plan for sustainable, profitable growth meant that within a year of opening my doors, I’d gotten completely overwhelmed.

I was trying to market my services, show up 100% for my clients, create a brand, and keep working on my photography skills. And it was just too much.

I was wasting heaps of time and money, and I felt like I had nothing to show for it. In short, I was cruising for a burnout.

What I didn’t understand—and what I desperately wish someone had told me during that first year—is that growth for growth’s sake wasn’t enough to create the sustainable, profitable, fulfilling business I had in mind.

Eventually, I got it together, but sometimes I think about how much easier growing my business could have been if someone had just tapped me on the shoulder and told me the truth.

I needed—and deserved—more.

So if you’re feeling overwhelmed, caught up in the hustle-and-grind, or feel like your business is growing without any direction or strategy, consider this your sign. YOU deserve more, too.

The Key Areas Every Business Owner Needs to Focus On For Sustainable, Profitable Growth Without Burnout

If you’re ready to build a brand and grow your business—without getting overwhelmed or burning out—it’s crucial to focus on all the core growth areas, including:

Marketing
Sales
Messaging
Communication
Productivity
Leadership

Or, in other words, building your brand intentionally, from the inside out.

Now, believe me. From one business owner to another, I understand how overwhelming that list looks. But here’s the thing:

You DO have what it takes to run an extremely successful, profitable, and sustainable business.

You just need to get UNSTUCK.

You need to whittle down that massive to-do list and figure out what ACTUALLY needs to be done first to maximize your efforts and move the needle towards your goals.

You need CLARITY and ACTION.

That’s where I come in. As a Certified Business Made Simple Coach, I help business owners get unstuck and overcome overwhelm so they can navigate their business growth journey with less stress and more success.

Using branding expertise and Business Made Simple’s proven frameworks in marketing, communication, leadership, messaging, and productivity, my coaching plans can give you the push you need to move forward with strategic action.

With both one-on-one and group coaching plans available, I’m here to help business owners beat burnout and implement smarter, more sustainable, more profitable systems at every stage.

So if you’ve been struggling with overwhelm, feeling unsure about your next step, or wrestling with that nagging feeling that there’s just something missing from your business, I’d love to help!

Take the Business Made Simple Business MRI Quiz right now to diagnose your business health and determine which areas need a little TLC if you want to grow the profitable, sustainable business of your dreams.

[Take the Quiz Now]

I can’t wait to see your results!

What to Do When It's Time to Pivot

Wed, 11 Nov 2020 20:38:38 GMT

What to Do When It’s Time to Pivot

Shifting Your Brand to Become More Aligned

Two years ago, we woke up to a little bit of water in our basement. No big deal. We just pulled out our small wet vac, cleaned it up, and we were done.

… Or so we thought.

Then spring came along. And that little bit of water? It turned into a LOT of water. We ripped out our carpet and started looking for the right person to help us solve the problem.

We talked to a plumber. A drain cleaner. A well specialist. A foundation repair company. A general contractor. We even talked to a landscaper—because who knows, maybe the patio was to blame!

After consulting with just about every repair/construction specialist in our area, we eventually determined that there were cracks in our foundation that must have been letting water in. So we sealed up the cracks and believed we were all set.

A year went by with no further issues. But when spring came again, we were back to square one. We ripped out the carpet again and called a company to help us clean up the water damage.

Long story short, we eventually found a man with a plan.

The good news was that he realized pretty quickly what our real problem was and knew how to fix it. The bad news was, his solution involved digging up our whole back yard and starting over again.

Now, I’m a long-term strategy kind of girl. So I knew in my heart of hearts that digging everything up and starting over again would eventually leave us with a stronger, better home than we had at the time.

But that doesn’t mean that making the decision to rip out most of our flowers, bushes, and greenery was easy. I felt stuck. I was sad. I was worried about whether this big plan would actually work.

Many entrepreneurs experience a similar “stuck” feeling when trying to grow a business that isn’t in alignment with our goals and values.

We can tell that our business isn’t as strong as it could be. We can see water seeping in, and we recognize that this isn’t a problem that a little bit of sealant is going to fix.

Maybe you know you’ve got a few good things in place—but ultimately, you feel like the good pieces of your brand are just bandaids to cover up the fact that your foundation is falling apart.

But the idea of digging everything up and starting over? That can be absolutely terrifying.

If you’re trying to find the courage to shift your brand and realign your business, I can help you develop a plan to keep the best parts of your brand … and dig up the rest.

When I explained to our contractor that I was upset about losing so many of my backyard flowers and plants, he helped me come up with a way to spare my daylilies and peonies. Getting to hold onto a few favorite flowers made digging up everything else so much easier.

Similarly, I can help you cherry-pick the components of your brand that are working well and identify the cleanest way to pivot your brand so you can create a business that’s in better alignment with your current values.

How does this work? As a brand coach, I help my clients …

Assess their current business mission and goals.
Create a coaching plan and use frameworks to grow and scale their business according to the mission and goals we identified in the previous step.
Take action with accountability and growth measures to make sure their plan is repeatable and gets them results.

Want to know how I can help you dig up your current brand, keep the best parts, and make room for growth?

Contact me below to schedule a free 30-minute strategy call with me!

Together we’ll look at where you are now vs. where you want to be and come up with three action steps that you can take NOW to start growing your business.

Women in Business Spotlight | Julie Etter

Fri, 23 Oct 2020 20:33:10 GMT

Women in Business Spotlight | Julie Etter

As a business coach and photographer, I love helping women business owners find new ways to stand out in their markets, communicate their messages, connect with their dream clients, and grow their business.

Through my own work, I frequently meet incredible, inspiring women who are creating strong brands, growing powerhouse businesses, and who deserve recognition for their fantastic work as business owners and entrepreneurs.

So to help shine the spotlight on some of these incredible women, I’m so excited to introduce my new Women in Business Spotlight series! Each month, I’ll feature a different woman business owner who I’ve had the pleasure of working with.

This month, we’re kicking off our series with an interview with Julie Etter—a national award-winning producer with Berkshire Hathaway HomeServices Evolution Properties.

Women in Business Spotlight

Q: Why did you start your business or choose your profession?

When I was 22, my fiance (now husband) and I were looking for our first home. We were both brand new teachers with little to no money to our name. We didn’t want to rent so we focused on buying a home. I was determined not to be a naive and clueless “participant” in this transaction. In the process of diving in to understand the process for my own benefit, I fell in love.

At the closing, my broker (who was my uncle) suggested I get my license. So, I got my license to do it “on the side.” Shortly after, my passion-fueled and my business grew.

Teaching was such a fond memory and time of my life, but within a few years, it became clear that my heart was in real estate.

Q: What do you love most about what you do?

I love being a part of the journey—the life experience and the relationships built along the way.

I always say I’m not in the business of real estate, but the business of life. I like to be the confidant, the voice of reason, and the voice of appreciated humor during what can be a stressful time. I love to be part of such a milestone in people’s lives, and to help them navigate the “business” part while they navigate through what’s best for their family.

I particularly love when I get to do this with the moving children. Connecting and keeping them joyful is the most unexpected and rewarding portion! They are our teachers!

Q: What’s something fun that someone might not know about you?

I’m a pretty open book, so I don’t know if it’s a secret. But I want to experience everything at least once. From travel goals, to day to day “ordinary” experiences that I’ve never encountered, to weird food … I want to try!

My favorite experiences are those that my two boys (ages 3 and 6) and I are all experiencing for the first time together.

Q: Share a favorite book, podcast, or word of wisdom to someone who’s just starting their business.

When I was at a pivotal point in my business, the book The Big Leap by Gay Hendricks was recommended to me. It’s a simple but motivational read pointing out how we tend to self-sabotage our mindset and situations to stay mostly status quo in most facets of our life. It was eye opening to see how a few small changes could ensure I leaped to further growth!

Want to learn more about Julie or Berkshire Hathaway HomeServices Evolution Properties? Looking to buy a property in the Massachusetts area? Connect with Julie here.

Elevate Your Brand with Your Photos

Sat, 17 Oct 2020 20:27:20 GMT

Elevate Your Brand with Your Photos

Are you ready to elevate your brand for the last quarter? The year is not over and there are always things to think about when it comes to elevating your brand.

One simple way to elevate your brand is with your brand photos.

High quality, authentic photos that tell your brand’s story so that you can connect and attract your ideal clients are important to elevating your brand.

Whether you’re preparing your content for social media, updating your website, writing blogs, or launching a new course. You want your brand photos to communicate your brand’s messages and match the content that you’re sharing.

You want your brand photos to connect with your brand.

Having quarterly brand photoshoots throughout the year that are planned with the content and what goals (what you’ll be sharing in your business) will make your brand stand out and elevate your brand awareness as well.

A quarterly shoot will also ensure that you have photos that flow with the change of the seasons as well. You may or may not want to share brand photos that were taken on the beach in the summer when it’s snowing outside. So consider the change of seasons as well.

So are you ready to elevate your brand this last quarter?

Download my Five Easy Ways to Rock Your Brand Photoshoot for some ways to start planning.

If you are in the surrounding Metrowest Boston area and need a brand photographer who understands how to perfectly capture the essence of your brand in photos that are connected and attract your dream clients, I’d love to chat. Fill out the form below!

What is Your Unique Selling Proposition?

Thu, 08 Oct 2020 20:23:00 GMT

What is Your Unique Selling Proposition?

Why Establishing Your Unique Brand Matters

Recently, I was watching a design show on HGTV when the hosts asked a question that literally made me sit up straight, hit pause, and rewind to make sure my ears hadn’t deceived me …

“So, what’s your unique selling proposition?”

As a Brand Marketing Coach, this is a question I’m all too familiar with … And yet, I don’t think I’d ever heard it asked in such a real-world, mainstream context.

Surprising as it was, it made perfect sense! The designers were overhauling a restaurant to help them attract more attention and provide an unforgettable experience for their target audience. They needed to understand what made that particular restaurant stand out from all the other restaurants in town so that their design could strengthen the brand.

Thankfully, the restaurant owners had a thoughtful answer and a lot of great insights around their unique selling proposition.

They went on to share exactly what made their restaurant different. They explained the key elements of their dining experience and what they alone could provide for their customers.

Armed with this info, the designers were able to create a highly-customized, on-brand customer experience where patrons of this restaurant could enjoy an incredible meal in a beautiful, tailored-to-them atmosphere.

And while I, unfortunately, don’t have access to HGTV’s stats, I’d be willing to bet that this branding makeover led to a significant boost in business for the restaurant owners

… All because they were able to clearly communicate what made their brand special and capture that magic for their customers.

Why Understanding Your Unique Selling Proposition & Establishing Your Unique Brand Matters

As small business owners, we’re almost never the very first to come up with our business idea. The world is FULL of photographers, realtors, health coaches, interior designers, stylists, you name it.

That doesn’t mean you can’t be successful if your market already feels a bit crowded. In fact, seeing other businesses thriving in your industry should give you confidence that there’s a need for what you’re offering!

But it does mean that you absolutely MUST find a way to set yourself apart from all the other folks out there doing what you do.

How do you do that? By creating a strong, strategic brand.

How to Find Your Unique Selling Proposition

Developing your brand starts with understanding your unique selling proposition—or in other words, understand what makes YOU different from everyone else in your industry.

Discovering your unique selling proposition can happen in a lot of different ways. For some business owners, it’ll be intuitive. For others, market research may be required.

Personally, I think a great way to start figuring out your unique selling proposition is to ask yourself these questions:

What problem does my business solve?
How does my brand make my clients feel?
What plan are we offering to bring the transformation our clients want?
What is our client experience?

Interested in attending a future workshop or event?

You can explore upcoming workshops and current experiences here.

The IGNITE Your Brand Workshop

Tue, 22 Sep 2020 17:27:50 GMT

The IGNITE Your Brand Workshop

When you hear the word “branding,” what’s the first thing that comes to your mind??

If you’re anything like me circa 8 years ago, your brain probably just jumped to visions of color palettes, logos, fonts … You know, the fun, flashy stuff.

But actually, there’s SO much more to building a brand that people will recognize, trust, and—pay for.

For me, getting clear about which elements of my brand mattered the MOST was a total gamechanger.

Once I stopped spinning my wheels & wasting time and money on the wrong things, I was able to IGNITE my brand, stand out CONFIDENTLY, & ELEVATE my entire business.

Want to know how I did it??

You’re invited to my FREE 5-Day Workshop, “The Roadmap to Ignite Your Brand.”

RSVP right here >> shawondavis.com/workshop-registration

In this LIVE, weeklong free training, I’m helping business owners like you discover how they can:

�� Build a BRAND from the ground up—with a focus on some of the CRUCIAL brand elements most business owners overlook.

�� Clarify their ideal MARKETING FRAMEWORK, stop wheel-spinning, & start growing their business

�� Get UNSTUCK & stand out CONFIDENTLY

… and so much more!

There’s no cost and no strings attached. All you have to do is SHOW UP and be ready to learn.

Ready to IGNITE your brand and ELEVATE your business??

�� Don’t miss out. Sign up right here, right now. >> shawondavis.com/workshop-registration

Make Your Client Experience Remarkable

Thu, 03 Sep 2020 17:22:57 GMT

Make Your Client Experience Remarkable

When I started my business eight years ago, I wasn’t sure of a lot of things.

Heck, I probably wasn’t sure about 99.9% of what I was doing.

Except for this one thing.

I knew that I didn’t want my clients to feel that working with my studio was a transactional experience.

I never wanted them to feel like they were client #54, who was only showing up to pay me to take pretty photos.

That didn’t feel warm to me, and I knew that it wouldn’t feel warm or welcoming to my clients either.

On average, it takes about 8 – 15 touches to get a new client’s attention, and possibly a few more before they become a client.

Those touches might include landing on our website, browsing what we’re sharing on our social media platforms, reading our blog posts, downloading resources and guides that serve them, or receiving value-giving emails if they’re on our email list.

After they’ve said yes to working with us, we want to make sure that we have a great client experience ahead that is also a part of our brand.

The onboarding process is one of the first steps of that experience, and there are also some special touches that we can add as well.

Before I get ahead of myself, I want you to think about your brand values? Is it a brand value that your clients feel that working with you is more than a transaction?

If so, what special touches can you add to your client experience that aligns with your brand values?

Here are a few ideas of ways that I’ve added small surprises to my brand’s client experience over the years?

A welcome video.
Send them a guide of what their experience will be working with you.
A birthday card or birthday shoutout if you’re connected on social.
Handwritten thinking of you note.
Booking gift of special treats.

One of my favorites was a Cue the confetti it’s almost time for your wedding day gift box (movie tickets, coffee gift card, and a handmade popup trinket with confetti).

Something as simple as a card in the mail goes such a long way.

Keep it simple, thoughtful, budget for it, and keep it connected to feel like an authentic part of your brand and make your client experience remarkable.

A few resources for you:

Gift-ology by John Ruhlin

Send Out Cards with Beverly Stukas

P.S. Have you registered for the Ignite Your Brand Workshop? It’s a free 5-Day Workshop. Enter your information below and get your seat today!

Welcome to the New Website

Thu, 27 Aug 2020 17:18:10 GMT

Welcome to the New Website

Welcome to the new website! Over the weekend, we hit publish to launch the new website and I couldn’t be more excited! It’s been months in the making and it took many, many, small steps to get here.

To celebrate the launch, there is a Launch Week Special for Headshot and Personal Brand Photoshoots waiting for you!

Get your personal branding photos ready to market your business for the season ahead.

-Elevate your business.

-Stand out and attract your dream clients.

-Get high-quality brand marketing photos for your business customized for your brand.

I promise you’ll have a fun, stress-free photo shoot, and your brand will thank you later.

For a limited time, the session fee is only $99 and that includes one photo , a video consultation to style your wardrobe, and a concept for your business and brand needs. You can also choose to customize one of the studio set designs for your brand!

The Limited Special is $99. You can click this link to Grab Your Spot and for all of the details.

Welcome to the new website!

-Warmly,

Shawon

Five Tools I'm Using in My Photography Business

Sat, 22 Aug 2020 17:12:59 GMT

Five Tools I’m Using in My Photography Business

Today, I’m sharing five tools that I’m using in my photography business this year that I love! Each of these tools has many bells and whistles, but I choose the parts of each of them that work the best for my business.

Over the past seven years of running a business, I have learned the power of having great systems in place and having the best tools both in my camera bag and tools that I use every day in the studio, to make things run smoothly and efficiently.

#1 Calendly

Calendly is a scheduling tool that I don’t know how I’ve lived without. I’m able to create events for initial consultations, wardrobe consultations, scheduling session dates and reveal sessions. Prior to using Calendly, I would send out a few dates to clients to choose from for various meeting needs, and they’d either choose or date or we might need to go back and forth via email to figure out a date and time.

So instead of sending an email with dates to choose from, and sometimes having to reschedule those dates, I can simply send out a Calendly link for specific events (consultations, studio meetings, etc) and my clients can choose the date and time that works best for them.

Once my client schedules their date, I receive an email and simply add it to my calendar. You can sync Calendly with your Google calendar, but I’m a paper and pen kind of #girlboss.

Another great feature is having a reminder email sent to my client. There are so many wonderful features to Calendly, and I’ve only scratched the surface. It is such a timesaver.

#2 Zoom

I was introduced to Zoom over a year ago, and I finally decided to take the leap. Zoom is a video conferencing call app. My go to video call apps have been Google Hangouts or Facetime, and early on Skype. While all three of these are great, I was also asking clients to choose what platform we could connect on.

Imagine juggling various platforms, and having each system on my laptop, desktop at the studio and desktop at home.

Zoom allows me to have one platform to use to meet with all of my clients. I simply send out the app to download, and a link to meet in my personal meeting room. No more sending out individual links, and having multiple conferencing apps. I use Zoom for timeline planning meetings, wardrobe consultations, coffee connects and business meetings with a professional women’s organization that I lead.

#3 Iconosquare

This is a brand new tool that I’m using to help me spend my time wisely with using Instagram in my business. Iconosqaure is an analytics tool for Instagram. Knowing when to post, what my audience likes and dislikes, and the things that they want to see more of is extremely helpful.

I’m able to create a folder of the images that I want to use, write out captions and insert hashtags, and schedule post automatically or I can receive an alert on my phone when it’s time to post and I can do that manually with a simple copy and paste.

Right now, I’m only using it for my weddings Instagram account because I don’t have a separate portrait Facebook Business Page which has to be linked.

And that is a good segway into why I also use Plann.

#4 Plann

Plann is another Instagram analytics tool (not as robust as Iconosquare) but sufficient to run my portraits Instagram account.

There is a free version, that I used initially, but now I use the paid version which is a reasonable cost. I’m able to view my grid prior to posting with an image, I’m able to write captions, schedule posts with Plann, and receive an alert on my phone when it’s time to post. Both Plann and Iconosquare are helping me to spend my time wisely and strategically on Instagram.

#5 Grammarly

I’ve been using Grammarly for some time now to help me when it comes to blogging. It doesn’t magically blog for me, although I wish that it did, but it does help me to write coherent sentences free of spelling errors and makes sure that I’m using the correct homophone of words like right or write.

Those are five tools that I’m using in my photography business this year and loving. As I mentioned before, they each have many bells and whistles, but I choose the bells and whistles that work well in my business.

Disclosure: These reviews are all from my own experience using these apps. I was not paid to say wonderful things about any of these products.

The Plan You Need to Go LIVE on video

Thu, 13 Aug 2020 17:04:38 GMT

The Plan You Need to Go LIVE on video

Does the thought of going live on social make your palms sweaty?

Today, I’m sharing how to plan to go live so that you can say goodbye to sweaty palms and what-ifs that might be holding you back.

First, take a deep breath, smile, and remember the purpose. And don’t forget to say your name.

Clicking the Go Live button for the first time on Facebook was a bit, um how should I say this, scary.

What if no one watches, what if I’m boring, and what if my voice starts to shake?

At the beginning of the year, I decided that I was going to go live each week.

To help me work through my fear and all of the what-ifs rolling around in my head, I posted my word of the year, purpose, on my computer screen.

I knew that if I remembered my purpose of serving my audience each week, then I could do it.

My word of the year, purpose, was my starting point and planning was next.

Here are a few tips and a plan so that you can go say goodbye to the fears and the what-ifs that are holding you back.

What’s your why? Start with your why in mind and remember it each time you’re planning to go live.
Think about the topics that you want to share and make a list. Also, ask your audience for feedback and what they want to hear more of, or simply listen to what they’re saying.
Plan. You can write out what you want to say, and use notes as you speak to your audience. Option two, create an outline of talking points.
What to include as you plan your outline?
Welcome everyone, and introduce yourself with a smile
Chit chat moment (*1 min. How’s your day, thank you for joining)
Introduce topic so that they know what you’ll be sharing
Work through content
Recap content
Engage with questions and comments
Outtro—thank you, call to action
Choose a platform to use to go live, or simply go live through Facebook. I use ECamm Live because I love the ability to engage with my audience, you can practice before going live, there is a screen sharing option, I can save all of my recordings in one place for future use, and it also fits well with my style for keynotes and presentations. I’m not an affiliate, but I love the platform, and you can check it out here: https://www.ecamm.com/ Streamyard is another platform. I haven’t personally used it, but I’ve heard good things about it.

The last tips are to clean your camera phone lens, look at the dot, press the go-live button, and have a conversation with a friend.

You’re ready! #letsdothis

Join the Elevate Your Brand Community, and watch the entire video about Going LIVE inside.

Cape Cod Intimate Backyard Wedding | Genny + Luke

Thu, 30 Jul 2020 21:28:23 GMT

Cape Cod Intimate Backyard Wedding | Genny + Luke

This past Saturday, I had the honor of photographing Genny and Luke’s Intimate Cape Cod wedding. Although their plans changed to having an intimate celebration, the joy expressed and shared with their family on their wedding day was indelible. I’m delighted to share a few of those joyful moments and more about their day.

Almost four years ago, their love story began in Richmond, VA. It only took about 30 minutes into their second date for Luke to see that there was something special about Genny. Not long after that, he knew that he’d found the one.

These two foodies light up the room together, and I’m sure when Waffles, their sweet pup is around, even more sunshine is added.

Not only did they celebrate their special day with their parents, siblings, and grandparents, but friends from near and far were also able to join in virtually.

The day was beautiful, with a perfect ceremony setting as the sunshine glistened off the lake at Genny’s family home.

I loved their celebratory walk down the aisle as their family cheered and celebrated with them.

We’d later make our way to Oregon Beach for more beautiful moments of the two of them together.

Down scroll down just hit, but get ready to smile!

The celebration continued throughout the afternoon with their first dance, laugh out loud toasts, and tears as her dad played and sang a special song that he wrote for their wedding day.

Genny and Luke, I am so happy for you!! The love between the two of you and the joy of your family was heartwarming. Thank you so much for the honor to be part of your beautiful wedding day! Cheering for you always! xo, Shawon

Here are a few favorites from their wedding day!

Cape Cod Intimate Backyard Wedding Photos

This is paragraph text. Click it or hit the Manage Text button to change the font, color, size, format, and more. To set up site-wide paragraph and title styles, go to Site Theme.

This post reflects a season when I was photographing weddings—but today, my work is fully centered on branding photography and helping women entrepreneurs show up with clarity, confidence, and purpose.

Through my workshops, retreats, and in-studio experiences, I help you feel put together, on brand, and confident every time you show up for your business—whether that’s online, in a room, or in front of the camera.

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Intimate Vow Renewal Celebration | Lavinia + Gims

Thu, 30 Jul 2020 16:01:49 GMT

Intimate Vow Renewal Celebration | Lavinia + Gims

Together, for the last 10 years, Lavinia and Gims have built a beautiful marriage and life. Their family means everything to them, and it was an honor to see them celebrate and be celebrated this past Sunday.

The afternoon began with final getting ready preparations. Laughter, a few dance moves, and some twirls and spins of the sweetest flower girl.

One of the sweetest moments was their first look. Lavinia was stunning. The way that they looked at each other, you would have never known that they’ve been married for 10 years. It was beautiful!

Daddy here comes our girl, was the sign held by their son before his mom walked down the aisle.

The officiant’s words were expressed with encouragement and love.

Their vows to each other, for another 10 years and counting together, were filled with even more love, joy, and laughter.

They are truly #couplegoals and their friends and family agree.

There were so many magical moments on Sunday afternoon, and their day could not have been more perfect as they were surrounded by love from family and friends physically present with them and those from afar who got to be on the best Zoom call of 2020.

All Zoom calls should include dancing!

After the ceremony, guests were greeted by cocktail time and dinner just before sunset in an elegant, warm, and inviting outdoor space. There was so much heart and love poured into the decor by Lavinia’s vision and it was all impeccably designed by Erica, O Luxe Designs.

A family dance entrance, a first dance with the lovely couple, toasts, a fun cake cutting, conversations, and laughter filled the atmosphere with the afternoon sunlight pouring in.

Cheers to 10 Years, Lavinia and Junior! The joy on your special day was amazing! You two are truly couple goals, and I am so happy for you and your sweet family! Thank you for the honor to be part of your special day. Forever cheering for you! xo, Shawon

Here are a few favorites from their day!

Intimate Vow Renewal Celebration

Creative Team

Coordinator: Janica Pierre

Design Creation & Planning: the lovely bride, Lavinia Paul Events

Florals: Erica, O Luxe Design, Inc.

Makeup: JDMXCV

Cake: Silver Whisk Bakeshop

Catering: Nancy Catering

DJ: Deejaymot

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

My Birthday, Something New, and a Grand Opening Tour

Wed, 15 Jul 2020 15:35:04 GMT

My Birthday, Something New, and a Grand Opening Tour

Today is my birthday and you know what that means, right?! If you said red velvet cake, then you guessed right!

Birthdays are always a time of reflection for me. Despite a challenging 2020, I have so much to be grateful for.

Almost nine years ago, my journey to becoming a photographer all began on my birthday.

I always expect red velvet cupcakes from LaSalle’s bakery, but that year I had another box to unwrap.

I had no idea that the gift of a new camera would change my life.

This year as I reflect, the word impact is speaking to me louder and louder.

I had plans for a Grand Opening back in March when I walked through the door of a new studio space.

Although the grand opening may be delayed, my plans and vision are only expanding as I think about the impact that I want to make for other business owners who also have a gift that they want to use to make an impact.

There have been so many amazing women business owners that have been instrumental in my business journey. The branding side of the studio has allowed me to combine my love for business, storytelling, and styling behind the camera to help other women business owners uplevel their branding and businesses.

Today, I’m thrilled to share that I will also be offering Brand Marketing Strategy. This is perfect for the business owner who has been overwhelmed with putting all of the pieces of their visual branding together with a marketing strategy that is aligned to making an impact in their business.

I will be sharing more details and opening my calendar soon for consultations. If you want to be the first to know, click here to become an Insider.

Alright, I’m heading out for the day, but here’s a quick tour of the new space. It’s been a joy to design, rearrange furniture and customize sets to fit my client’s brand and you might see some of that in action. Those hours of HGTV are paying off:)

Cheers to another year!

Why You Need a CEO Schedule

Thu, 09 Jul 2020 15:29:06 GMT

Why You Need a CEO Schedule

We took a quick trip down memory lane during this week’s Facebook Live inside our community of amazing women business owners and pros. This week’s topic was all about why you need a CEO schedule.

But first I have to say, let’s go Seahawks! Shout out to my college Alma mater, UNC Wilmington.

A trip down memory lane took me back to my days as a resident assistant (RA) during my sophomore year in college. I loved being an RA! It was an opportunity to foster a community with the ladies on my floor who were journeying through their first year in college and all that it entailed.

So many tools that I learned, especially time management, have become a huge part of my life. We were given an hourly daily planner to block out our class times, RA events/floor duty times and any other activities that we needed to manage.

That planner was everything and it kept me organized.

Fast forward to now owning my own business, I have set up a daily planner that looks somewhat similar to my old RA schedule.

It’s now called my CEO Schedule.

This schedule helps me to not only keep my weeks organized, but it also helps me to make sure that I’m focusing on more of the right things in my business and not simply checking off a to-do list every day.

Do you love making lists and checking them twice?

Well, here’s why you need a CEO schedule.

You know that I’m a list girl, but you want to make sure you have a good mix of to-dos and needle movers in your business on that list too.

At the end of the day, we want to be moving that needle towards our goals, making an impact, and serving with purpose.

So, what needs to be on your CEO schedule?

Let’s start with a list of the needle movers: YOU (Self-Care), Marketing, Leads, Sales, Consultations, Service, Elevating Your Brand. If you don’t have a team yet, I’m going to add Operations and all things Admin.

Now, you’re going to create blocks of time on your CEO Schedule for each of the needle movers and administrative tasks can be sprinkled in as needed throughout your week.

So, for instance, you might have one day of the month for financial tasks to get things to your bookkeeper. That task may only take a 30-minute block of time and can be sprinkled in as needed and not as part of your main CEO schedule.

If you take a look at my schedule, you’ll see that I have photoshoots on Tuesday, Thursday and Friday. If I don’t have a shoot on Tuesday of my current week, then I know that is a day that I can use for administrative or operations tasks.

Does that make sense?

Once you have your CEO Schedule in place, I’d recommend using some kind of scheduling tool to help you manage consultations. I use Calendly , and it has been extremely helpful in managing consultations for the studio. It also syncs with my Google calendar and does not allow me to become double booked.

Okay, so now you have your CEO schedule and you’re ready to rock your business right?!

The last tip that I’d like to share is to remember that it’s okay to change your schedule. Be flexible! As seasons may change in your life and business, your CEO schedule can change with you.

Comment below if you’re saying yes to a CEO schedule!

PS…VIP Content Strategy Sessions are on the way to the studio soon. If you are a business owner who’s ready to uplevel their brand and business, click below to schedule a consultation.

How to Find the time to Elevate Your Brand

Thu, 25 Jun 2020 15:22:01 GMT

How to Find the time to Elevate Your Brand

The question of how to find the time to elevate your brand when there are so many things to juggle as a business owner is a great one and the answer is simple.

The juggling act…

We have administrative responsibilities, marketing, networking, consultations, operations, and I’ll give social media an entire category as well. Many things to juggle and hats to wear, right?!

This long season of 2020 that we’re all walking through and experiencing adds to the juggling act.

Although I’m excited for a new quarter around the corner, my planning looks so much different than it did at the beginning of the year.

There have been many days, insert weeks, of simply putting one foot in front of the other navigating both my business and personal life.

I’m grateful for some space again to focus on my goals, and a huge part of that has been working at the studio in my creative space. I’ll be sharing more about that soon!

One of the small things that I was able to do was find time to elevate my brand. I made a list of ways to stay productive, and in hindsight, many of the things on my list involved working on my business and essentially elevating my brand in different areas.

Keep things simple

I kept things simple and gave myself a lot of grace especially on days where I could only focus for 30 minutes or not at all.

Now that I’m back to work at the studio, I’ve wanted to get back to a dedicated carved out time each week where I focus on one of my goals to elevate my brand over the course of a quarter.

Last week I shared my process in our Facebook community, and today I’m excited to share with you all about how to find time to elevate your brand.

Identify your goals

First things first, let’s take a look at your goals. We have six more months to go in 2020, and I’m hopeful that we can still take action towards our goals and make an impact. So go, grab your goal’s list, revise, edit, and let’s make an action plan.

Now let’s take a look at some of your goals that might fit under the category of branding or that you might need to elevate your brand in order to reach that goal.

Let’s say a new website is on your list.

Small action items to get that accomplished might be:

✅new copy that aligns more with your business presently

✅new photos for different landing pages (main site, bio, contact)

✅changing your brand colors or logo

✅adding a helpful resource like a lead magnet

You have your goal, action items, and now you need to find the time.

Decide which day of the week will be your “elevate your brand day”.

Yes, we’re going to give it a name and a specific time slot on our weekly calendar that becomes a non-negotiable. You can start with 30 minutes or if you can, block out 90 minutes.

Drive all of your focus and energy into the one thing that you’re working on, and I promise you that if you do the work, those small steps, those small chunks of time will add up to big results.

Don’t forget to give yourself room for grace, but no excuses . If you need to decide each week what day that week will be best, it’s okay to do that too.

Who’s ready to elevate their brand this week?

Join the conversation here inside the Facebook Community and share one thing you’re working on this week.

How to Build a Brand that Connects

Wed, 20 May 2020 14:12:23 GMT

How to Build a Brand that Connects

Back in the day when Google Maps didn’t exist and MapQuest had not yet started, there was only one option to get you from point A to point B, a handy, dandy Roadmap.

I never will forget my first big road trip from Alabama to North Carolina. It was an adventure.

Things were going well, and we were on schedule until I took a business route instead of the highway route. YIKES!

Let’s just insert these infamous words into my road trip…Are we there yet?

Although that alternate route took a few more hours than originally planned, I made it safely to my move-in day for college. True story!

As I’ve built my business for the last eight years, there have been some alternate routes taken, lessons learned, twist and turns, and at times driving in the wrong direction.

Having a roadmap at the beginning would have saved me time and money.

I spent time and a lot of money on the wrong things.

Most business owners start with their logo, fonts, color choices, and website. Yes, those are all important but they can also be expensive, time-consuming, and cause you to get stuck with paralysis analysis.

Believe me, you might go through many iterations and rebranding of designs and graphics until you figure out the right one.

What if you could start somewhere different? What if you could start moving forward right now and build a brand that connects? What if you start today to elevate your brand to stand out from all of the white noise in your market?

I’ve taken everything that I’ve learned over the last eight years of building my business and brand, and have designed a roadmap to show you how to build a brand that connects. For the first time ever, I’m hosting a free, five-day online workshop with the roadmap that I wish I would have had.

Here are the topics for each day of The Brand Connection Workshop:

Day One: The Magic In the Story – Building your know, like, trust factor

Day Two: Create and Connect – Stand out with your message

Day Three: YOU are the X-Factor

Day Four: Consistency Leads to Conversion

Day Five: Plan and Take Action

There aren’t enough emojis to express my excitement for this workshop!! You don’t want to miss it. We are kicking off day one today, Monday, April 27th inside our Facebook Group and there is still time to register.

Are you in? Register here: https://view.flodesk.com/pages/5e84e056375c490028ad08a5

Productivity Tips for Small Business Owners

Wed, 01 Apr 2020 11:40:30 GMT

Productivity Tips for Small Business Owners

I’m a planner at heart and many of my plans, for now, have shifted and changed along with the rest of the world due to the coronavirus.

Today, I’m sharing some productivity tips for small business owners that I’m using in my own business while getting to work from home.

We moved my office back home almost two weeks ago. Although it’s only been two weeks it seems like it’s been months. Raise your hand, if you wake up most days wondering what day of the week it is? Me too!

One of the first things that I set out to do was to figure out ways to stay productive and to use this time to work on my business.

As small business owners, we often find ourselves working in our businesses and not having as much time as we’d like to work on our business.

Being in a creative space has certainly helped to keep my mind positively and intentionally focused.

I stumbled upon this quote on Canva and it is so true;

Do something today that your future self will thank you for.

So, what are you doing today?

If you need a few ideas to get you started, I’m sharing some here and you can download the entire list of 14 small productivity tips for small business owners to elevate your business, keep your momentum going, and thrive as we all pivot and shift.

Update your website . Now is a great time to update your website. Update your photos, add new content, contact information, and update your contact form.
Client Experience. Your client experience is an essential part of your brand. Walkthrough your current client onboarding process, is it efficient and streamlined? Take it a step further and see if there are ways that you can make your client experience better. Make changes as needed. I recently made a switch to Honeybook , and I love it. I’ll share more later, but you can grab a coupon here.
Create. Create some new content in Canva that will serve your audience. Canva is a tool that I use in my business for designing pdfs, ebooks, and graphics. The graphics I’m using in the blog were all made in Canva!

So, what are you doing today?

I have 14 Productivity tips waiting for you!

Disclosure: Affiliate links are used in this post and I will earn a commission if you decide to purchase using the links I provided. I was not paid to leave honest reviews of products that I love and use in my business.

3 Reasons You Need Professional Photos

Thu, 12 Mar 2020 15:58:01 GMT

3 Reasons You Need Professional Photos

Have you ever felt serious FOMO looking at all the photos of the live events put on by people like Rachel Hollis, Amy Porterfield, and Jasmine Star? I have. In fact, that’s another goal that I need to get on my 2020 list — attend one of those events!

I recently did a Facebook Live talking about the three reasons why you need professional photos from your speaking events, and FOMO is one of those reasons.

I know how much you’re already spending on your event, and why a photographer may not seem like the highest priority.

And sure, everyone will be taking photos with their phones anyway — but do you really want to walk away from an amazing event with a few blurry iPhone photos?

If you are a speaker, or if speaking is something you’re considering getting into, I highly recommend you start looking for a photographer to partner with.

Here’s a few reasons why…

You WILL want high-resolution photos from your event to use on your website, social media, and other promotional material. Good quality images will serve you better for writing blog posts and social media, so you can share all the highlights and create a buzz about your next event.

Having professional photos that show you on stage being your amazing self, engaging with your audience, and having fun behind the scenes is a fantastic way to show off all the hard work your team put into making your event the best setting for learning and growth — and make your next event sell even more tickets.
Attendees love to share all their favorite moments from the events they attend, so you have the prime opportunity to 10x the sharing and keep the momentum going long past the day of the event.

Your photos should be ready for sharing within a week of your event, so carve out lots of time to post and encourage your attendees to tag and share. Best case scenario, they will share those photos with a few words about how attending your event gave them the clarity that they needed, or lit a fire in them.
Lastly, FOMO. Fear of missing out is real. I feel it a lot, especially when I see pics of my favorite speaker on stage and know that I missed out on a crazy Beyonce dance party. How do I know there was a party? Because I saw the photos… and decided that I’m not missing out again next year. Which is exactly what you want your audience to be thinking!

I love seeing you win, and I hope that these tips are helpful!

Did you know that you can book me for your next speaking event as an add on for my yearly Personal Brand Packages?

Click here to book a consultation and find out more.

Styling Your Brand Photoshoot

Thu, 12 Mar 2020 11:39:12 GMT

Styling Your Brand Photoshoot

“WHAT SHOULD I WEAR FOR MY PERSONAL BRAND PHOTOSHOOT?”

That’s a question I get from just about every brand photography client I work with.

And I get it. Not knowing what to wear can be a huge barrier for entrepreneurs looking to plan a photo shoot. You want to wear clothes that make you look great AND also look great on camera.

Unfortunately, we can’t all have a personal stylist to dress us or a personal shopper to find all those perfectly fitting items.

But you’re not in this alone!

I love helping my clients style their personal brand photoshoots, and it’s actually one of the things that are included with every session that I offer.

Here are a few things to consider when you’re deciding what to wear for your personal brand photoshoot:

1) First things first, let’s talk about your brand messages, style, and your dream client. How do you want to show up? Are you going for polished and professional, or business casual? Yoga pants and a cozy sweatshirt? Knowing how you want to show up and what your dream clients are looking for will guide your outfit choices and help you put a plan together for what to wear.

2) Do you want a variety of styles, so that you can write captions for social media and have the photos to match?

3) What’s going on in your business this quarter? Anything special that you want specific photos or styles for? Thinking about this will guide your choices in wardrobe selection for the photos that you need.

4) Are you choosing to set designs at the studio and adding in your own accessories to make it specific to your brand? Or are you shooting at different locations? You’ll want to prepare a wardrobe that also makes sense for where and when you’re being photographed.

Are you ready to get your personal brand photoshoot rolling?

I’d love to work with you on a highly customized brand photography session — and styling is included.

Book your spot here ! And be sure to join my Facebook community here !

Winter Meditech Wedding | Michelle + Adam

Fri, 06 Mar 2020 16:00:06 GMT

Today, I’m delighted to share beautiful moments from Michelle and Adam’s winter Meditech wedding this past weekend. Although it was a brisk February day, the warmth of the atrium, palm trees, planters filled with fiddle leaf and lilies, gave no resemblance or feeling of winter at all.

Here’s more about their story, and a few heartwarming moments from their day.

Two long weeks would pass before she checked her voicemail messages to discover that yes, he did call her. And although it was two weeks before she’d return his call, he was happy that she did.

They have agreed to disagree on the details of that two-week pause, and they are sticking with their versions of exactly what happened.

Their proposal story (Adam’s words)…In September 2018, I hijacked a performance of Much Ado About Nothing (with a valiant assist from the cast and crew) and turned it into Much Ado About Something, and asked Michelle to marry me. Luckily, she didn’t take two weeks to decide this time!

Isn’t that the sweetest!

When I first spoke to Michelle over the phone to hear more about her and Adam’s wedding day, her love for him, their love for each other, and their love for their family and friends was immediately felt in every way.

They have been through some painful times of sickness, trials, and losing Michelle’s father, uncle and grandfather in the fall of last year. They have already walked through so much together. Through those moments of sadness and hard times, they’ve reminded each other that no matter how difficult they are always on the same team.

Their wedding day was a day of celebration, a joyful time for their families, laughter with friends, the most heart-warming moments, and a few surprises for Adam.

Michelle signed some of her vows to him, and there was a surprise for him during the reception as some of their friends and family learned to sign some verses of a song to him.

Are you getting teary-eyed too?! I know, it was a special day for them in many ways.

Their winter Meditech wedding ceremony was absolutely beautiful. Their chuppah was adorned with bundles of roses and greenery set in front of a serene fountain. Before the ceremony, they’d share their first look here as well and signed their Ketubah on the balcony overlooking the ceremony space.

After the breaking of the glass and a celebratory walk back down the aisle on their new journey together, the celebration would continue with their reception at Saphire Estate in Sharon, MA.

Family and friends were welcomed with nods to their passion for theatre on each table. Decorated lines and famous play titles with beautiful centerpieces designed by Fabiano Florist set by warm candlelight created an inviting atmosphere.

It was a lovely evening, with laugh out loud moments during the speeches, the sweetest first dance, and even more dancing once Spencer opened the dance floor.

Michelle and Adam, thank you for the honor to be part of your day. I have loved getting to know you both, and it was a joy to see you celebrate your special day with your family and friends. You make the best team, and I hope that you have a fabulous honeymoon!! xo, Shawon

Winter Meditech Wedding

Venue: Saphire Estate , Coordinator: Emma

Florist: Fabiano Florist

Bride’s Dress: David’s Bridal, Melissa Sweet

Hair Artist: The Behind the Scenes Girl, Morgan

Makeup Artist: Erick Vargas Beauty

DJ: Spencer Henderson, Beat Train Productions

Photography: Shawon Davis Photography

Winter Meditech Wedding | Michelle + Adam

This post reflects a season when I was photographing weddings-but today, my work is fully centered on branding photography and helping women entrepreneurs show up with clarity, confidence, and purpose.

Through my workshops, retreats, and in-studio experiences, I help you feel put together, on brand, and confident every time you show up for your business-whether that’s online, in a room, or in front of the camera.

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

How To Prepare For Your Headshot Photo

Thu, 13 Feb 2020 15:56:05 GMT

How To Prepare For Your Headshot Photo

I get to work with the best hair and makeup artists in town at my studio! And, over time, I’ve learned a few things about how to prepare for your photoshoot from these amazing pros. Their hair and makeup expertise aligned with my knowing a few things about lighting, posing and what looks great for the camera equals absolute magic!

Ready to learn how to prepare for your headshot photo?

Okay, here we go:

First things first, consider your desired outcome for your photos. Professional, Business Casual, Casual Chic? Do you want a variety? Knowing this will guide your wardrobe, hair, makeup, and posing.
Skincare. Let’s kick your skincare routine up a notch. Diligently commit to your skincare routine and keep your skin moisturized. Water is important to our skin, so make sure that you’re staying hydrated leading up to your photoshoot. Continue to use your favorite products, and avoid trying anything new before your photoshoot.
Hair. We want to add a little oomph to our daily style, but nothing crazy. A blowout is a great option.
Makeup. I know that we want to look as natural as possible in our headshots, and when it comes to makeup that is camera-ready, we want to apply more than what we’d naturally wear so that it looks natural on camera. A professional makeup artist can help you gauge where to land with your makeup application. In the studio, we have a gradual makeup application chart to help you decide what you’re comfortable with and what we know will look good on camera.
Get your wardrobe ready. Start in your closet first, and choose colors that you love. If your brand color isn’t the best on you, consider a complementary color. If you need something new, let’s head out to your pillar store(s). Your pillar store is the one that you can always count on for your perfect fit and style.
Dryclean, steam, or iron everything that you’re bringing to your shoot. If it looks wrinkled in person, the wrinkles will be magnified on camera.
Try on your outfits a week or so before your shoot to ensure that you love what you’re wearing. Don’t forget your underpinnings for each outfit.
Get a good night’s rest, eat a good breakfast, and leave early so you can arrive relaxed.
Be prepared to have fun.
Imagine how you’re going to feel with new photos for your business.

Making sure you’ve got the right team behind you is really everything. It’s the difference between classy, beautiful photos and old school Glamour Shots!

Live in the greater Boston Metro area?

You can book a spot for a Mini-Luxe Headshot photoshoot. Professional hair and makeup, and a wardrobe consultation are all included.

I’ve got you covered every step of the way so that you can skip on to tips 9 and 10.

Sound good?

Book your spot here!

When To Update Your Headshots

Thu, 06 Feb 2020 15:54:21 GMT

When To Update Your Headshots

This is a question I’m often asked by business professionals who might have that single headshot photo they’ve been holding on to, and using for the last 10 years.

Before I dive into how often you need to update your headshots, you might discover the answer for yourself, by taking a look at these two different scenarios.

Scenario One

You’re out at a networking event, you’ve made a great connection with someone, you hand them your business card, and they take a double look.

You respond, and say, I know I’ve been so busy for the last 10 years and I haven’t had time to update my headshot. I promise, I am the same person!!

Scenario Two

You’re going through a website redesign, and your website designer gives you a list of photos they need for your brand new, amazing website.

You respond and say, oh, what’s wrong with the ones we have from 5 years ago. I look great in those.

Your website designer says, well if we were designing this website 5 years ago, they would be perfect. BUT we’re not, and we need pictures of how you look now.

Having recent, up to date headshots is important. But many business owners think things like this:

I’ve gained weight in the past 5 years, and I’m going to lose some weight first.
I don’t like how I look in photos, so I’m just going to keep this one from 10 years ago, when I looked better.
It’s so much work to figure out what to wear.
I have to run around to get my hair and makeup done. It’s too much time to devote to something like pictures.

These are excuses that keep you stuck with the same old headshots and can have a negative impact on your brand.

Don’t let these excuses hold you back from getting the new headshots you need as a business professional.

In my opinion, you should update your headshot at a minimum of every two years, if not, once a year.

Here are a few things to consider when you’re thinking about how often you need to update your headshot:

If it’s been more than two years it’s definitely time to consider an update.
Are you updating your website? Update your photos too. This is a perfect time to invest in new photos to match your fresh, new redesign. Have an online launch party on the social media platforms where you show up, and include your new photos too.
Have you ever updated your Facebook profile photo and received a flood of comments? Imagine doing that with a new headshot every year. That would likely start plenty of conversations, wouldn’t it?
You find yourself making excuses for why you haven’t had a new headshot every time you hand out a business card or share your website.

Your headshot is often your first handshake as a business owner.

Your website, Facebook business page, Linked In profile, and Instagram feed are often the first way your clients find you and interact first with your business.

You want to make sure your headshot reflects your business and brand in a way you love, feel confident sharing, and that attracts the dream clients you want to work with.

Did you relate to any of these scenarios or excuses?

Are you ready to update your headshot?

You can book a spot for a Mini-Luxe Headshot photoshoot.

Professional hair and makeup, and a wardrobe consultation are all included.

Why You Need Brand Photos

Tue, 28 Jan 2020 15:52:30 GMT

Image does matter, and first impressions can’t be undone.

Here are five reasons why you need personal brand photos.

Whether that’s right or wrong is actually irrelevant, because at the end of the day – if you want to scale a profitable business, you need to take your online presence seriously.

Far too many business owners don’t have nearly as many beautifully branded photos as they need. They use the same old, tired images, and they grab what they can with their iPhone.

iPhone photos are great fillers, but they don’t replace quarterly branding sessions.

If you’re a business owner or entrepreneur, you know that building a business is not an easy feat. There are tons of things to juggle, and sometimes making the time necessary for branding shoots can be quite the challenge. But, it’s 100% necessary in today’s world.

Don’t believe me?

Build your know, like, trust factor. When it comes to building your know, like, trust factor your photos matter. Specifically photos of YOU. Gone are the days of hiding behind our work. People want to see who you are. They want to see the face behind the brand. They want to see some personality and relatability. They want to be able to envision themselves working with you. Your brand photos, when taken by a professional that understands branding, can help you immediately connect with your ideal clients.
You have less than 8 seconds. Attention spans are short, and you have less than 8 seconds to grab that attention when someone lands on your website. If you don’t immediately make a good impression, they will hop off that website faster than Rachel Hollis can sell out a room. You want your personality to shine through your photos, and you want it to shine through immediately.
Connect with your dream client. The right photos will immediately connect with your ideal client and should repel those who aren’t. Do you work with high-level executives? Then a high-end, professional photoshoot is in order. Is your brand polished, sophisticated, and classic? Is it relaxed and chic? Whatever the feel of your brand is, you want photos that represent that, so your dream clients are attracted to you. Take them on a journey, show them how they’ll feel when they work you, use your photos to fully represent your brand message, so your ideal clients know you care for them.
Set yourself apart. Raise your hand if the industry you’re in is oversaturated. One of the best ways to set yourself apart is through your own personal branding photos. Photos that are able to tell your brand’s story and represent your brand message will cut through the noise, and put you in a class of ONE. Although you might be in an oversaturated market, you are what’s COMPLETELY unique about your business. Sharing your brand story through photos of you is both powerful and impactful.
Showing up online. You want to be where your dream clients are hanging out. You want to show up consistently and be able to engage with them. Yes, quotes are awesome. Encouraging words and inspiration are also part of my brand, but let’s face it quotes are everywhere. Consistent brand photoshoots that keep you stocked up on your own personal brand photos, give you a never-ending supply of ways to show up, authentically and professionally, online.

Whether you run your business online or off, showing up powerfully online is a non-negotiable for business growth. Build a relationship with a local branding photographer, and set up a minimum of quarterly shoots. In doing so, you will keep your online presence powerfully stocked with images that connect.

Why You Need Brand Photos

Why You Only Need ONE Brand Photographer

Tue, 28 Jan 2020 15:50:06 GMT

I’ve seen a bit of a phenomenon in the business world when it comes to brand photography. People seem to hop from one photographer to another, never really landing on one specific photographer to help them represent their brand.

Whatever the goal is, working with a photographer who fully understands where you are going and what you want to accomplish will make the reality of hitting those goals, a whole lot more likely.

Recently, I did a Facebook Live, discussing the benefits of working with one personal brand photographer all year long.

While I get the appeal of having lots of different types of images – I actually believe that doing this hurts your brand longterm.

Do you need to stay with the same brand photographer for the rest of your life? No. But, I do think you should make at least a year-long commitment. Here’s why…

Your brand photoshoots have to begin with your goals.

It’s important that you are clear on your goals for the year. No, you don’t need every detail mapped out, but you do want to have an overall understanding of where you are going.

Maybe you want to:

Launch a new online digital course
Host a live event
Write a book
Start a podcast
Offer a few seasonal promotions
Host a webinar or masterclass
Celebrate your 5-year business anniversary
Take your real estate business to the next level
Show up consistently online and engage more with your audience

Why?

When you work with one personal brand photographer all year, they really get to know your business inside and out. They begin to fully understand your mission and your brand. The cherry on top? A seasoned pro can guide and direct you through all of your shoots to ensure you have all of the images you need to bring your goals to life, in a clear effective way.

Brand Consistency.

You want to build up enough brand consistency that as soon as someone sees your photo, they know exactly who you are and what you’re about. When you work with more than one photographer, your images often lack the consistency they need to be truly recognizable. And don’t worry, things won’t get boring or repetitive. A good brand photographer knows how to create fresh images that are cohesive. So, you will stop the scroll with something new and novel, while also building trust through consistent images.

A true teammate.

You want to work with someone who’s not just taking photos but someone who will be there to high five you at the end of the year, and every accomplishment in between. When you work with the same person all year long, you end up adding another team member to your rocketship.

When you work with a photographer who knows you and your brand, who can make you feel comfortable quickly, you save tons of time. When they understand your goals, they can help you visually represent every piece of the puzzle that will help you achieve those goals. Ultimately at the end of the day, your brand stays consistent, you have plenty of content, and you have someone there to guide you as you pursue your goals!

So, if you don’t already have one, be sure to find a brand photographer in your area that understands what business owners need to thrive online. If you are a Boston (or surrounding areas) business owner, looking for brand photos all year long, I’d love to chat with you. My Brand Builder package has everything you need to build a consistent online presence for all of 2020.

Click here to book a call.

Why You Only Need ONE Brand Photographer

My First Solo Business Retreat to Plan Goals for 2020 - Shawon Davis Photography

Wed, 11 Dec 2019 15:47:59 GMT

Last week for the first time in my business, I went away for a solo business retreat to plan goals for 2020. It was one of the best decisions that I’ve made this year, and I plan to continue to make it a priority. Today, I’m going to share what I set out to do each day, some tools that I used, and a few lightbulb moments that I had along the way.

But first, let me share a quick hot seat moment with you. In January, I was presenting a speaker to a women’s organization that I led. The speaker’s topic focused on critical processes that were needed to have success in your business. I was excited to learn from her, and I casually mentioned that I had not yet set my goals for the year.

Gasp! It was January, quarter one had already started, and I knew that I was not ready. I was in the hot seat, and I’m grateful that I was.

Less than a year later, I knew that it was time to have a business retreat to plan goals.

I’m a planner at heart, and I knew that I wanted to get the most out of every single day of my retreat. Sure, I was away, but this was not a vacation. It was time to focus.

I had three days ahead of working on my business, setting goals for next year, writing, and working on some small projects that I wanted to finish.

Day One. Day one was goal setting day. To get anywhere, you need a plan and a roadmap. Otherwise, you end up somewhere wondering how you got there.

I use many different tools in my business , but my laptop with Trello ready to help me organize things, the prettiest Powersheets Planner, my Focus Planner, this wall calendar , stickers, too many of my favorite pens, post-it notes in every size, and the journal that I’ve scribbled down some big, crazy, scary ideas were some of the tools that I used on my business retreat to plan goals.

The day started at 4:45 am with a cup of tea, some quiet time, writing down affirmations, and then writing about where I wanted to be in 10 years.

As I wrapped up this time, I decided to set 90-minute blocks to work through Day One.

I began with my Powersheets Planner as it has helped me focus, bring more clarity, and set goals with intention.

For the time that I’ve used Powersheets, there has typically been a prompt to think about your life when you’re 80 years old. It’s one of my favorites! This year I loved it even more because the prompt focused on considering what will matter and what won’t matter then.

I didn’t think that I would have a “word of the year” this year, but after working through the thoughtful questions, looking at the goals that I’d set, and visualizing my year, and my mission, the word purpose stood out.

In everything that I do in my business this year, I want to always consider the purpose. As I walk through the year and do hard things like showing up on an Instagram or Facebook Live and no one shows up, or even doing the things that are an established part of my business, I want to always consider the reason it’s done or created and why it exists. (thank you dictionary dot.com)

I want to ask myself these purpose-driven questions.

Who will it serve? Is it serving or will it serve my clients well? What purpose will it serve other women business owners or moms who are running businesses? What purpose will it serve in my life?

After working through my planner and setting my goals, it was time to map out my calendar. I’m so thankful that I came across Shay Cochrane sharing about this calendar in IG stories. Timely!

I love having visuals and being able to see the year at a glance made me do a happy dance. I purchased the calendar here and had it printed at Staples for about 40 dollars.

I mapped out my calendar starting with the most important dates like birthdays, graduations, and family vacation. Then I added booked weddings and personal branding and headshot photoshoots happening at the studio. I also used post-it notes to highlight launches, business strategy sessions, and business retreats.

I know that having this visual in front of me every day will help me to pace myself and business, avoid burnout, and help me think through steps of accomplishing my goals.

I had so many lightbulb moments, and one of them was how much this calendar was going to help me as a mom running a business. I can visually see my busy times, and plan for when I need to add Blue Apron back to our menu. I want to have healthy meals, but when busy seasons hit so do the pizza boxes.

Day Two and Day Three were long days. I set a goal to write all of my blog content for the first quarter. Now my list of what I wanted to do, had about 10 things on it which included adding two pages to my website, but I had to choose the one thing that would make the biggest impact on the day to day in my business.

I set my timer for 45-minute blocks and I got to work.

I finished 11 out of 13, and I’m calling that a WIN!

While I wanted to push through the last two, I did want to have a couple of hours before I left to breathe and envision a great year ahead.

As business owners, we often spend most of our days working in our business and taking blocked off time, and doing that often, to work on our business is hands-down the only way that we’re going to continue to thrive, grow and walk in our roles as leaders.

When it comes to planning and goal setting for your business, what are some things that you would like to learn more about? Leave me a comment below.

My First Solo Business Retreat to Plan Goals for 2020

Hyatt Regency Cambridge Wedding | Leah + Rob

Mon, 02 Dec 2019 15:45:42 GMT

Happy Monday! There’s snow on the ground today here in Massachusetts, and Leah and Rob’s Hyatt Regency Cambridge wedding is coming to the blog today! I’d say, it’s a happy Monday indeed!

The Creative Team

Venue: Hyatt Regency Cambridge

Bride’s Dress: Bella Bridal Shoppe – Woburn , Allison Webb Designer

Bridesmaid’s Dresses: David’s Bridal

Tuxes: Men’s Wearhouse

Hair and Makeup Artist: Hair by Christine

Videographer: Next Level Films, Lisa Serino

Flowers: Central Square Florist

Cake: Montilios Bakery

Band: Beantown

Today, I’m delighted to share beautiful moments from Leah and Rob’s wedding day that was filled with the warmest smiles and hugs, joy, laughter, and so much love.

Every summer, since they began dating four years ago, they’ve spent time at their favorite place. That favorite place that holds many special memories for them is Martha’s Vineyard.

Last summer while visiting their favorite place, Rob took Leah to all of the places that they had gone the very first time that they’d taken this trip together. One of those places was Memorial Wharf overlooking the water.

On their first trip to Martha’s Vineyard, Leah told Rob that she loved him, and on this trip, Rob proposed and asked Leah to marry him.

Are you smiling right now?!

Their day began with getting ready at the Hyatt Regency Cambridge and would continue there with their ceremony, cocktail hour and reception.

Leah and her bridesmaids were having the best time laughing, singing, and I think I remember a few dance moves happening.

After spending some time with Leah, I went to see Rob for his getting ready time. He was just as relaxed as I’d seen him earlier that day while chatting about a few details.

Leah’s gown was stunning. She wore a beautiful Allison Webb gown that was perfect for her.

We were able to venture outside along the Charles River for a short time for their first look. It was a magical time that would lead to many more heartwarming moments ahead in their day.

They were surrounded by love on their wedding day, and the celebration for them was indelible.

Congratulations, Leah and Rob, it was an absolute joy to get to know you and to be part of your wedding day! I hope that you will always look back at your wedding photos and see, feel, and relive the happiness, positive energy and overall excitement of getting married. Sending big hugs your way! xo, Shawon

Hyatt Regency Cambridge Wedding

Hyatt Regency Cambridge Wedding | Leah + Rob

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Alden Castle Wedding | Katherine + Pete

Thu, 26 Sep 2019 23:56:27 GMT

Alden Castle Wedding | Katherine + Pete

Ahhh, I’m so excited to share some favorite moments from Katherine and Pete’s beautiful Alden Castle wedding on Saturday.

A country music concert, Fenway Park, and Citgo. What do these three things have in common?

The perfect combination for Katherine and Pete meeting each other for the first time. It was a magical moment and they both left telling their loved ones all about this great guy that I just met(from Katherine), and (from Pete) this great girl that he met and spent the whole night talking to his best friend about.

Three months would go by before their first date happened almost 900 miles away from the place where they’d met. A relationship soon blossomed. Many letters, phone calls, video chats, and coveted weekends together meant so much to them as they dated long distance.

On Saturday, stories were recounted and shared about that country music concert, Fenway Park, Citgo, and Katherine and Pete’s randomly meeting at what would seem a coincidence. From the very beginning, their friends and family listened, supported and encouraged them both.

You can not help but smile when you see the two of them together.

It was only fitting that one of the best days of their lives would be celebrated in the city where it all began.

Their wedding ceremony was held at St. Cecilia’s Parish in Boston. Laughter, gentle gazing into the eyes of each other, and the sweetest smiles exchanged as snippets of their story and glimpses into their hearts were shared.

They are both compassionate, kind, and have a heart for serving others.

There was an absolute, collective joy for them as they walked back down the aisle to start their new journey together.

After family photos at the church, we traveled to Alden Castle for their reception and wedding party photos.

If you saw my behind the scenes stories on Instagram, you may have noticed that they had the best tribe ever. They were ready to dance with them during photos and the dancing continued as soon as their band opened up the dance floor.

It was the best party!

Katherine and Pete, thank you so much for the honor to be part of your day and your lives for the past year. It was a joy getting to see all of the people who love you celebrate with you. I’m so excited for you two, and will always be cheering you on!! xo, Shawon

Alden Castle Wedding Photos

The Creative Team

Venue: Alden Castle

Bride’s Dress: Ve’Lace Bridal by Justin Alexandre

Bridesmaid’s Dresses: BHLDN

Tuxes: Men’s Warehouse

Flowers: B. Darling Floral

Hair and Makeup Artist: Pretty Wife Beauty

Cake Artist: Alden Castle

Rentals: PEAK Events

Band: The Sweetbeats

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops .

Wedding at Venezia Boston | Alex + Matt

Thu, 19 Sep 2019 15:40:21 GMT

If you need some sunshine on your face today, you’re in the right place because Alex and Matt’s wedding at Venezia Boston will give you all the sunshine that you need.

The Creative Team

Venue: Venezia Boston

Bride’s Dress: Bride ‘n’ Belle – Medford, MA, Designer : Morilee by Madeline Gardner

Bridesmaid’s Dresses: Bride ‘n’ Belle

Tuxes: Men’s Wearhouse

Flowers: Winston Flowers

Cake: Montilio’s

Hair: Beauty Boston/Special Event Beauty

Makeup Artist: Liz O’Malley Makeup

Band: Silver Arrow Band

My eyes lit up when I spoke to Alex and Matt last fall to learn more about them and their wedding day.

When I asked them what they wanted to see and feel from their day twenty years from now they talked about candid, genuine moments, little looks, and they wanted to be taken right back to that day.

I hope that they will see and feel these moments when they see Alex getting ready with her mom and bridesmaids. She’ll remember her aerobic activities to keep her nerves away and the butterflies that she felt in her stomach.

I hope they will remember and feel the magic of their first look and how it felt to see each other for the first time.

I hope that Alex will feel Matt placing his mother’s bracelet on her arm again.

I hope they will see and feel the laughter as Matt danced around and Alex got to only bend her knees so that her dress would stay clean and dry.

I hope they will remember the sunshine that came out after a morning of clouds and downpours of rain.

I hope they will feel the genuine moments of deep love, laughter, and joy through each reading at their ceremony, their vows, placing their rings, and their walk back down the aisle together.

I hope that every time they see themselves dancing they will hear their first dance song and be taken right back to that day.

Congratulations, Alex and Matt!! Thank you for the honor to be part of your day. It has been an absolute joy to get to know you both. I’m so excited for you, Teddy and Bear:) You’ve got a lot of sunshine in your life!! xo, Shawon

Here are a few favorite moments from Alex and Matt’s Venezia Boston wedding day.

Wedding at Venezia Boston Photos

Wedding at Venezia Boston | Alex + Matt

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Summer Wedding at The Villa | Keri + Todd

Thu, 12 Sep 2019 15:38:57 GMT

Get ready because Keri and Todd’s summer wedding at The Villa this past Sunday is going to make you smile, and you might need a tissue too. Don’t say I didn’t warn you:)

The Creative Team

Venue: The Villa

Bride’s Dress: Essence of Australia CC’s Boutique in St. Petersburg FL

Bridesmaid’s Dresses: David’s Bridal

Tuxes: Stefon Loving

Flowers: Tangled Web

Hair and Makeup Artist: Danielle Keefe Artistry

Cake Artist: Stillman Dairy Farm

DJ: American Entertainment

Videography: Clear Vision

I have to share their story again because it’s a good one!

Shortly after they began dating, literally six months in, Keri moved away to the windy city to attend a doctoral program. They were committed to each other and made their long-distance relationship work for 4 years.

They’ve had many adventures together during their relationship, and moving back to Boston last summer was one of them.

Upon moving back, they decided that they would continue having adventures together in Boston and made it special with what they called their, “30 for 30”. They set out for 30 adventures all over the city, and each adventure was documented with a selfie! LOVE that!

They enjoyed adventures for the entire summer, and on their very last adventure, as they began to take their last selfie, Todd said, “Our adventures aren’t over. I want to spend the rest of my adventures with you.”

When I walked into the Grand Ballroom, their reception space at The Villa, it warmed my heart to see each table displaying one of the many adventures that they’ve had together.

Tree Top Adventures, Dube’s, Corn Mazes, and Free throw Fridays-LOVE!!

Reading each one made me smile because Keri and Todd know how to have fun together and most of all they spend time cultivating and nurturing their relationship.

The tears starting during both of their getting ready times as they read letters that they had written for each other to be read on their wedding day.

They are loving, kind, thoughtful, and so much fun together!

The tears continued during their first look as Todd was overjoyed by the beauty of his beautiful bride. Keri was stunning and glowing from the inside out.

And speaking of glowing, wait until you see their photos from sunset. LOVE!!

Their ceremony was filled with sweet words, readings, tears, laughter, and joyous celebration as they jumped the broom at the end of their ceremony.

It was a day of many magical moments for their summer wedding at The Villa. A collective emotion of joy and happiness that was on every face.

Congratulations, Keri and Todd!! It has been a joy getting to know you, and what an honor to be part of your wedding day!! Cheering for you always as you celebrate many new adventures on your journey together. Sending big hugs to you both xo, Shawon

Enjoy a few favorites from their day!

Summer Wedding at The Villa

Summer Wedding at The Villa | Keri + Todd

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Summer Wedding at The Cape Club | East Falmouth, MA | Katie + Kevin

Fri, 06 Sep 2019 15:37:35 GMT

I’m so excited to share a few heartwarming moments from Katie and Kevin’s beautiful summer wedding at The Cape Club this past weekend.

The Creative Team

Venue: The Cape Club

Bride’s Dress: Serena by Maggie Sottero Katherine’s Bridals in Alexandria, Virginia

Bridesmaid’s Dresses: Azazie

Flowers: Flowers by Anna

Hair and Makeup Artist: Lyndsay Simon Beauty

Cake Artist: The Chocolate Rose

DJ: Cape Tunes

Videography: Shining Light Films

They were indeed surrounded by love as friends and family from near and far gathered to celebrate them.

They were even more surrounded by love with the sweet presence of Katie’s mom who loved her daughter dearly and Kevin just as much.

There were many tears of joy, stories told that made everyone laugh, and a beautiful time of celebration for Katie and Kevin’s new journey together.

They have already walked through seasons of sheer happiness as well as seasons of crying on each other’s shoulders and supporting and encouraging each other.

I think that everyone agrees also that they are the best puppy parents to Rocket!

Their entire day from getting ready to having the best party ever was at The Cape Club.

Their summer wedding at the Cape Club was filled Classic nautical hints of inspiration of beautiful Cape Cod were seen in the reception decor, bouquets of hydrangea for Katie and her bridesmaids, hanging vases down the aisle, and pillars of more hydrangea where they’d stand to say their vows.

I love that they decided to have an unplugged ceremony so that everyone could smile, laugh, and be in the moment with them during their ceremony.

As they walked down the aisle, everyone was able to be present with them once again as bubbles filled their air in celebration of this amazing couple.

Congratulations, Katie and Kevin!! It was an honor to be part of your day. I’m so excited for you two, and I’m saying it again because it’s the truth, you two are amazing together. xo, Shawon

Enjoy a few favorites from their day!

Summer Wedding at The Cape Club

Summer Wedding at The Cape Club | Katie + Kevin

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Grand View Wedding | Mendon, MA Photographer | Jen + Kyle

Fri, 09 Aug 2019 15:34:56 GMT

It’s been a joy getting to know Jen and Kyle over the past year, and it was an honor to photograph their Grand View wedding this past weekend. These two are absolute sunshine together and their joy indelible.

Grand View Wedding

The Creative Team

Venue: Grandview | Coordinators, Ashley and Gina

Bride’s Dress: Alexandra’s Bridal Boutique

Tuxes: Men’s Warehouse

Bridesmaids Dresses: Azazie

Flowers: Katydidflowers.com

Linens: XOthegirls

Makeup Artist: Glam Done Right, Erica

Cake: Gerardo’s Bakery

DJ and Uplighting: All Star Entertainment and Uplighting

Videographer: Veiledinmotion.com

Their day was timeless, classic, with hints of sparkle and glam and filled with sweet moments, tears, laughter, warm hugs, and the best smiles.

Over three years ago, while out for a night of fun and games with their friends at Dave and Busters, these two beautiful people met. They were shooting hoops beside each other when Kyle’s ball mistakenly hit Jen in the head. She still laughs about it and says that it was the hit she needed to fall in love with him.

They returned to Dave and Busters for their first date, and that date led to many others and soon a blossoming relationship.

Together they’ve had the most beautiful journey spending time with each other, their families, their friends, cheering for the Bruins, bowling, taking trips to Disney-one of their most favorite places ever, and loving their sweet pup-Diddy!

This weekend, they said yes and I do to continue their beautiful journey that began over four years ago.

Getting Ready at the Chalet

Grand View is a gorgeous wedding venue located in Mendon, MA. The grounds are gorgeous, and the views amazing. Jen and Kyle were in love with the venue the moment they spotted it overlooking the water from one of their favorite restaurants-Alicante.

We started their day with Jen and the bridesmaids getting ready at the Chalet also located on the property. After some candid moments, and getting Jen into her stunning dress, we headed outside for the sweetest first look with her and her dad. LOVE!!

Bride and Groom First Look

After that moment, Jen was tucked away before seeing Kyle for their first look. They were both so excited, and with each passing moment, to know that it was their wedding day became so surreal.

I know that I’ve said it already, but these two are sunshine together!!

I’m so happy that we were able to complete all of their photos including the wedding party and family photos before the ceremony to not only get them to cocktail hour to enjoy their cheese station but also because we had a passing shower to come our way just after they said I do.

Reception Decor

The ballroom was beautifully decorated with flowers from the amazingly talented Kim and Katy with Katydid Flowers . Some glam and sparkle were elegantly used throughout the decor with sequined linens, candle votives, and table numbers.

With the most amazing cheers, they entered into the ballroom and danced their first dance to NSYNC’s God Must Have Spent a Little More Time with You.

Jen and Kyle, it has been an absolute joy getting to know you both. From your first email, to Jen and I talking over an hour on our first call, I knew that you two were special and that your day was going to be beautiful. Thank you for the honor to be part of your day. Enjoy every moment of your honeymoon. It’s going to be an even happier place because you two are there! Sending big hugs to you both! xo, Shawon

Here are a few sweet moments and favorites from their wedding day!

Grand View Wedding

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Grand View Wedding | Jen + Kyle

Wedding Photos at The Villa at Ridder Country Club | Janette + Monty

Tue, 09 Jul 2019 15:33:20 GMT

Janette and Monty’s family and friends have witnessed their beautiful relationship over the past few years, and on Friday during their ceremony, they all responded with a resounding “Yes!” that they were so right for each other. Friends, your Tuesday is about to get a little sweeter because the moments from Janette and Monty’s wedding photos at the Villa at Ridder Country Club are incredibly heartwarming and beautiful.

The Creative Team

Venue: The Villa at Ridder Country Club

Bride’s Dress: Essence of Australia

Makeup Artist: Makemeupri

Cake: Konditormeister

DJ: DJ Super Duke

Videographer: Embark Films

The day started with everyone in preparation for their wedding day at a local hotel nearby. He had a beautifully wrapped Tiffany box and a letter waiting for her, and she had a lovely surprise and letter waiting for him.

It was an emotional day, with so many high notes of love throughout from a thoughtful, caring, kind, sincere, genuine, giving, warm, and joyful couple.

These words are not only mine but were shared from their parents, their best man and maid of honor, their officiant, and so many others on their wedding day.

It only took six minutes together when they first met at a speed dating event to lead to happiness, and after a few dates, it felt as though they’d known each other forever.

Their evening ceremony was held in the fully bloomed gardens just outside The Madera Ballroom a couple of hours before sunset. The iron wrought pergola where they’d stand to say their vows was beautifully decorated with a soft palette of pastel blooms. Also adorning that space was the ceremony broom that they would jump before walking back down the aisle, married, partners for a lifetime. Their faces were filled with so much joy as they “Jumped the Broom”.

I mentioned their ceremony was a couple of hours before sunset, and that meant that the light was perfect for photos. Because most of the wedding party and some family photos happened before the ceremony, we had stunning light for Janette and Monty’s photos. I know you want to scroll down right now, but give me one more minute.

After their gorgeous photos together, that you’re waiting to see, it was time for their reception in the Madera Ballroom. There were classic, timeless and personal touches throughout their day and it continued in the decor of the reception space. They love traveling together, and the place cards at each table were from places they’d visited. LOVE!

They swayed and smiled during their first dance to Whitney Houston’s ‘I Believe in You and Me’. The moment was magical, emotional and filled with love.

Words from their wedding day…
You make me strive to be the best version of myself. When I dream with you, the sky is the limit. When I laugh with you I can’t stop. When I cry you lift me up.

When I asked them over a year ago what they wanted to see and feel from their wedding day photos they told me they wanted to see their story, see their family and friends, feel warmth, relive every moment, travel back in time, and to feel the love and joy.

LOVE!!

Janette and Monty thank you so much for the honor to be part of your wedding day. You two are amazing together, and I too, along with your family and friends, say that you are so right for each other. I hope you’re enjoying your honeymoon with lots of sunshine and sand between your toes. Big hugs to you both!! xo, Shawon

Wedding Photos at The Villa at Ridder Country Club

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Wedding Photos at The Villa at Ridder Country Club | Janette + Monty

Celebrating Seven Years in Business!

Wed, 26 Dec 2018 15:30:55 GMT

Many good things happened this month, and celebrating seven years in business was one of them!

Seven years ago, I decided to take the leap. I had no idea what was ahead. All I knew was that I’d discovered an amazing little box that let light in and allowed me to show others the light that I see in their relationships as couples, families, and beautiful individuals.

I wasn’t looking for it all. It found me.

These past seven years have been nothing short of AMAZING. I have been incredibly blessed to get to know some of the sweetest couples, share their stories, and be present for them on one of the most special days of their lives to photograph the candid, the in between, and relationships of family and friends that they hold dear.

There have been many days that I felt like giving up, days that I thought I’d never fill my calendar and days that I had no idea what I was doing.

For a long time, I felt that I was just a mom with a camera as I allowed side eyes and what people thought, or what I thought they thought, to creep in.

But deep down inside I knew that there was something greater.

Yes, I am a mom with a camera who understand and values fleeting time, I didn’t have a photographer for my wedding day so I value and show up with everything to give for every one of my couples on their wedding day, I value relationships and those that have played a pivotal role in my life. Every single time I pick up my camera, through my lens I see as a mom, a wife, a daughter, a granddaughter, a friend, a sister, and a strong woman.

My dad gave me the BEST advice when I decided after six months of getting a new camera, that I wanted to start a business and become a photographer.

He told me not to wait for anyone to tell me who I was. If I wanted to become a photographer, then go, do, and become.

It has taken time, hard work, lessons to learn, aligning and realigning my why with my values and goals, and the becoming never stops because you never stop growing.

Thank YOU immensely for the honor to be part of your wedding days and special celebrations of life.

I’m SO excited for all to come as I continue to photograph love and joy on the weekends, and photograph life-changing shoots that empower and inspire at the studio during the week.

Thank YOU for being a part of this incredible seven-year journey that can’t stop won’t stop.

Cheers to celebrating seven years in business! The best is yet to come!

More about my journey below with Part I and Part II.

Celebrating Seven Years in Business!

Codman Estate Wedding | Erika + Jon

Tue, 25 Sep 2018 15:28:52 GMT

Starting this Tuesday with a dose of New England charm, a sweet couple, and beautiful moments from their Codman Estate wedding this past weekend. That couple is Erika and Jon and I’m excited to share more about their story and some favorites from their wedding day.

Venue: Codman Estate

Florist: Lotus Designs

Cake: Tastings Catering

DJ: Mike’s Music Mix

They had me at North Carolina.

Well, that’s part of the story.

After some time spent in North Carolina, Jon moved up to Boston for graduate school. That move eventually led to he and Erika crossing paths through an old high school mate of Erika’s who was also friends with Jon.

They formally met on a skiing trip where one of them needed a few skiing tips or safety protection.

The post skiing trip would lead to their exchanging phone numbers and eventually a blossoming relationship.

As their relationship continued to grow, It was clear to their family and friends that they were meant to be. In fact, their parents were in constant anticipation of Jon proposing. Thanksgiving, Christmas, the New Year, and Valentine’s Day were all high-level anticipation days.

On the second night of an impromptu trip to Bermuda, while exploring the edge of the island and watching the night sky, Jon asked Erika to marry him and she said yes. LOVE!!

Their Codman Estate wedding landed on the first day of fall and the day was lovely. The ceremony setting was stunningly elegant with the most gorgeous Italian gardens, sculptures, and a reflecting pool.

Through an exchange of heartfelt vows filled with tears and laughter as they spoke, they promised to love, support, and respect each other forever surrounded by love from their family and friends.

Sheer joy was expressed on both of their faces as they walked back down the aisle together.

After the ceremony, we took a few more family and wedding party photos and then set off to walk around the property for more pictures of just the two of them.

They were able to join the cocktail hour for a short time as we made our way back down the gravel path road leading to the carriage house and stopping for moments in between.

The toasts were encouraging and filled with humorous one-liners, the dancing and singing out loud were the best, and I think Erika and Jon would not want me to end without mentioning that the donuts were delicious!!

Congratulations, Erika and Jon!! It was an honor to be part of your wedding day and celebrate with you! Big hugs to you both!! xo, Shawon

Codman Estate Wedding

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Codman Estate Wedding | Erika + Jon

Boston Seaport District Engagement Photos | Janette + Monty

Mon, 10 Sep 2018 15:26:30 GMT

It’s been a month full of beautiful weddings and engagement sessions! I honestly get to work with the most amazing couples, and today I can’t hit the publish button fast enough to share a sneak peek of Janette and Monty’s Boston Seaport District Engagement photos from last week. Read more about their story, some of the things they love, and enjoy a few favorites from their engagement session.

Janette and Monty met over two years ago at a speed dating event. It only took six minutes together to lead to happiness and you can see it through their eyes and in their smiles in every single photo.

A couple of months would go by after that night of meeting each other, and they went on their first date at Babbo’s Pizzeria.

We were able to stop into Babbo’s for their engagement session, to take a few photos of where that one date would lead into many more to come.

Their story got a little sweeter this year while this travel-loving couple was spending some together in the UK.

Janette had scheduled an afternoon tea, and Monty was planning to propose.

The moment that they arrived at the Langham Hotel in London, Monty spoke with the staff to get them on board with his plans.

Wanting to keep the ring close by his side, Monty would enjoy their tea time while never taking his coat off. Too funny!

The timing became just right the moment Janette stepped away to the ladies room for everything to fall into place. When she came back, the champagne was poured, sweet notes of Whitney Houston’s “Saving All My Love For You” were chiming across piano keys, and warm emotions filled the room. Monty asked Janette to marry him and she said yes!!

We had the best time at their engagement session; it seems like I’ve known them forever! I think I told them that more than once as we strolled through Boston’s Seaport District.

Are you crying, singing, or are you cheering right now?!

Janette and Monty, I am pumped for you two and can’t wait to celebrate with you next year! Yay!!

Here are a few favorites from their Boston Seaport District engagement photos!

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Boston Seaport District Engagement Photos | Janette + Monty

Roger Williams Park Engagement Photos | Jen + Kyle

Thu, 23 Aug 2018 15:24:38 GMT

Today, I’m super excited to share a sneak peek from Jen and Kyle’s Roger Williams Park Engagement photos from earlier this week. Read more about their story, some of the things they love, and enjoy a few favorites from their engagement session.

But first, you guys, I met Diddy this week!! Yes, Diddy!!

Oh, no, not that Diddy -haha!!

I met Diddy the Shih Tzu and he was all kinds of adorable.

Before I go on and on about Diddy, because he has that effect on you, let me talk about Jen and Kyle who are crazy about Diddy and each other.

Jen and Kyle met at Dave and Buster’s in Providence three years ago. Two strangers hanging out with their friends and enjoying a few games.

One of them was enjoying a serious round of hoops when their basketball mistakenly hit a beautiful girl in the head. She describes it as the hit she needed to fall in love with him.

The next time they went to Dave and Buster’s would be for the first date.

That date would turn into more dates to follow, and this March, Kyle asked Jen to marry him!

They love the Patriots, go PATS!!, bowling, and Diddy. I think Diddy should have been first on that list!

We had the best time at their engagement session because they are just ridiculously fun together, loving, and joyful.

This summer season has been a rainy one, so we were thankful to see sunshine on Monday after rescheduling a few times.

We started their Roger Williams Park engagement photos outside of the Japanese Gardens so that we could get Diddy in a few photos at the start of their engagement session.

Diddy was the best, and you have to see his cute crown and the sign that he got to wear! Cuuuttteee!

After some photos with Diddy, we spent the rest of our time soaking up every second of daylight before sunset. You can literally see the light changing with each of their outfit changes which were perfect. Their last outfit featured Bruins jerseys because Kyle is a huge fan.

Jen and Kyle, I am so excited for you two and Diddy!! I look forward to your wedding day next August!! I’m seriously counting down the days!! Yay!!

Here are a few favorites from their Roger Williams Park engagement photos!

Roger Williams Park Engagement Photos

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Roger Williams Park Engagement Photos | Jen + Kyle

A Look Inside My Studio | Shawon Davis Photography Studio Tour

Wed, 01 Aug 2018 15:22:42 GMT

Today, I am thrilled to share a look inside my studio and show you some before and afters of the new space.

I am grateful for a beautiful space that I get to walk into every day. These are the words that said out loud to myself walking through the door of #206 and these are the words that I say now.

The Before. I said YES as soon as saw the space and it looked exactly like what you see in the picture. I snapped pictures with my phone and sent a message to my husband. What do you think he said? A wall was added to the corner storage room you see on the right. I wanted to created a tucked away space for my computer and desk. What you don’t see in the AFTER pic below are the cabinets that I added for storage and a counter for COFFEE in my office area. It’s a tiny room, but if you come by or if I do a live video I’ll show it to you!

I am grateful for a beautiful space that I get to walk into every day. These are the words that I would say out loud to myself as I walked through the door, up the low-lit staircase, and finally to the door of #206. Sitting at my favorite table and looking out the window with a heart of gratitude, I would write my list of to-dos that I wanted to accomplish for the day, review my goals, dream, and then get to work. I never thought it was possible to have a studio of my own, to dream, to create, to meet with clients, host my first photography workshop, have photoshoots and welcome other women in business to collaborate and meet for coffee.

You see, #206 was my very first studio and it was the beautiful space that I got to walk into every single day. I have always believed in using what I have and making it work. That’s just what I did at #206.

Although I did not foresee moving my studio location, God opened a huge door for me to a space that was not available when I first began looking into having a studio.

I don’t know if you remember, but a long time ago I was a Realtor. Yes, you read that right :).

As a Realtor, I had to help my clients see the possibilities of a home being a fit for them. We’d have conversations like, your sofa could go here, you can change the paint color, and the carpets can be removed and you could add hardwood floors. One of my jobs was to help them see the potential.

When I first saw my new studio space, I was certainly walking in the shoes of seeing the possibilities and looking past…well a lot of things. You’ll see the before pictures.

I knew the space had potential, and with some creativity, paint, floors, a window and furniture it would be perfect.

I am grateful for a space to create, dream, work every day, meet with wedding clients, have portrait and headshot photoshoots, host photography workshops, and welcome other women in business (that’s happening tonight with my team from the Women’s Success Network).

Thank you for being a part of my journey, I hope to see you soon, a party is going to happen, and here’s a look inside my studio.

A Look Inside My Studio

If only I could have fresh flowers every, single, day! Anbody else? I love having my desk separated from the main space. I purchased those sheer curtains from IKEA and they help me to tuck away even more when clients are in the chair for hair and makeup. You know I also love to chat and we’d end up here for hours if I were talking the whole time:)

This is the hair and makeup area for clients coming in for photo shoots for Personal Branding, Headshots, and fun Portrait sessions. I will be adding a monthly Social Media Subscription Plan for photos authentic to your brand to use for Instagram, Facebook, LinkedIn, your Newsetter, you name it. A monthly photo shoot for YOUR brand! YES! More to come!

A new window was added, flooring, a can or two of white paint, 500 trips to Home Goods, hours on Wayfair and VOILA!! I enjoyed the entire process!! Waiting was the hardest, oh and putting nails in the wail, and deciding on pictures to hang in my office space:)

So that’s a look inside my studio! Thank you again for being a part of my journey and I hope to see you soon! And yes, I finally have photos in those frames:) Follow me on Instagram to see more day-to-day Behind the Scenes!

Shawon Davis Photography is located at 161 Main St. Medway, MA at the Medway Mills.

A Look Inside My Studio | Shawon Davis Photography Studio Tour

What's in My Camera Bag

Thu, 19 Jul 2018 15:20:21 GMT

What’s in my camera bag?

Our cameras are essentially boxes with lenses attaches that let light in and help us to make pictures. I repeat this line over and over to my high school photography students to reiterate that fact that making great pictures does not equal having a particular camera (box) or the best camera (box). When was the last time you heard a chef say that the meal they made was because they had a great stove?

Alright, on to what’s in my camera bag…

You know the story, I was a homeschooling mom with a blog and I took pictures for the blog. My camera broke and my husband got me a camera for my birthday.

That new camera happened to be a Nikon d5100 and placed my life on an unexpected path. What’s in my camera bag today is somewhat different than how I first started out.

My hands down favorite camera body was the Nikon d700, I say was because these days my favorite is the Nikon d750. I never thought I’d stop crushin’ on my d700, but as a wedding photographer, the dual card slots, the ISO capabilities and the light weight of the d750 make it the optimal camera for me on wedding days.

Now onto the glass!

My FAVORITE lens is the Nikkor 70-200mm f2.8. I purchased this lens on my way to Cliff Mautner’s Lighting and Skillset Bootcamp five years ago, and I have never looked back. I use this lens for the ceremony, portraits, some details, the first dance, you name it.

The Nikon 85mm 1.8d – I think this was the second lens that I purchased after learning about the best focal lengths for portraits. I still use it for portraits during the bride’s getting ready time.

The Nikon 50mm 1.8 – This was the first lens that I bought while I was learning how to use my camera in manual mode. It’s usually hanging by my side with the 70-200.

The Nikon 35mm 2.0 – I use this lens when a wider focal length is needed while getting candid shots during the getting ready, and taking overall photographs of the ceremony or reception room.

The Nikon 24-120mm f/4 – This lens now fills the role of my 35mm, but only stops down to f/4. Not an issue for me because of the ISO capabilities of the d750 if I’m in a low light situation, and I also tend to use this lens with off-camera lights or an on-camera speedlight.

The Nikkor 105 macro – LOVE this lens for ring shots. That’s all I have to say. This was a recent purchase and replaced my Nikkor 60mm macro.

Here are a few other gadgets and tools that I use throughout the day:

Holdfast Camera Strap – can’t live without this!!
MagMod for my speedlights
Sandisk Memory Cards
5-in-1 Reflector
60-inch umbrella
Rogue flash bender

Thanks for reading the what’s in my camera bag edition!

Have an outstanding day and I hope you make something beautiful !

What’s in My Camera Bag

Greek Orthodox Wedding | Hilary + Apostolos

Wed, 13 Jun 2018 15:17:50 GMT

It’s Tuesday, and I’m delighted to share a few favorite moments from Hilary and Apostolos’ intimate Greek Orthodox wedding this past weekend.

Ceremony: Annunciation Greek Orthodox Church

Reception Venue: Vasa Waterfront Kitchen and Bar in Salisbury, MA

Florist: Beach Plum Too

Cake: Jenny’s Wedding Cakes

Bride’s Dress: Madeleine’s Daughter in Portsmouth, NH

Hair and Makeup Artist: Essencia Salon and Spa

Fall is my favorite season, and the colors were brilliant on Saturday. We haven’t yet reached the peak of the season yet, and it’s already breathtaking in many places like Newburyport, one of the settings for this sweet couple’s wedding day.

Hilary and Apostolos are two beautiful, gentle, and kind people. It was such a pleasure to be with them on their wedding day.

He loves her creativity, intelligence, and kindness. She loves his sense of humor and imagination.

Hilary has such a gracefulness about her, and let me also tell you that Apostolos has some serious dance moves.

The day started with me first going to see the guys for photos at a hotel not far from Annunciation Greek Orthodox Church. They enjoyed a toast and opening gifts from the groom before heading out to take some group photos.

After spending some time with the guys, I headed out to see the ladies and meet a few of Hilary’s favorite pets. She loves animals and calls herself a cat lady. Apostolos happily agrees and calls himself a cat dad. I love it!!

I got to meet two of her dogs and cats, and her sweet cat, Barbara.

Hilary also had personalized jewelry boxes with each bridesmaids’ name monogrammed on the outside to hold the beautiful bracelets that she also gave to them as gifts.

Before driving to the church, when enjoyed the fall air and a few photos of Hilary and her bridesmaids along with her parents.

Wedding Ceremony at the Annunciation Greek Orthodox Church

Their wedding ceremony was at the Annunciation Greek Orthodox Church in Amesbury, MA. It was my first time photographing a Greek Orthodox wedding, and the ceremony was beautiful.

Apostolos’ little brother did a wonderful job standing with his brother, and I love the happiness that was all over his face as he watched Apostolos gleam as his beautiful bride walked down the aisle.

Wedding Reception at Vasa Waterfront Kitchen and Bar in Salisbury, MA

The reception was at Vasa Waterfront Kitchen and Bar in Salisbury, MA. Their wedding day was intimate, warm, and joyful as they celebrated with their closest family and friends. At the wedding reception, Hilary’s dad gave the sweetest toast. He said that their family seemed to be getting smaller, but on Saturday it felt as though it was growing again. Beautiful!!!!

Hilary and Apostolos, it was an honor to celebrate with you on your wedding day! You two are lovely together and it has been great getting to know you! It was hard to say goodbye on Saturday, so I’m sending another big hug your way!! xo, Shawon

Greek Orthodox Wedding Photos

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Greek Orthodox Wedding | Hilary + Apostolos

Newport Officers’ Club Wedding | Kathleen + Michael

Tue, 12 Jun 2018 15:13:43 GMT

It’s Tuesday, and I’m so happy to share beautiful moments from Kathleen and Mike’s Newport Officers’ Club wedding from this past Friday. It was such an honor to photograph their wedding and celebrate with their families.

Venue: Newport Officers’ Club

Florist: Botanica

Cake: Scrumptions

Bride’s Dress: Spark Bridal Boutique and the designer is Roz la Kelin

Hair and Makeup Artist: Jaclynn Kate Hair & Makeup Artistry Salon

DJ: B-Sharp Entertainment

Read more about their story, their wedding day, and enjoy a few favorites from their day.

Kathleen and Mike’s story began when they met a little over 4 years ago at a local tavern. During this span of time, a beautiful relationship blossomed between two amazing people who are such a light together.

Kathleen has such an endearing way about her. She is gentle, kind, and thoughtful.

Mike is a ball of joy, humorous, and he makes her smile in the sweetest way.

To know them is to love them.

My eyes tear up as I think back to their wedding reception and one of the youngest people in the room was excited to give the speech that he prepared about his Uncle Mike and Aunt Kathleen–you are amazing and I love you, he said.

On one of the coldest days in January, after they were both recovering from colds, Mike had an idea that they should go ice skating. Haha!!

It’d be fun! (I’m ad-libbing here, but this sounds exactly like what Mike would say.)

That day, Kathleen said more than yes to ice skating. She said yes to Mike asking her to marry him. Love, Love, Love!!

Believe or not, I first met Kathleen when she was finishing up high school and on her way to college!

When her mom called to say that she was engaged and getting married this year, I was beside myself!

The moment they stepped into the studio, it felt like a reunion. I was so happy to see them both!! We caught up, talked about all things wedding, flipped through a few wedding albums, and then Kathleen showed me her dress. OMG!! It was the perfect dress for her! Classic, elegant and oh, so beautiful. I know you want to scroll down to see it, but keep reading:)

We started their day getting ready at a local hotel near the venue.

The conversations, the laughter, the hugs, the twirling of the flower girl in her dress were sweet and precious.

The light coming through the window was warm, and the glow on Kathleen’s face when she was all dressed made it even warmer.

They shared a first look with the wedding party cheering them on from inside the trolley and through the opened windows, and then they had a private moment before boarding together.

They’d prepared handwritten notes to share with each other, and the moment was priceless.

There were a few sprinkles of rain before the ceremony started, but maybe ten minutes before the start time, the officiant and I high fived each other as the sun came out from behind the clouds.

A gorgeously designed arch, framed them perfectly as they listened to scripture readings, words from the officiant, said their vows and exchanged rings.

The words from their officiant were full of wisdom and encouragement.

Don’t ever forget your story.
Don’t wait to forgive.
Don’t stop believing.

(from their ceremony)

Because of the rain earlier in the day, we finished up the wedding party photos and photos of the two of them after the ceremony. The light was lovely!!

Their wedding colors were a perfect combination of navy, blush, and cream. Giti designed beautiful bouquets that were soft and delicate. The dahlia’s in Kathleen’s bouquet were show stoppers.

The staff at the Newport Officers’ Club was fantastic The ballroom was decorated beautifully and the reception evening was indeed a celebration.

Congratulations, Kathleen and Mike!! It was an absolute honor and delight to be with you on your wedding day!! I am incredibly happy for you two!! Don’t stop believing:) Sending big hugs your way!! xo, Shawon

Here are a few favorites from their day!

Newport Officers’ Club Wedding

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Newport Officers’ Club Wedding | Kathleen + Michael

Hyatt Regency Boston Harbor Hotel Wedding | Heather + Dav

Mon, 11 Jun 2018 15:09:19 GMT

It’s Tuesday, and I’m so happy to share a few favorites from Heather and Dav’s Hyatt Regency Boston Harbor Hotel Wedding this past Saturday.

While celebrating her birthday last year, and enjoying an amazing night out, Dav proposed to Heather and she said yes. Forever a memorable birthday and special day in their life, they now have an even more special day to add: 8/18/18.

She has the kindest heart, and he is a great dad. Two of the qualities that they love about the other.

On their new journey together, he looks forward to always put a smile on his girl’s face and she looks forward to growing old with her best friend.

Yes, Saturday was that day of the weekend when we were supposed to have pouring rain and thunderstorms passing through Boston for most of the afternoon. Heather and Dav did not let the threat of rain and thunderstorms shake their day and they were perfectly okay to snuggle underneath umbrellas to enjoy their day and the gorgeous views of Boston Harbor.

We started the day with them both getting ready at the Hyatt. It was great that their getting ready, the ceremony and reception were all held at the same venue.

Originally, the ceremony was to be held on the lawn overlooking the Harbor, but because of the threat of storms, the ceremony was held in the Olympia Room. Although it was held inside, beautiful light poured in from the floor to ceiling windows and the views of Boston Harbor were stunning.

Heather’s dapper nephews walked her down the aisle, and it was heartwarming to hear Dav say how beautiful she was as she walked closer to him.

There were many tears of joy and happy laughter throughout the ceremony.

Words from the poem, These Hands, read at their ceremony:

These are the hands that will work alongside yours as you build your future together. These are the hands that will passionately love you and care for you throughout the years…

These are the hands that will give you strength when you struggle, and support and encouragement to chase down your dreams.

There friends and family celebrated the lovely couple as they walked back down the aisle together and the celebration would continue later in the Skyline room as the sunset and the city lights filled the room.

Congratulations, Heather and Dav!! It was an absolute pleasure to be part of your day and get to know you both over the past months. Dav, or as you’d say David with an e, thank you for graciously laughing with me as I made sure I pronounced your name correctly with a little help from the Internet. I’m so happy for you two and your sweet girl Ariana!! xo, Shawon

Here are a few favorites from their Hyatt Regency Boston Harbor Hotel wedding photos!

Hyatt Regency Boston Harbor Hotel Wedding

Venue: Hyatt Regency Boston Harbor

Florist: Madison Floral

Cake: Konditor Meister

Bride’s Dress: Alexandras Bridal Fall River, MA Bridals

Hair and Makeup Artist: Stilisti Salon

DJ: Crackerjack Entertainment

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Hyatt Regency Boston Harbor Hotel Wedding | Heather + Dav

My Journey to Becoming a Photographer | Part II

Tue, 29 May 2018 15:29:24 GMT

My Journey to Becoming a Photographer | Part II

Happy Tuesday! I hope that you had a fantastic weekend! Getting a few steps closer to the new studio being finished was certainly a highlight for me. It felt so good on my drive in this morning knowing that I could get in and get straight to work. I can not wait to share before and after pictures with you. If you follow me on Instagram or Facebook, you’ve seen some of the behind the scene progress.

Today, I’m excited to share Part II of my journey to becoming a photographer. I guess it’s time for me to upgrade my YouTube account so that I can choose the thumbnail. I think they purposefully chose this thumbnail to make me upgrade – haha! Well, I hope you can get past my thumbnail image or at least it will give you a great laugh. You’re welcome :-).

I hope you enjoy hearing more about my story and the reason I LOVE what I get to do with all my heart.

Happy Tuesday, and I hope you enjoy it! Watch Part I here .

Feel free to leave a comment below. Yes, it can be about my thumbnail

My Journey to Becoming a Photographer – Part I

Wed, 21 Feb 2018 15:04:34 GMT

Today, I’m sharing part one of my journey to becoming a photographer. I’m excited and nervous and excited all over again to share this with you!!

If you would have told me almost 7 years ago that I’d be a photographer, I would not have believed you. Well, I’m excited to share my “Becoming a Photographer” story with you friends!! Part II will be coming soon. Shout out to a young YouTuber named Greta for the best iMovie instructions to help me make this happen! I hope you enjoy Part I.

Warmly, Shawon

My Journey to Becoming a Photographer – Part I

Harrington Farm Wedding Photos | Princeton, MA | Julie + Dave

Tue, 10 Oct 2017 15:01:26 GMT

It’s Tuesday, and I’m elated to share sweet moments of happiness and love from Julie and Dave’s Harrington Farm wedding photos this past weekend.

We headed back outside during the nice window of the start of magic or golden hour to get a few more portraits of just the two of them. There are endless possibilities to make beautiful pictures at Harrington Farm. The sweet, soft light combined with Julie and Dave’s adoring way with one another was amazing.

They had been engaged for three weeks, and the happiness could be heard in every single word. I could see the smile through the phone as Julie shared more about the two of them and what they envisioned for their wedding day.

Last August, Dave did something that Julie’s dad thought millennials no longer did.

Dave wanted to spend some time with her dad, and he thought that time together would include fishing.

Dave wanted to share that he was in love with Julie. He went on to say that he knew that she was the one ever since their second date and he asked if he could marry his daughter.

Julie’s dad said yes, and agreed to keep it a secret.

That secret would later unfold last year.

Julie and Dave are outdoor enthusiasts, so taking a trip to Mt. Washington wasn’t anything out of the ordinary. This trip proved to be extraordinary when Dave asked Julie to marry him.

One other extraordinary detail was the GoPro that Dave had brought along to capture the entire time. Isn’t that the best?!

When we met for their engagement session last fall, I knew that their wedding day was going to be beautiful, adoring, and filled with happiness.

The sweetest part of the day and Dave might agree, was seeing their sweet baby Gwen come down the aisle in the cutest wagon with a sign that read, “Daddy here comes mommy”!

Tears streamed down his face, as Julie began to make her way down the aisle.

It was beautiful.

Their Harrington Farm wedding photos are filled with both tender moments like these and laugh out loud moments involving donuts, the man of honor, and the two of them rocking out on the dance floor with air-filled guitars.

Julie and Dave, thank you so much for the honor to be part of your day. It has been a delight getting to know you both over this past year!! I’m sending big hugs your way because two weren’t enough on Saturday. Have the greatest honeymoon ever in Costa Rica!!

xo, Shawon

Harrington Farm Wedding Photos

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Harrington Farm Wedding Photos | Princeton, MA | Julie + Dave

Hale Reservation Wedding Photos | Westwood, MA Photographer | Melissa + Sean

Tue, 03 Oct 2017 14:59:25 GMT

It’s Tuesday, and I’m excited to share a few heartwarming moments from Melissa and Sean’s Hale Reservation wedding photos this past weekend.

Venue: Hale Reservation

Bride’s Dress: VeLace Bridal , Bellingham, MA

Hair Artist: Philosophe, Christina

Catering: Smokey’s Longhorn Catering, Jason Bromberg

Cake Artist: Wright’s Dairy Farm

DJ: The Downtown Sound, Alex Delmonte

Videography: MPD Video Productions

Photography: Shawon Davis Photography

This was my first time photographing at Hale Reservation, but when I arrived, my mind immediately went back to their beautiful engagement session and their love for nature and the great outdoors.

Hale Reservation is set in Westwood, MA with over a thousand acres of woods, trails galore and beautiful ponds sure to make any nature lover’s heart happy.

Melissa and Sean’s day was a combination of nature, whimsy, romance, and fun which was the perfect fit for these college sweethearts and what they envisioned for their wedding.

They shared outbursts of laughter as stories were recounted of them meeting during their ceremony.

The rain could not stop the joy and celebration, and the day was made even sweeter when Bailey, their sweet Chesapeake Bay Retriever, arrived shortly after their magical first look.

Because of the rain, I had scouted out a safe spot for their first look just in front of the getting ready location. In case the skies completely opened up, I wanted to ensure that we could get back inside right away.

However, Sean told me about another spot that Melissa had her heart set on, and being the adventurous couple that they are, they decided to go for it and embrace the day.

Don’t stop reading now, but a few scrolls below you will see how magical this location was. Up a small path, tucked between trees was a gorgeous stone building and in the moments of their first look the clouds were lifted away and only light was shining through.

They embraced the day and they wanted their family and friends to be present with them. I love that they decided to have an unplugged ceremony so that everyone could smile, laugh, and be in the moment with them during their ceremony.

As they walked down the aisle, everyone was able to be present with them once again as sweet snips of lavender were thrown in celebration of the lovely couple.

Their Hale Reservation wedding photos are magical in every sense. They are each other’s inspiration and I could see that as I snapped each frame.

Melissa and Sean, it was truly an honor to be part of your day! I’m so happy that our paths crossed, and please give Tase a big hug for being an essential part of that happening. It has been wonderful getting to know you both and let me not forget Bailey!! xo, Shawon

Hale Reservation Wedding Photos

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Hale Reservation Wedding Photos | Westwood, MA Photographer | Melissa + Sean

Wedding at The Liberty Hotel | Boston, MA | Colleen + Pete

Tue, 26 Sep 2017 14:57:33 GMT

If you love all things classic, elegant, and perhaps Matt Damon, you’re going to love Colleen and Pete’s heartwarming wedding at The Liberty hotel this past weekend.

Shawon is a Boston Wedding Photographer and available for travel. She is currently booking 2018 couples who believe in holding on tight to what matters most. Contact her here.

One of my favorite parts of the wedding day are the toasts. I love getting to hear stories about the bride and groom. Stories and one-liners that often lead to happy laughter in the room.

While giving her toast, the beautiful bride’s sister and maid of honor, had everyone laughing as she quoted Colleen in saying that she and Pete found love in a hopeless place.

That hopeless place was law school.

Colleen and Pete met as first-year law school students while taking classes together.

During their engagement session, they both had a chance to present their case of how their story began.

Pete’s version of their love story was girl sees guy and falls totally in love with him. While Colleen’s version was guy sees girl and falls totally in love with her.

Their working on Moot Court as teammates would bring them closer together and they fell in love.

We started their joyous wedding at The Liberty Hotel with the bridal party getting ready. Although there were high hopes for the bride to get ready in the Ebersol Penthouse, there was a special guest that day who we will all agree was in attendance for their wedding.

That special guest was Matt Damon. Yes, Matt Damon!! Pete got a picture with him, and that just might end up in their wedding album.

The entire day was full of laughter, warm smiles, and happiness!

After bridal party prep, we headed to the yard for their first look. Colleen was absolutely stunning in her Essense of Australia gown from Ve’Lace Bridal. The look on Pete’s face was priceless not only during their first look but as she walked down the aisle.

I love the tender looks they gave one another throughout their ceremony and the sheer excitement of their family and friends.

The celebration ensued in the ballroom as they made their entrance, danced their first dance together, made their rounds to greet everyone and later showed off some serious dance moves as Mark kept the party going on the dance floor.

Colleen and Pete, thank you for the honor to be part of your day. It was a joy to see your family and friends celebrating with you!! I know that you are going to do a great job raising poorly behaved cats together:) Have an amazing fall mini-moon!! xo, Shawon

Here a few favorites their day. Enjoy!

Wedding at The Liberty Hotel Photos

Venue: The Liberty Hotel

Florist: Lyndsey Loring Design

Bride’s Dress: Essense of Australia, Ve’Lace Bridal

Hair and Makeup Artist: MAW Beauty Studio

Cake: Cakes to Remember

DJ: First Class Weddings

Photography: Shawon Davis Photography

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Wedding at The Liberty Hotel | Boston, MA | Colleen + Pete

Endicott Estate Wedding Photos | Massachusetts Photographer | Nina + Jared

Wed, 28 Jun 2017 14:54:24 GMT

When I first spoke with Nina, she told me how much she and Jared’s family meant to them. I knew right away that their day was going to be special and their Endicott Estate wedding photos would be beautiful. I’m delighted to share more about their story, their wedding and a few favorites from their day! You’re welcome to smile along with me!

The day started with the bridal party getting ready at the Hilton Dedham, a convenient five minutes away from their Endicott Estate wedding.

The Massachusetts Avenue bridge connected their worlds. She was a student at Northeastern and him at MIT. Their paths would eventually cross during their sophomore year of college and a friendship began. That friendship blossomed, and on New Year’s Eve 2015, Nina said yes. You can read more and see their engagement photos here .

There were many eyes filled with tears of joy as Nina and Jared shared their vows on Saturday. One of the many special moments of their ceremony were family and friends sharing words of what love is. They spoke of love being friendship, bearing one another’s burdens, walking through good times and bad, moving forward and growing together.

As Nina shared her vows to Jared she esteemed his kindness, strength and generous heart.

As Jared shared his vows to Nina, he esteemed her love for others, her beautiful smile that touches hearts and can ignite a room, and her steadfastness in all that she does.

The entire day they were surrounded by love, and the joy can be seen in their Endicott Estate wedding photos.

That love filled Nina’s getting ready bridal suite as she spent the morning with her best friends who traveled all the way from South Sudan and the Philippines to be with her and Jared.

That love was displayed through every laugh as Jared’s best friend from the age of 6 gave the most heartfelt toast during the reception.

That love was undeniable through their parent’s eyes as they watched them make their vows to one another.

Nina and Jared, I know I’ve said it many, many times, but I am soooo happy for you. Not only am I happy for you, but I will also be among your family and friends cheering you on in your marriage. Enjoy your honeymoon!! Congratulations, Nina and Jared!!

xo, Shawon

Endicott Estate Wedding Photos

Deidra, with Beautiful Faces by Janis was already at work when I arrived and put on the finishing touches of Nina makeup.

I loved the lace overlay of Nina’s Allure Bridal gown that was perfect for their summer wedding.

Their Endicott Estate wedding photos were photographed at their summer outdoor wedding ceremony on the lawn in front of the gazebo. Nina spent many summer afternoons on the lawn at Endicott for summer concerts.

Ceremony and Reception Venue: Endicott Estate, Dedham, MA

Makeup: Beautiful Faces by Janis, Deidra

Catering: Two Chefs Are Better Than One

Cocktails: Cocktails, LLC

DJ: Siagel Productions, DJ Greg

Photography: Shawon Davis Photography

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Endicott Estate Wedding Photos | Massachusetts Photographer | Nina + Jared

Indian Pond Country Club Wedding Photos | Kingston, MA | Imani + Shadrach

Tue, 30 May 2017 14:53:24 GMT

If you love all things classic and romance sprinkled with elegance and royalty, Imani and Shadrach’s Indian Pond Country Club wedding photos will have your love bucket running over. Enjoy more about their story, their wedding and a few favorites from their day!

I love that they had some quiet moments together. I

The light was amazing, and I love every single picture. I wanted to share them all! These two are just lovely together!!

Sharing only with their families and close circle of friends, he held the biggest surprise ever for four long months.

Thanksgiving, Christmas, and New Years would all pass, but on January 7, 2017, Shadrach asked Imani to be his wife. She knew he was the one, and he knew that he had found his queen.

On the same hill where they shared their first kiss, she said yes to the one who makes her smile even brighter.

They met at a church Easter egg hunt a couple of years ago, a friend would introduce them, and they started talking several months later.

McKenna’s would become their favorite breakfast spot and where they would share many sweet conversations.

Their Indian Pond Country Club wedding photos are filled with joy, the warmth of family and friendships, and above all love.

When I spoke to them over the phone, they made the hairs stand on my arms because…

They wanted their wedding pictures to remind them of why they got married.
They wanted to feel the joy-filled moments and excitement of their wedding day.
They wanted to always be inspired to move forward through the ups and downs of marriage.
They wanted to be able to look back 20 years from their wedding day to see how far they’d come together.

LOVE, LOVE, LOVE!!!

Imani and Shadrach, it was such an honor to photograph your wedding day and witness the commitment that you have to each other and the commitment that your family and friends have to you and your marriage. I am so happy for you and want you to know that I am cheering for you as well!! Imani, I’m sure your surprise honeymoon will be amazing!! xo, Shawon

Indian Pond Country Club Wedding Photos

This was my third time photographing at Indian Pond Country Club. Because of rain leading up to the day of, I arrived early at the venue to check in to see if the grounds were dry enough for the ceremony to still take place outdoors. Thankfully, Laura had been given the thumbs up and the day was absolutely beautiful.

Pam and Vicky were outstanding. I had to give Pam the biggest hug because the cocktail hour was extended giving us extra time for family and bridal party photos. That also meant we had some time to head out to Indian Pond’s gorgeous stone bridge for bride and groom alone photos.

Venue: Indian Pond Country Club

Flowers: JN Floral Design, Joanne Nikitas

Photography: Shawon Davis Photography

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Indian Pond Country Club Wedding Photos | Kingston, MA | Imani + Shadrach

Choate Park Engagement Photos | Michelle + Jerry

Wed, 03 May 2017 14:50:37 GMT

Today, I’m delighted to share a sneak peek from Michelle and Jerry’s heartwarming Choate Park engagement photos from this past weekend. Read more about their story and enjoy a few favorites from their engagement session.

Choate Park Engagement Photos | Michelle + Jerry

Although Jerry completely missed their first date, Michelle’s mom nudged her to give him another chance. In Jerry’s defense, he didn’t completely forget as they were waiting on the other to confirm.

So, for their first, second date, they made plans to meet locally for a few drinks. The first, second date, went so well that they made plans right away to see each other again.

It would be a few more dates down the road, and one in particular, that Jerry couldn’t take his eyes off beautiful Michelle. This date was different.

Michelle was wearing a gorgeous yellow dress and glowing. As they were leaving the restaurant, the sun began to set and Jerry knew without a doubt that Michelle had his heart. He was in love with her.eyes off beautiful Michelle. This date was different.

While visiting with family at the Cape this March, Jerry’s plans of proposing to Michelle all came together. He asked her to marry him and she said yes!!

In keeping with the local theme, because they are basically my neighbors, we headed to Choate Park for their engagement photos.

It was a beautiful, fall afternoon and some favorite moments from their engagement session included their first, second date story, Jerry recounting the moment he knew that he loved Michelle, and the Mickey and Minnie hats.

Michelle loves Disney, and I think we might have signed Jerry up to learn a few Disney tunes. So funny!!

Michelle and Jerry, you two are the sweetest and I am so excited for you!! I look forward to photographing all of the fun and beautiful moments on your wedding day in April!! Yay!!

Here are a few favorites from their Choate Park engagement photos.

Choate Park Engagement Photos

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

The Power of Gratitude

Tue, 11 Apr 2017 14:49:20 GMT

I sat at my favorite table in my office. The table where I make a mess on Mondays, brainstorm, and chat about business ideas with friends. I sit here to meet with myself each month to reflect and review my goals.

While I’m usually excited to review my goals because I love checking off my list of things accomplished, this month was a struggle.

I am a list checker. I have been known to complete a task that wasn’t on my list, only to add it to my list, and then put a check beside it with a smiley face. To the defense of all the list checkers–raise your hands, there is some science behind why this happens.

As I began to reflect on my list of goals from last month, I noticed that I had a list with no check marks. All month, I’d been feeling as though I was not moving forward because I wasn’t accomplishing the things on my list. Ever feel that way?

My favorite planner has a “cultivate gratitude” section for each month’s goal review. As I began to move my heart towards gratitude, my list of unchecked goals and the feelings of overwhelm and failure began to fade. The power of gratitude is real.

I decided to literally turn the page and make a list of my “YAY” moments for March and cultivate gratitude.

My YAY moments were getting a new bed, cooking with Blue Apron and feeling like a chef, meeting clients for lunch and learning more about them, playing Heads Up with my family, reading a book with my husband, hosting three HUGE events at my studio, and discovering a new song to add to my wedding day playlist.

The power of gratitude is real, and these YAY moments filled a page that I can turn to in those months when I don’t feel that my plans have been accomplished.

The power of gratitude is real.

Gratitude leads to change in the way that we look at our lives.

Gratitude gives a different perspective on what success means.

Gratitude causes us to appreciate everything and celebrate the YAY moments.

Gratitude helps us to delight in the little things.

What YAY moments can you celebrate to cultivate gratitude?

The Power of Gratitude

Photography Workshop in Medway, MA

Thu, 23 Mar 2017 14:40:48 GMT

Photography workshop in Medway, MA recap by Shawon Davis, Boston, MA wedding photographer.

My journey to becoming a wedding photographer started as a mom with a camera homeschooling my three kiddos. I had a blog to document our days, my camera broke, and my husband surprised me with a fancy DSLR for my birthday. Determined to learn to use it manual mode, I watched countless Youtube videos, read photography blogs, checked out books from the library, fell asleep many nights reading my camera manual, and took countless photos often bribing my kids to be my subject.

This past Saturday, I hosted my first photography workshop in Medway, MA of more to come at my new photography studio in Medway, MA. I’ve been teaching beginning photography elective classes to middle and high school students over the last two years. Teaching both at a local school and a flourishing non-profit, A Work in Progress Productions (AWIP) in Attleboro, MA has allowed me to hold on to that teacher who forever lives inside of me.

Although this workshop was for Moms with Cameras, I wanted the attendees to leave with the same photography 101 basics that I teach my middle and high school students and knowing how to use their camera in manual mode.

Manual mode means the person taking the pictures tells the camera what to do. In automatic mode, the camera does everything for you, and often that results in a picture that you didn’t want to make. When you set your camera to manual mode, you are in control of the ISO, the aperture, and the shutter to make the photograph that you see in your mind.

Photographing in manual mode sets you on a path to making pictures, and learning about light and composition will lead to great pictures with more and more practice.

I covered the basics of photographing in manual mode, with a lesson on light and composition included as well.

“I left the class with so much more knowledge and comfort to use my new camera, which I love. Shawon explained and simplified many technical aspects of the camera. She even gave us an assignment so we are accountable to practice what we learned…” – Dionne K.

Tonight is our first live Q&A that will be held in our Private Facebook Group. I’ll get to see pictures they’ve made from our first follow-up assignment, give feedback and answer any questions that they might have. From my experience, it’s been helpful to be able to follow up with an instructor after a workshop is over and you’ve had time to process and practice what you’ve learned. I’m excited to chat with them again too!:)

I love teaching, and it was a fun day to spend with some lovely ladies who enjoy taking pictures as much as I do!!

If you’re looking for a photography workshop in Medway, MA in the MetroWest area, join my Newsletter here to be notified when the next class date is announced. Plans are also underway to host weekly photography classes in the fall for high school students interested in photography.

Photography Workshop in Medway, MA

Grand Opening Medway Massachusetts Wedding Photographer | New Studio

Thu, 09 Mar 2017 21:55:29 GMT

It’s Official – the Grand Opening of Shawon Davis Photography as a local Medway Massachusetts Wedding Photographer!!

One thing that I’ve learned after having a business for over 5 years is to celebrate every milestone, goal, and small win. This week has been full of celebrating the studio’s Grand Opening as a local Medway Massachusetts Wedding Photographer. While the studio has a presence in the local community of Medway, I will continue to photograph weddings in Boston and other New England towns and cities. This year I also get to travel for a destination wedding in Naples, Florida! Speaking of destinations, I would love to photograph a wedding in Maine.

So, how did this all happen?! One of my goals for 2017 was to open a studio, and for some reason, it wouldn’t leave my heart. Anthony had to listen to me talk about it a lot. I love him!!

Well, two days after Christmas, I texted a friend, who’s also a fantastic realtor, to ask her if she would help me find a studio space. I shared with her everything that I was looking for in a space, and immediately she started sending me listings. I forgot to tell her that I was hoping to actually be in a space in June. You know I had my own plans of course!

One of the listings fit well within what I was looking for, and she asked if I wanted to go take a look it. At this time, I’m sitting in a corner in the children’s section of Border’s bookstore trying to whisper and downplay my excitement. With the biggest smile on my face, we plan to meet in half an hour.

I’ve made many big decisions as a business owner, but this was one of the biggest and I was scared and excited and nervous and a million what-ifs ran across my mind. You know the what-ifs that suck the life out of your dreams and always leave you with a list of I wish I would haves.

On my drive home, I said a prayer asking God for things to go smoothly if it was meant to be.

The afternoon of the AFC Championship game, I got a call that my new space was ready and that I could pick up the keys. Ahhhhhh!!! I begged Anthony to leave the game during halftime and we were off to pick up the keys.

The next weeks would be filled with trips to IKEA, Hobby Lobby, transferring my business from Mendon to Medway, and making the studio feel like home. I knew that I wanted the space to feel warm, welcoming and inviting. I wanted a space where my clients could come, stay a while and not feel rushed to leave.

I’m thankful for all of the wonderful people that photography has connected me to, and it was truly a blessing to get to celebrate with them, with YOU, this week. Tuesday night it was great to see friends, family, past clients, and even some of my 2017 wedding clients. Last night wrapped up the celebration with hosting the women of WSN , an organization that I’m part of and also serve on the board. It was an incredible night of sharing quotes in response to International Women’s Day, building relationships, and meeting new faces.

I want to say thank you to Chris with Clever Bride Consignments who brought in a lovely gown that you’ll see below, and Katydid Flowers made a beautiful arrangement for this girl who loves flowers. I had the pleasure of interviewing them both last year, and you can read more about them here: Katydid Flowers , Clever Bride.

My heart is filled with gratitude to have a space to meet with wedding clients, gather with other business owners, host photography workshops, and offer headshots!!

Thank you so much for the text messages, phone calls, emails, flowers, and messages on Instagram and Facebook. If you couldn’t make it out this week, you’re always welcomed to stop by and say hello. The only thing missing was Red Velvet Cupcakes, but at least we had cupcakes, right?!:)

Thank you!!! Cheers!!!

xo,

Shawon

Medway Massachusetts Wedding Photographer

Shawon Davis Photography, a local Medway Massachusetts Wedding Photographer is available for weddings in Boston and other New England cities and towns. Shawon is currently booking 2018 weddings, and would love to chat with you about your wedding day! Contact her here.

Grand Opening Medway Massachusetts Wedding Photographer | New Studio

Boston Esplanade Engagement Photos | Massachusetts Photographer | Nina + Jared

Wed, 30 Nov 2016 13:26:43 GMT

She gives to others in her work each day, and that giving spirit flows to her relationship with Jared as he admires that she helps him to be the very best version of himself. His kindness for his Nina is both gentle and reassuring.

During their engagement session along the Boston Esplanade, they held hands, snuggled up cheek to cheek, laughed at each other’s jokes, and there was a conversation or two whispered in ears about plans for dinner.

Selfies of the two of them together from their everyday life and adventures in Jamaica, Belize, and Costa Rica can now be framed around pictures from their Boston Esplanade engagement photos and very soon their wedding day.

It didn’t take any time at all for these best friends to forget about footsteps around them and enjoy this sweet time together. At times it seemed as though a piece of the Esplanade emptied just for the two of them.

They sat closely together smiling together from ear to ear during their preview session. Glances back and forth, and Nina saying, “Oh my gosh, is this us!! Look at us!!”are still fresh in my mind. The hearing, seeing and feeling my client’s joy is one of the why’s behind everything that I do, and I can’t wait to get their favorite image into their hands.

I’m looking forward to meeting their family and friends next year for their wedding at Endicott Estate. They are a beautiful couple, and what an honor to be part of their day and cheer them on in their marriage!

Congratulations, Nina and Jared (Darbs:)!!

Here are a few favorites from their engagement session.

Boston Esplanade Engagement Photos

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Boston Esplanade Engagement Photos | Massachusetts Photographer | Nina + Jared

Finding a Wedding Dress that is Perfect and on Budget

Tue, 09 Aug 2016 13:23:26 GMT

I’ve watched enough episodes of “Say Yes to the Dress” with my girls to know that finding a wedding dress that is perfect and on budget is no easy task. I’ve known some brides that only tried on one dress and it was the one, and there are some brides who’ve spent a few weeks with their mom and closest girlfriends visiting bridal stores, small boutiques and trunk shows to find the perfect dress that makes them look and feel beautiful.

Please help me welcome Chris, and I hope that you enjoy this interview!

How far out should a bride start dress shopping and/or purchase her gown?

Today, I’m so happy to introduce Chris, the owner of Clever Bride Consignments, and share her story of opening her beautiful dress shop for brides who are on a quest of finding a wedding dress that is perfect and on budget. I love Chris’ story of finding a wedding dress when she was a bride, and it is her why for opening her bridal store. Chris also shares some of her favorite wedding dress designers with us, and also offers some tips in selecting your dress for your body type, style suggestions, and why Clever Bride Consignments is unique.

Finding a Wedding Dress that is Perfect and on Budget

Why Clever Bride?

I had worked in a consignment store and bridal boutique in the past so when it came time for my own wedding I didn’t want to spend a lot of money on my dress, but I wanted to look fantastic. During my trials and tribulations of trying to find the perfect wedding dress, there was a lot of driving around and going on Craigslist where I just didn’t feel like a “bride”. After my experiences, I decided to open a store to bring that special bridal boutique experience and a shop full of hundreds of modern gowns in great condition to eco-friendly and budget-conscious brides like myself. With all of our gowns priced 50 to over 80% off retail prices, I truly believe you can “Look like a princess… Without paying a royal sum!”

Tell me about your favorite designers?

That is a hard one. There are so many! I fall in love with every dress that comes in. I would have to say my favorite designers are Maggie Sottero, Claire Pettibone, and Pronovias. I love their romantic designs and how well they are constructed.

I would suggest looking for your gown 9 months to a year in advance.
If you purchase your gown “off the rack”, like at Clever Bride Consignments, you can take home the dress of your dreams that day!

If you choose to purchase your gown with a bridal boutique, they will need to order the gown and that can take up to six months.

Just about all gowns need to be altered in some way. So it is best to leave 4 to 6 months for alterations.

Can I bring family and friends with me as I shop?

Absolutely! Walk-ins are welcome during regular business hours but I recommend making a personal bridal appointment.

Bring your closest friends or family. I have even had brides Skype and Facetime with loved ones that are far away. Share your bridal experience with those whose opinion you value and understand your style. I recommend limiting your group to three others. A lot of people can mean a lot of opinions and can take the focus off of you.

What makes Clever Bride unique?

Clever Bride’s Mission:

For our brides to look and feel like a princess… but not have to pay a royal sum. It’s not about finding “a” dress, it is about finding “the” dress.

I hope you enjoyed this interview as much as I did! Thank you so much, Chris!!

Here’s where you can find Clever Bride Consignment:

Visit the store or make a personal appointment

410 Washington St., 2nd fl.Holliston, MA 01746

617-501-2597

cleverbrideconsignments.com

Finding a Wedding Dress that is Perfect and on Budget

Interlaken Inn Wedding | Massachusetts Photographer | Carolyn + Simon

Wed, 20 Jul 2016 13:22:43 GMT

Carolyn and Simon’s Interlaken Inn Wedding day was filled with all things classic, love and romance. Not only were their friends and family gathered to celebrate with them on their wedding day, but the entire weekend would be filled with loving on this sweet couple and making memories that they will never forget. The gorgeous property at Interlaken Inn truly lends itself to accommodating this kind of celebrating. A group photo of everyone there was important to them, and we made that happen at the end of the night.

The couple chose vibrant, romantic, jewel tones for their Interlaken Inn Wedding, and everything was simply stunning. Her sister also made the elegant hanging, gold himmeli orbs for the reception which were a perfect modern touch to their day.

Come along, and enjoy some favorites from their day!

Carolyn was so excited to see Simon, and the moment he turned around, her face lit up with the warmest smile.

After giving them some time to enjoy this moment, we took a few portraits and later headed back up the hill to join the wedding party for formal portraits near the townhouses on the property.

Interlaken Inn Wedding Photos

The day started with the bride getting ready in the bridal suite at Interlaken with her bridesmaids. There were celebratory toasts before Carolyn slipped into her gown. Kimono robes have been a sure hit for brides and bridesmaids, and I loved their floral kimono robes .

As we headed up the hill, I had to have them stop, and then this happened. This pictures says so much about the love that they have for each other.

The light was perfect, and I love how it illuminates Carolyn’s gorgeous gown. She was such a beautiful bride!!

The ceremony was held overlooking Lake Wononscopomuc.

After the ceremony, we took family photos and had some time for a few more pictures of the new Mr. and Mrs.

Interlaken Inn Wedding | Massachusetts Photographer | Carolyn + Simon

Congratulations to Simon and Carolyn on their new journey together as husband and wife!!

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Moraine Farm Wedding | Caroline + Nick

Fri, 08 Jul 2016 13:14:43 GMT

Peonies and a host of other beautiful flowers were in full bloom for Caroline and Nick’s Moraine Farm wedding. Caroline has the most infectious smile that just lights up the entire room. She is such a sweetheart! Nick has such a kind and gentle personality. The two of them together had me saying a lot of “awwws” behind the camera. They are seriously that lovely together! You know that Caroline is someone extra special when your best man flies out for the engagement proposal!!! Love!!!

Here are a few photos to enjoy from their sweet Moraine Farm wedding day.

I’m often asked if I have any favorite Boston wedding venues, and the Estate at Moraine Farm is now on my favorites list. The gardens alone were spectacular. I shared some behind the scenes of preparation on my Snapchat @shawondavis for the first look and using the garden area in particular. Although it was a cloudy day, I was able to use the available light softened by the clouds to make some beautiful portraits for Caroline and Nick in the garden. The venue is nestled among mature trees and a view of Wenham Lake is perfect for guests to enjoy as they mingle during cocktail hour.

Amy and Janelle, along with the entire staff, did a fantastic job making sure that the day went off without a hitch. The ceremony was held outside on the lawn adjacent to the Tea Room and gardens. Caroline and Nick had a beautiful Jewish wedding ceremony, and the Chuppah was decorated elegantly near the lake.

Moraine Farm Wedding Photos

We started the day in the bridal suite with Caroline and her bridesmaids getting ready and final touches. A photo of the bride looking at her dress one final time before putting it on has become one of my favorites moments to capture. I’m not there to capture pictures when a bride says yes to the dress, but I imagine that she is filled with the same emotions on her wedding day when seeing her gown right before putting it on.

I love this! Doesn’t it make you smile!

Their Ketubah that they will later sign and will hang in their home.

On her way to see Nick for the first time on their wedding day. He was tucked away in the gardens and waiting for her gentle tap on his shoulder.

Their wedding party was also with them in the distance for their first look to share in this special time.

A moment to bring them joy every day!

Aren’t these the prettiest lilac bridesmaids dresses. Pastels and greys have certainly been a favorite for brides this wedding season. I think the pastel color palette will never go out of style.

After the first look and bridal party photos we headed back inside for the Ketubah signing.

Such an honest and real moment.

The ceremony and reception were both held at the same venue. This beautiful white tent was directly across from the ceremony location and convenient for guests to walk over from cocktail and prepare for the reception.

First dance together as husband and wife!

Not even a little drizzle could dampen their day. It made them smile brighter, hold each other closer, and look forward to their new journey together bound by love. It was such an honor to photograph this sweet couple and be a part of their day!

Shawon is currently booking 2017 Weddings, and would love to talk to you about your wedding day.

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Moraine Farm Wedding | Caroline + Nick

Boston Hyatt Harborside Wedding Photos

Tue, 28 Jun 2016 01:52:34 GMT

Boston Hyatt Harborside Wedding Photos | Massachusetts Photographer | Caroline + Tim

Caroline and Tim’s Boston Hyatt Harborside wedding was overflowing with bubbling personalities, jubilant laughter, and a sincere heartfelt love for this beautiful couple was felt throughout the entire day.

These bridesmaids were the best, and I loved their monogrammed robes.

Sweet moments of the bride with her mom as her sister finished buttoning her gown. Love this!

The wedding ceremony was held at St. Cecilia Parish in Boston, and officiated by Father John. His words to the couple were refreshing and encouraging, and there were many outbreaks of laughter throughout the ceremony.

So many genuine laughs throughout the entire ceremony!

Caroline was such a beautiful bride, and this moment with her dad is one that I hope she will cherish.

I love this photo of her dad checking out the dress that he had not seen until the wedding day, and then later seeing his beautiful daughter.

The day started with the bride and bridesmaids getting ready at the bride’s parent’s home. Did I mention peony season, and a mix of peonies and roses that smelled ever so lovely.

The living room had the best window light, so we chose this room for all of the getting ready photos.

Boston Hyatt Harborside Reception

While on our way to the reception, we stopped at Boston Common for bridal party photos and some pictures with the bride and groom.

If you love the Boston Skyline, you will love Boston Hyatt Harborside as a wedding venue. Guests were able to enjoy cocktail hour on the patio with fireplaces and hors d’oeuvres while we finished up family photos and a few more bride and groom photos with the skyline as the backdrop. The fireplaces were perfect because there was a little chill in the air. The ballroom was absolutely gorgeous. It was elegantly decorated with beautiful peony centerpieces at each table. Instead of a sweet heart table, there was one main table for the couple to enjoy their time together with the entire bridal party.

With a grand entrance of “I’ve Got a Feeling” by the Black Eyed Peas, the celebration ensued.

These college sweethearts are absolutely adored by their families. Caroline and Tim are affectionate, kind hearted, have warmth and care for others, and love their family.

Their wedding day was full of classic New England wedding style with navy, pink and grey as the wedding colors.

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Cohasset Harbor Inn Wedding | Danielle + Jason

Tue, 26 Jan 2016 13:15:36 GMT

Cohasset Harbor Inn Wedding | Danielle + Jason

It was an honor to photograph Danielle and Jason’s Cohasset Harbor Inn wedding in Falmouth, Massachusetts. The inn is perfectly nestled on Cohasset Harbor with beautiful views especially at sunset. The entire wedding party got ready at the inn which was perfect for spending time photographing both the bride and groom for the getting ready portion of their day.

We started the day with Danielle and the bridesmaids amongst laughter and celebration as they helped the beautiful bride prepare. The colors of the day were inspired by sangria, and each of the bridesmaid’s gowns was a color that you will find in a fruity mix of sangria. I love to hear how wedding day colors and themes are chosen and reflect the couple’s personality.

Danielle had all of her gorgeous details ready for me to photograph. One very special detail was added to her bouquet and a complete surprise from Jason. It was a beautiful charm with a photo of her father in honor of him. There was not a dry eye in the room as she opened the gift from Jason and read a card that he had written to her. I love, love moments like these!

After spending some time with Danielle, and headed to Jason’s room to capture a few moments with him and the groomsmen before their first look. I always bring the best man along to keep the groom focused while he waits for his bride to appear. A groom hasn’t told me this, but I think it helps to keep him calm before the first look.

Their first look was simply beautiful. They were incredibly happy to see one another. At this point, I’m typically saying aww over and over behind the camera as they take this moment in together.

After some portraits of them together, I had time before the ceremony to photograph the bridal party as well. This was great because after the ceremony, we only had to gather the family for portraits, and the bridal party could enjoy cocktail hour.

The ceremony was in the afternoon, just before sunset and the light was warm and full of glow as Danielle and Jason said their wedding vows to each other.

I love to photograph the sweet glances of couples looking at each other during the ceremony and as they say their vows. Beautiful, priceless moments.

The reception was a fun night of celebrating the new Mr. and Mrs. It was such an honor to photograph their love for one another, their love for their family, the sweet embraces, and all of the wonderful moments of their day that they will cherish for a lifetime.

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.

Kimball Jenkins Estate Wedding Photos

Mon, 09 Nov 2015 13:15:37 GMT

Kimball Jenkins Estate Wedding | Jenn + Pat

If you love all things classic, elegant, navy, and New England you’re going to love Jenn and Pat’s Kimball Jenkins Estate Wedding. This was my first time traveling up to Concord, New Hampshire for a wedding, and the day could not have been more perfect for these two.

We started the day with the bride and her lovely bridesmaids getting ready in one of the beautiful rooms at Kimball Jenkins Estate. The day was lively throughout, and can I say that the bridesmaids were the best. They truly created a warm, vibrant atmosphere with great acapella singing and just cheering this beautiful couple on. You could just feel the love throughout the entire day.

Jenn’s BHLDN Wedding Gown was absolutely stunning. She was such a graceful and gorgeous bride. There was plenty of time for bridal portraits in the early afternoon sunlight, and we also took a few in the library nook before heading outside for more portraits. I have seen the most gorgeous navy wedding themes, and I loved their navy and orange combo.

After some time for portraits, we left for the ceremony which was held at St. Anslem College. The ceremony was sentimental to the sweet couple and their family as St. A’s was near and dear to many hearts there.

This may have been the biggest wedding party this year, but they were all absolutely fantastic. After the ceremony, we captured a few portraits in front of the Alumni Hall, and then traveled back to Kimball Jenkins Estate for a fun time at their reception.

It was certainly an honor to document this couple’s beautiful wedding day! Here are a few favorites from their day.

The bride and bridesmaid’s robes were absolutely adorable. These robes look similar , and are a great gift for bridesmaids!

What a beautiful bride! That beautiful warm smile shined brightly the entire day.

Jenn’s mom made the beautiful angel pins for each of the bouquets in remembrance of her dad. So sweet!

This might be one of my favorite moments of the day.

This was another beautiful moment. They are so happy, and so is everyone else!

If you’re ready to be seen, to be known for what you do, and to show up in a way that truly reflects who you are… I’d love to support you.

Explore my upcoming events & workshops.